Home

ToolBook 11.5 User Guide

1. Figure 3 The Hyperlink dialog box 78 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating Hyperlinks Choosing a Type of Link You have several options when choosing the type of link you want You can define a hyperlink that navigates to another page or one that pops up a page For example you can add a button to a page that when clicked takes the user to another page or opens a pop up window When you create a hyperlink to another page you can also specify a transition effect A hyperlink that pops up a page is useful when presenting technical content to both novice and expert users For example you can create hotwords for the technical terms in your content that when clicked open a pop up window containing the definition of a term When you create a hyperlink that pops up a page you can specify the style of the pop up window In addition the destination of a hyperlink can be either a page in a book or a URL on the Internet When creating a hyperlink to a URL on the Internet you can define objects that launch a Web browser and jump to a Web site as described in the table on the following page Hyperlinking to a URL Choose this option If you want to define a hyperlink that Go to another page Jumps to the specified URL in the current window of the Web browser If the Web browser is not open at the time of the jump ToolBook will open it before jumping to t
2. Users must have Windows XP SP2 or higher Preparing Files for the Internet You prepare files for distribution on the Internet using the Publish to Web process This process gathers information about your application and then creates the files that you ll distribute to your learners More information about using Publish to Web is available in Chapter 22 Distributing Applications on the Internet Preparing Files for a Local Area Network You prepare files for distribution on a local area network using the ToolBook AutoPackager Before using the AutoPackager you ll need to decide whether users will install the course on their local computers by running a setup program from a central server or whether they will run the course from the central server and view it on their local computers If you plan to have users install the course on their local computers you should prepare your application for the AutoPackager using the same optimization methods you would use if you were distributing via CD ROM see the following section However when you use the AutoPackager select the local area network LAN distribution option If you plan to have your users run the course from a central server simply organize your application and any media or ancillary files in an orderly directory structure If you reorganize your directory structure during the development process you can use the AutoPackager to update any media paths in your application For
3. File Path The string of characters and delimiters that specify the location of a file as in the following example C My Projects Fire Safety tbk File Transfer Protocol FTP A set of rules for transferring files from one computer to another ToolBook includes an FTP utility you can use to transfer files from one computer to another Fill The color or pattern applied to the inside of any enclosed object You cannot apply a fill color to paint objects or picture objects See also paint object picture object stroke Filter A utility that allows ToolBook to import and convert files from other applications Fixed Field File A text file in which each data field consists of a predefined number of characters Compare delimited field file Focus The object awaiting the next keyboard action Pressing the TAB key moves the focus Only objects that can respond to keystrokes can receive the focus The insertion point in a field or a dotted rectangle in a button shows a user the current focus Focus Window The viewer that currently has the focus The focus window is the viewer that accepts mouse and keyboard input such as selecting check boxes or filling in text fields See also focus viewer Font In Windows a font is the complete collection of styles and sizes for a single typeface such as Times New Roman as part of a set installed for a system s display adapter graphics card and printer Footer Text that appears at the bottom of every
4. Starting a New Book Using a Template You can save time and provide a consistent look and feature set for each new application by using a template As described in About templates earlier in this chapter a template serves as the architecture for your content When you use a template to start a new book ToolBook opens a copy of the template which you name and save gt To start a new book using a template 1 Do one of the following f ToolBook is not running start ToolBook The ToolBook Startup dialog box appears f ToolBook is already running from the File menu choose New The New Book dialog box appears Click From A Templates select a template and then click Create Book In the Select a Name and Location for Your New Book dialog box name the file accept the default directory or choose another file location and then click OK ToolBook opens the book 50 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating a New Book Tip You can bypass the New Book dialog box and automatically open a default template each time you open a new book In the ToolBook Options dialog box available from the View menu clear the following check box Show New Book dialog when starting new book Starting a New Book Using a Book Wizard The Book Wizards automate the task of creating the layout for a ToolBook application These wizards gather input from you about how you want the book to appear an
5. e Feedback Field A text field that you can use in conjunction with a question object and optionally a score button to display feedback 68 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Exploring Types of Catalog Objects Placeholders The placeholders included with ToolBook are objects that you can use to display images embed HTML code and integrate other Web technologies You apply settings to each object using that object s Extended Properties dialog box In books that will be Published to DHTML the placeholders include e File Placeholder A placeholder in which you can place any object that can be inserted into a Web page using an HTML embed tag If your users machines are capable of running the file that is they have the appropriate plug in or helper application installed the file will run e Java Placeholder A placeholder that includes a J ava applet in an application that will be Published for the Web e Animated GIF Placeholder A placeholder that allows users to view GIF Graphics Interchange Format animations that you specify e PowerPoint Placeholder A placeholder that allow users to view a PowerPoint presentation in a Web browser Media Players Media players are objects that you add to your application to enable users to play sound video or animation files including content created by Adobe Captivate The Universal Media Player is the primary object for add
6. 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Using the Extended Properties Dialog Box Using the Extended Properties Dialog Box You can set the extended properties of Catalog objects in the Extended Properties dialog box To tell quickly whether an object has extended properties select the object on the page or background and look at the Extended Properties button on the toolbar The button is available only when you select an object with extended properties gt To set extended properties for an object 1 Do one of the following Select the object and then click the Extended Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar m Right click the object and then click the Extended Properties button on the right click menu n the Properties dialog box for the object click the Extended Properties button on the toolbar 2 Inthe object s Extended Properties dialog box specify the options you want 3 Click OK Setting Extended Properties for Groups Many of the objects in the Catalog are actually groups of individual objects In some cases the group itself such as a video player with controls has extended properties and in other cases the individual objects within the group such as the buttons in a navigation panel have extended properties The easiest way to set extended properties for an entire group is to select the group and then click the Extended Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar
7. Adding Resources to a Book There are many ways to add a resource to your book You can Create a new resource and add it to your book Import an existing file to be used as a resource Copy a resource from another book Add an object that includes a resource from the Catalog ToolBook automatically imports the resource into the current book Use OpenScript to refer to a resource in another book ToolBook automatically imports the resource into the current book Insert an inline graphic into a field or record field Import a ToolBook page or an entire book that contains resources If you ve planned in advance all the artwork system elements and other resources that you want to include you can use the Resource Manager to add them to the book all at once If you re designing as you go or if you discover that you need additional resources you can add individual resources one at a time gt To add a resource to a book using the Resource Manager 1 244 From the Object menu choose Resources The Resource Manager dialog box appears In the Available resources list select the type of resource you want to add Do one of the following To import a file as a resource click Import The Import Resource dialog box appears Select the resource you want to import and then click OK m To create anew resource click New The ToolBook utility application for creating the type of resource you ve selected opens Create the re
8. Bellona textline 3 of text of field Cities Oz You can also paste text from the Clipboard into a list box gt To paste text into a list box 1 Copy the text you want to the Clipboard 2 Double click inside the list box into which you want to paste the text An insertion point appears 3 From the Edit menu choose Paste and then click outside the list box Note If the text you paste is too long to fit the list box ToolBook displays as much text as possible You cannot scroll to see missing text but if you resize the list box the text becomes visible You can also set the OpenScript property borderStyle to scrolling For details about working with text in fields see Chapter 8 Working with Text Creating Combo Boxes You can drag a combo box from the Catalog to your page use the combo box tool on the tool palette or use OpenScript to create a combo box The size of the area you draw for a combo box determines the width of the edit box If you create a combo box using the tool palette the current font and font size determine the height of the combo box s edit box If you create a combo box using OpenScript the height is set by the OpenScript lineCount property When you select the combo box selection handles appear around the edit box portion You can resize a combo box after you draw it Adding a Combo Box from the Catalog The Catalog contains a combo box that you can drag from the object pane and drop onto your page
9. Building this action sequence shows you how to e Select an event e Define conditions for behavior e Go to pages in a book e Display a message in a dialog box Opening the Actions Editor and Selecting an Event Every action sequence you create for an object handles a specific event and you can create a separate sequence of actions for each possible event In this case you will create an action sequence that handles a button click gt To open the Actions Editor and select the event 1 If ToolBook is currently open at Reader level press F3 to move to Author level 2 On the second page of the Actions Editor Walkthrough book select the Continue button 3 From the Object menu choose Actions The Actions Editor appears 4 If On click is not selected in the action sequence click the event to open the Event list and then select On click Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 221 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples Inserting Actions Because you want to send users to two different locations depending on their radio button selections you need to determine which button a user has selected You can insert a condition to create a conditional expression that tests user selection gt To insert a condition 1 2 8 From the Insert menu point to Condition and then select If If the Properties for Condition dialog box does not open automatically click the Prop
10. Choose Text Delimited fields from the File format options and then type a delimiter character in the Delimiter box For atab delimited source file type t For asingle character delimiter such as a comma or pound sign type that character You cannot use a quotation mark as the delimiter ToolBook reserves the use of the quotation mark to enclose text that contains a delimiter in the source file You can import a delimiter character as data by enclosing it in quotation marks Click OK to return to the Import dialog box Navigate to and select the text file you want to import and then click OK ToolBook imports the file creating a new record field for each data field Whenever ToolBook finds a delimiter in the source file it removes this character and places the data from the data field into a record field Whenever ToolBook finds a record separator CRLF in the source file it creates a new page Using OpenScript e To import a delimited field text file use the import command with the delimited keyword Imports a delimited text file that uses spaces to separate fields import c titles dbs as delimited using space Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 257 Importing and Exporting Data Exporting Text from Record Fields You can export data from ToolBook record fields to text files so that you can use the data in other applications You can export a record fiel
11. Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 321 Glossary Paint Object A ToolBook object created by importing a bitmap into ToolBook or by pasting a bitmap from the Clipboard When you drag the handles of a paint object to make it smaller the image is cropped See also bitmap crop Compare draw object picture object Paint Type Graphic See bitmap Palette 1 Predefined set of colors that can be imported and edited in ToolBook 2 ToolBook s collection of tools used for drawing and selecting objects and specifying color line ends and style pattern or polygon shapes Palette Colors The colors remaining in a color palette after ToolBook has allocated its 16 or 32 standard colors and optionally another 64 custom colors For example if solidColorsEnabled is true on a 256 color system ToolBook makes 160 palette colors available Palette Flash Also known as palette shift A change in the colors of graphics that occurs when you display a graphic with a color palette different from the one currently in use Palette Optimizer A utility you can use to adjust the colors used in imported graphics so that they achieve a close match to the colors that are available in the ToolBook color palette See also palette Palette Resource A color palette that you import for use in a book When you import a color palette all imported graphics in the book use colors from that palette See also color palette
12. Ctrl F6 Figure 3 Sample right click menu The right click menu for a grouped object includes child objects in the parent submenu For instance the right click menu for a Universal Media Player which is a grouped object provides access to the properties of both the grouped object as well as the properties of the individual objects that make up this group Group Universal Media Player Universal Media Player B Page id 0 Actions F5 Ma Dadel Hyperlink ctlsshirta ll Book C desktop new2 thk A Book C Program Files ToolBook ToolBook 11 5 tb115xml sbk Hide Book C Program Files ToolBook ToolBook 11 5 tb115styles sbk a Bl Book C Program Files ToolBook ToolBook 11 5 tb115acta sbk ig Ungroup Ctrl Shift S gy Book C Program Files ToolBook ToolBook 11 5 tb115i sbk iil Book C Program Files ToolBook ToolBook 11 5 tb115a sbk amp cut Ctrl x Book C Program Files ToolBook ToolBook 11 5 tb115 sbk BA Copy Ctrl C Book C Common Files ToolBook TBSystem tb115actr sbk Paste Ctrl V Book C Common Files ToolBook TBSystem tb115r sbk T Duplicate Ctrl D Book C Common Files ToolBook TBSystem tb 115hyp sbk X Delete Del i Group mediaControls Rename F stage mediastage A Group Properties Shift F6 Button OCXArea Sf Universal Media Player Properties Ctrl F6 Figure 4 Right click menu of a grouped object 98 Copyright
13. CurrentPasswords passwordTypes name of this book Navigating Through a Book There are many ways to allow for navigation through a book You can use ToolBook navigation objects from the Catalog you can assign navigation actions to objects using the Actions Editor or you can rely on the built in navigation tools at both Reader level and Author level You can specify that certain pages be skipped from navigating specify conditions for skipping to a particular page or Uniform Resource Locator URL and set a transition effect for moving from one page to another 60 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Navigating Through a Book Using Built in Navigation You can move from page to page using the menus or buttons in the status bar or the keyboard The table on the next page shows the ways to go to different pages Moving from page to page To move to this From the Go menu At Author level click on Or press these page choose the status bar keys Next Next Page D ALT RIGHT ARROW Previous Previous Page Ei ALT LEFT ARROW First First Page ALT UP ARROW Last Last Page ALT DOWN ARROW Note You can also navigate by entering a page name number or id number in the Go To dialog box available from the Edit menu Using Navigation Objects The Catalog contains navigation objects that you can use to help the user navigate through your appl
14. Practice Question dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua E Lesson Summary Q A e M E a EN N Law a E D Backgrounds ma 8 en T New Hire Training New Hire Training Introduction Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua Figure 2 Author level and Reader level in ToolBook For more information about Author level and Reader level see Chapter 3 Learning the ToolBook Interface 26 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Building an Application Books and Pages An online learning application created with ToolBook consists of one or more files called books You
15. gt To add a comb box from the Catalog 1 Click the Catalog button on the ToolBook toolbar to open the Catalog 2 Inthe Catalog select the Text Fields category 3 Drag a combo box onto your page Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 143 Working with List Boxes and Combo Boxes Creating a Combo Box Using the Tool Palette You can draw a combo box on your page using the combo box tool gt To create a combo box using the tool palette 1 From the tool palette choose the combo box tool 2 Click in the main window and hold down the mouse button while you drag to draw the combo box The box you draw will include both the edit box and the pushbutton Edit box Pushbutton The drop down list will appear below the combo box in front of any other object on the page Creating a Combo Box Using OpenScript Combo boxes you create using OpenScript will not Publish to Web You can use a combo box from the Catalog if you want it to Publish to Web or draw one using the tool palette gt To create a combo box using OpenScript e Use the draw command to draw the combo box and the lineCount property to set the height of the drop down list For example draw combobox from 100 1000 to 5000 2000 name of selection myList lineCount of combobox myList 3 Setting Combo Box Properties You set combo box properties using the Properties for Combo Box dialog box Using this d
16. 20 Importing and Exporting Data Introduction You can import and export text and graphics in ToolBook In addition you can import books and pages from other ToolBook applications into your current ToolBook application You can also import a ToolBook XML book into ToolBook Importing and exporting affords flexibility and saves time because you can leverage your development efforts by reusing material Further you can incorporate material from a number of sources adding variety and extending functionality This chapter discusses how to import and export data and describes how to customize the import process to fit the needs of your application About Importing and Exporting Importing is the process of reading information from a file and copying it into your current book Exporting is the opposite reading information from your current book and copying it to another file In a ToolBook application you can import and export text and graphics You can also import pages and books from other ToolBook applications You can import and export text in two common text formats a plain text format called ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange and RTF Rich Text Format You can import graphics in a wide variety of common file formats and you can export to GIF Graphics Interchange Format PNG Portable Network Graphics J PEG J oint Photographic Experts Group format TIFF Tagged Image File Format WMF Windows Metafile
17. 3 Inthe Properties for Action dialog box do the following a Select Enter literal text b Inthe Specify the text to display box type Please select an option and try again c Click OK to close the Properties dialog box 4 Inthe Actions Editor from the File menu choose Update Actions amp Close Tip You can leave the Actions Editor open while you test an action sequence From the File menu choose Update Actions rather than Update Actions amp Close Testing the Action Sequence It s a good idea to test your action sequences as you build them You can ensure that an action sequence works and that you are satisfied with the results before you use it again or develop other behaviors to respond to the expected outcome gt To test the Display alert action 1 Press F3 to switch to Reader level 2 Click Continue If a dialog box appears with the message Please select an option and try again it indicates that both your conditional structure and Display alert action are working Now test the Go to page action gt To test the Go to page action 1 At Reader level select Advanced user 2 Click Continue If the Contents page appears your action sequence is working and you are ready to return to Author level and continue with the next example If your results were different than those described above your action sequence is not working Return to Author level and review the instructions in Example 1 Copyright 2012 Sum
18. Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 169 Hiding Showing and Animating Objects Using the ToolBook Animation Editor You use the ToolBook Animation Editor to create edit and manage the animations in a book When you open the Animation Editor ToolBook copies all of the objects on the page or background to the Animation Editor You use the buttons and slider along the bottom of the window to create edit and run animations ToolBook Animation Editor 2 7 A Plays the current animation B Allows you to specify points M gt CHAPTERTITLE on the animation path C Allows you to move TOPICTITLE segments vertices or the entire path ransforming the look of an object is very easy within EasyImage Change a basic outline into a 3D image with a drop shadow at the click of a button D Allows you to add new segments to the animation E Opens the Animation Settings dialog box F Opens the Select Object dialog box G Savesthe current animation and closes the ToolBook Actions Editor H Cancels changes to the current animation and clases the ToolBook Animation Editor Opens online Help A B oD E F amp H Figure 1 ToolBook Animation Editor gt To open the Animation Editor 1 Optional In the main window select the object you want to animate 2 From the Object menu choose Path Animation To create a path animation in the Animation Editor
19. Replacing Resources You can replace the resources in a book with other resources For example if you apply a bitmap resource to a button and then replace the resource with a new bitmap the new bitmap appears in place of the old resource everywhere that it is used gt To replace a resource in a book 1 From the Object menu choose Resources The Resource Manager dialog box appears In the Available resources list select the type of resource you want to replace In the graphical list of resources select the resource you want to replace and then click Replace The Replace Resource or Import Graphic dialog box appears depending on the type of resource you re replacing 4 Navigate to and select the resource file you want to use and then click OK Optional Close the Resource Manager dialog box The new resource replaces the old resource throughout the book Using OpenScript e Use the replace resource command to replace an old resource with a new one For the new resource specify the file name of a resource of the same type For example replace resource cursor arrow with c cursors arrowl cur Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 249 Using Resources Exporting Resources You can export icon and cursor resources that you have created or modified to use in other books or Windows programs gt To export a resource from a book Using the interface 1 From the Objec
20. ToolBook ToolBook 11 5 User Guide Suntfotal LS Table of Contents Gelting Startled sicsissscsiseusasdcererasssesesasbansaressasneaasdsnsenabisnsasvetaubisendasnesuonsueenabiansanniene 11 MTT OCUCTION osya AEREE AEA E SAAS 11 Introducing TOOIB OOK sorsissiiieos miiirn EE AEAEE EAE ASETETA 12 Belore You Matalo sorisa E ER ENTE 12 System ReguUremeMtS sisrate ernaia eaaa a eea iE aces EEEE EA 12 Additional Digital Media Requirements asssseessssssrnesssrnnnssnansnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnannnana 13 Installing TOOIBOOK seiiieierriaeeisi iasi naana ERNE AEAEE EEEE AE AAE EA EEEE REAR 13 Starting and Exiting TOOIBOOK c ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeaeeceeeeseaeeesaaesseeeeseeeeseaeeescaeseeeeeeenees 14 Learning TOOIBOOK suriros ieie ei aE SNELA EE EEE EEEO AE E ee 15 TOOIBOOK UUIG S rioei inre EE ao E NEE EAE EENE U NAARAAN 15 TOoOIBook DOCUIMOMTALION sissors anenun enei eE Kene EAE NA ENE ELEKEA NARE a AAEE EENAA 16 Using the Help System snssiriscsrr nadra inesrriaiiriiieisranianni iiei aaia aadi aa 17 Using the ToolBook CoaChrssssrrnasiiiinesrriaais iniernacia a ieii 17 Visiting the ToolBook Web Site ccecceecececeeeeeceeeeecaeeeeaee senses caeeeeaaeeeceeeseeeeesaeeesaeeeeaeeseaees 18 Contacting SumTotal for Technical SUpport s sisien anaie ia 18 ABOUIE THIS BOOR craen a E stauenimesudeicessaeetansauevinnte 18 Finding OPSNSCript IMSMUCTION sicaire ae a ae e aaea eS 18 Docum
21. When the user selects an item the current value of the edit box is discarded and replaced with the user s choice If you want to preserve the old value save it before the selectChange message is sent One option is to store the old value as a user property of the combo box when the user presses the combo box s pushbutton and the enterDropDown message is sent For example put both of these handlers in the script of a combo box to handle enterDropDown saveText of self text of self end enterDropDown to handle selectChange vText dropDownItems of self if saveText of self amp CRLF is not in vText amp CRLF then dropDownItems of self vText amp CRLF amp saveText of self end end You can also use the selected tem property to determine the selected item by position number in the combo box Use this script in the combo box to determine what the user has selected to handle enterDropDown my oldSelectedItem my selectedItem end to handle leaveDropDown conditions when my selectedItem gt my oldSelectedItem send greaterItemChosen when my selectedItem lt my oldSelectedItem send lesserItemChosen else send sameItemChosen end end Note Be sure to handle the three new messages generated by this script or an error will occur For more information on handling messages refer to the Programming in OpenScript electronic book Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited
22. and conventions Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 11 Getting Started Introducing ToolBook ToolBook is a complete courseware authoring system that allows you to create and distribute online learning applications With ToolBook you can focus on what is important presenting the material to be learned ToolBook helps you create and manage the content navigation feedback and quizzes that are a vital part of your interactive learning applications You can easily add sound animation video graphics and other special effects to your applications making them lively and engaging Hyperlinks and navigation objects allow your learners to control the direction and pace of their learning experience ToolBook is designed for use by a broad spectrum of course developers and instructional designers If you are new to developing online learning applications you ll find that ToolBook s easy to use features will get you quickly on your way to producing high quality interactive courses More experienced course developers will appreciate the robust content creation environment of ToolBook the Actions Editor visual programming tool the powerful OpenScript programming language and a variety of other design options After you have created a course using ToolBook you can deliver it on demand to any student with access to the Internet or you can deploy it on your company s intranet ToolBook offers
23. 149 Creating a Quiz using Question Objects Introduction An important part of interactive courseware is the ability to evaluate how well a user is learning the material presented To assist you with this task ToolBook provides question objects that you can use to test student knowledge This chapter describes question objects and shows you how to use and modify them to suit your application It also introduces the new Quiz Summary feature About Question Objects Question objects allow you to construct different types of questions including multiple choice questions true false questions fill in the blank questions match item questions and so on Question objects determine the responses that users make calculate the score and provide feedback There are many types of question objects available from the Catalog You can customize their appearance and behavior or use them as they are provided and simply add your own content Select an answer Select the right option by clicking t Leaming solutions primary work is Delivenng Instructor led training Providing blended learning solutions Creating custom online courses Match the following Match the first four steps of ihe content development process with the images provided below by drawing an arrow from ihe step to the image If you made a mistake and want io change your response select a response field and draw an arrow to a differant imag
24. If you want text input to be evaluated during a simulation specify the correct response text in the Simulation Editor gt To set the response options for text entry 1 Ona page which includes an editable text field and a simulation open the Simulation Editor and select or add a step to the simulation outline Insert an evaluation object which identifies the name of the editable text field In the property grid of the Simulation Editor under the Miscellaneous section click the empty cell in the Value row to open the Edit Text Response dialog box 4 Enter the text that the learner should type as a response and select options for acceptable text input Displaying Feedback Feedback is an automated response that may display after a learner interacts with a simulation Text such as Try again can appear in a pop up window or text field if a learner makes a mistake when interacting with a step in a simulation You can enter the feedback text that you want to display after an incorrect answer attempt or show the default text generated by ToolBook Other feedback options include playing a sound or showing an animation Feedback can be turned on or off for any step in a simulation Unique feedback text can be assigned for each incorrect attempt to complete a step For example a hint could be shown in response to the first incorrect attempt and after the second incorrect attempt a description of the correct way to complete the step could a
25. The Template directory is the default location for storing templates gt To save a book as a template 1 From the File menu choose Save as Template 2 Inthe Save as Template dialog box enter the template title description file name and directory and then click OK After developing a template you may want to provide guidance about the template to other ToolBook authors who will use the template to create applications To describe the purpose of a page in a template or guidelines for its use you can write descriptive text that will appear in the ToolBook Coach when the page is selected For more information about assigning your own descriptive text refer to Adding Coach text to a custom Catalog object in the Customization Guide online book available from the Developer Corner on the www toolbook com site Creating a New Book You can start a new book in ToolBook by using a template creating a blank book from scratch or using one of the Book Wizards When you start a new book you ll need to choose one of two possible ways to deliver the book as Web pages that automatically incorporate DHTML features or as a native ToolBook TBK file Based on your choice certain menu commands and options may be unavailable if unsuited to the selected deployment method For more information about your delivery options see Chapter 20 Distributing Applications on the Internet and Chapter 21 Preparing Native ToolBook Applications for Release
26. ToolBook ignores these Or you can use the Match case option to find only text that matches the capitalization you entered in the Find what box For example if you enter Hello World ToolBook ignores Hello world Fields that you have hidden cannot be searched using the Find or Replace commands However ToolBook does search fields that are obscured by another object including the Find dialog box or are outside the bounds of the window ToolBook scrolls the text in a field to display found text and the Find button changes to Find Next To be sure you will see all found text choose Size to Page from the View menu or click the Maximize button before using the Find or Replace command If your application uses the Find and Replace commands at Reader level users of your application will be able to search fields and record fields ToolBook can find text in activated fields but at Reader level this text cannot be edited gt To find or replace text 1 From the Edit menu choose Find or Replace 2 Enter the text for which you want to search in the Find what box If you are replacing text enter the new text in the Replace with box 3 Choose search options if appropriate You can choose to match a whole word and to match uppercase and lowercase text 4 Click Find to start the search ToolBook finds and highlights the first occurrence of the text If the text is on a different page ToolBook goes
27. You can select a field and then set its properties in the Properties for Text Field or Properties for Record Field dialog box Each tab in these dialog boxes contains settings that allow you to specify some aspect of a field s behavior and appearance Properties for Text Field A a m E f E Name Lee E Je Draw Bounds Font Paragraph Behavior Drag amp Drop Border style Scroling Feld type Drawing options Colors l Draw transparent Use Windows colors Draw baselines e Use custom colors Bicolor C7 Stroke color mn Figure 2 Properties for Text Field dialog box Fields are identified by the same properties that identify other objects such as a name and ID number Additional properties define specific characteristics of fields The field type property defines the type and function of a field for example whether it is a wordwrap text field or a multiple select list box A field also has properties that define its behavior at run time such as whether a field is editable allows users to enter text or activated locks the text and activates mouse events at Reader level gt To set the properties of a field 1 Select the field and then click the Properties button i on the ToolBook toolbar The Properties for Text Field or Properties for Record Field dialog box appears 2 Click one or more tabs and select or enter the options you want to set as described in the table below ToolBook field prop
28. and so on The data fields are separated by the delimiter character you specify in the Export dialog box Frank Jones 12 2nd Ave Welm WA 98692 555 1986 Jill Smith 52 W 19th Welm WA 98692 555 7651 Figure 5 Exporting data to a delimited field file gt To export data into a delimited field text file 1 Open the book from which you want to export data 2 If the book uses more than one background go to a page with the record fields containing the data you want to export 3 From the Tools menu point to Export and then choose Record Fields The Export dialog box appears 260 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Importing Books and Pages 4 Inthe Export dialog box specify a path under Directories and type a file name in the File name box If you don t type a file name extension ToolBook adds the txt extension Click Format to open the Text Format dialog box Choose Text Delimited fields from the File format options and then type a delimiter character in the Delimiter box For a tab delimited source file type t For asingle character delimiter such as a comma or pound sign type that character You cannot use a quotation mark as the delimiter ToolBook reserves the use of the quotation mark as a symbol to enclose text that contains a delimiter in the source file You can export a delimiter character as data by enclosing it in quotation
29. and then click OK 4 Repeat the steps above to define a second parameter and name it Rate It is sometimes easier to divide a long equation into two parts You can use a variable to store the result of one calculation Then you can use that variable in a second calculation gt To define a variable 1 On the Local Variables tab click New 2 Inthe Name box select NewVariable and in its place type Product 3 Inthe Initial value box type 0 zero 4 Click OK Inserting Actions You can easily complete the calculation by dividing it into two steps First you will multiply the parameters Rate and Tax round the result to the nearest integer and store the resulting value in the local variable named Product Then you will use a variable named returnValue to store the final value that results from the operations that are carried out in the shared action sequence gt To set the value of a variable 1 From the Insert menu point to Action point to General and then choose Set Variable The Properties for Action dialog box appears 2 Inthe Choose a variable to set list select Product 3 Click the Build expression button m to open the Build Expression dialog box and then do the following Inthe Select the type of item to insert list select Operators and functions in the Select a category list select All functions in the Select an operator or function list select round click Insert into Expression In the expr
30. and then click the pointer where the new segment should end Move the Vertex cursor N and click to add segments until you have completed the path Click Done to save the animation and return to the main window gt To testan animation e Click the Run button gt in the Animation Editor Alternatively use the slide bar at the bottom of the Animation Editor to step through an animation sequence Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 171 Hiding Showing and Animating Objects Creating a Cel Animation A cel animation displays a series of images to give the illusion of motion much like a flipbook animation For example you can use cel animation to create the appearance of a spinning globe The animation consists of different views of the earth each called a cel Showing one cel at a time in succession gives the illusion that the globe is turning Figure 3 Six cels from a cel animation After creating all of the individual cels you arrange them on top of each other in the correct consecutive layer order and then group them When you play a cel animation ToolBook shows and hides the cells from first to last over and over gt To create a cel animation 1 Inthe main window create the individual objects to serve as cels in the animation 2 Arrange the layer order of the objects so that the first cel is on the farthest lowest layer and the last cel is on the closest h
31. draw comboBox from 100 1000 to 5000 2000 lineCount of comboBox myItems 3 dropDownItems of comboBox myItems item 1 amp CRLF amp item 2 amp CRLF amp item 3 text of comboBox myItems item 1 LineCount controls the number of lines in the drop down list while dropDownltems controls the text displayed in the list box These properties don t have to match If the number of textlines in dropDownltems is greater than lineCount if you specify more list options than will fit in the visible drop down list ToolBook displays as much of the list as it can Add a scroll bar so that the user can see all the text Determining User Selection You can use list boxes and combo boxes to customize the behavior or content of your application for individual users For example you can show a video or direct users to a particular page based on their list box or combo box selection To determine and handle a user s list box or combo box selection you can either build an action sequence in the Actions Editor or write a script in OpenScript The action sequences that you create in the Actions Editor Publish to Web for use on the Web 146 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Determining User Selection Determining List Box or Combo Box Selections Using an Action Sequence In an action sequence you determine a user s selection in a single select list box or combo box using the On sel
32. or you can work with the individual objects within the group For example you can change properties for individual objects in a group without affecting the properties of the group itself You can move size add objects to and delete objects from a group without ungrouping it You can also nest groups within groups Before you can edit a group you must first select it gt To select a group e Click an object within the group Any changes you make apply to all of the objects within the group gt To deselect a group e Do one of the following If an entire group is selected click outside the group s bounding box If an object within a group is selected double click outside the bounding box to deselect the entire group Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 91 Working with Objects Editing Objects within a Group You can edit individual objects within a group Simply double click the object to select it and then make your changes You can also edit the text in a field that is part of a group Double click to select the field double click again to display the insertion point and then make your changes to the text gt To select an object within a group e Double click the object you want to select A bounding box appears around the group and handles appear around the object you selected Any changes you make apply only to the selected object e Click another object to change
33. select the required ToolBook XML file 272 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Importing ToolBook XML 5 If you selected Uncompressed XML Book in step 3 select the root Book xml in the ToolBook XML book s directory The book s XML and supporting files should be the only things in the directory Click Open After the conversion process the following happens a If you imported a compressed ToolBook XML book m A ToolBook book with the same name as the ToolBook XML book is saved to the location of the ToolBook XML book a If you imported an uncompressed ToolBook XML book A ToolBook book with the same name as the directory in which the root Book xml of the uncompressed ToolBook XML book is located is saved to that directory Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 273 Building Software Simulations Introduction A software simulation imitates the appearance and behavior of a software program Using the simulation tools available in ToolBook you can create accurate simulations that allow learners to experiment with software in a safe environment Because simulations provide a realistic training experience learners have a high rate of retention This chapter describes how to plan and build a software simulation using the capture features in the Sim AutoBuilder and the built in properties and tools in the Simulation Edito
34. 5 Continue checking words until the spell check is complete and then click Close to exit the Spelling dialog box Checking for Unused Resources Resources added to your book during development increase the overall file size of your project If you have added bitmaps fonts menus or other resources to your book that you did not use in any part of your application you can remove those resources from your book to reduce the file size For more information about resources see Chapter 19 Using Resources gt To remove resources from a book 1 From the Object menu choose Resources In the Available resources list select the type of resource you want to remove In the graphical list of resources select the resource you want to remove Click Remove to remove the resource Repeat steps 2 3 and 4 until you have removed all unused resources from your book Click Close oa FON Tip You cannot remove a resource from the book if it has been assigned to an object The Resource Manager Dialog box maintains a reference count which reflects the number of times a resource is used in a book This reference count is not updated for references to a resource within a script Be careful not to remove any resources that are referenced ina script Checking for Unused Extensions If you added an extension during development that you do not use in your book it is still registered as an extension that your book needs to run You should remove any ext
35. All rights reserved Duplication prohibited i Table of Contents Using the Book Explorer sic s0 tsceneditecee eine die ied ne cee dane ee dc 41 Working with the Property and Handler Browsers cscceeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeenaeeesesnaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes 42 Working with Rulers and the Gridirninscniii taiii aii 43 Working with Right Click MenuS wi ihe aa enn a 44 Working at Reader Level esenee n A ETEO E 46 Navigating in an AppliCatiOn ccc sctncaceniid ca scttactine EEE EEE E EEE 47 Using the Status Bar Page Navigation Features sssssssssusssusssrussrnssnuessusssussenssenessnsssssssss 47 Using the Go Menuvand Arrow Keys cicnsrsinnedirdinieinpi a ee a eee 48 Navigating using the Book Explorer scsic cescc eect c cchd cents ated EE 48 Creating BOOKS and PAGS wicsisiccssssenssorscossscusesenussstensssdseassauscasntausereeussstaussnseeas 49 IOCU CUON ni E EA AOE sede atone AE E E aoa ag 49 About BOOKS ANd PAGQeSivccses tects gauseetscacetet iaauiesPiabeess E A OE ENO 49 About TOM PIALCS iiD E ET S E nis sate 49 Creating and Saving Templates c ccecccecsceceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeesaaeseeeeeseaeeeeiaeeseeeseeneees 50 Creating a New BOOK vicsisat cece ceaviatd iaee a pects tamper ia aihaeh a N aE a EEEa EE NAS aa 50 Starting a New Book Using a Template cccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeseaeeseaeeeeeeees 50 Starting a New Book Using a Book Wizard cccccceeeeeceeeee ects eeeaeeeeaeesee
36. Answer dialog box 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for the remaining answers 6 Specify any other options you want and then click OK to close the Properties dialog box Figure 1 The ToolBook Coach Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 17 Getting Started Visiting the ToolBook Web Site The ToolBook web site offers a variety of information You ll find technical information and support see examples of products created with our software and learn about the many solutions we provide for creating and managing online learning Here are some examples from among the many features you ll find at www toolbook com e Access to the Knowledge Base a database of product information where you can perform keyword searches for articles e Access to files that you can download including sample applications plug ins and updates of current applications Contacting SumTotal for Technical Support If you have questions that cannot be answered by the ToolBook documentation Help or the online resources available from the ToolBook web site contact technical support representatives at SumTotal Systems Refer to the telephone support information on the ToolBook web site www toolbook com About this Book This book has the following chapters that describe different aspects of building an interactive learning application with ToolBook e Chapters 1 to 3 discuss basic ToolBook concepts and describe the user
37. Contents Then find the information you need by choosing from the many Help categories and topics e Open acontext sensitive Help topic in a dialog box by clicking the Help button e Search on keywords by choosing Search for Help On from the Help menu e Display tooltips on the screen by pausing the pointer over a button on a toolbar Using the ToolBook Coach The ToolBook Coach is a quick convenient reference tool that provides context sensitive information as you re authoring The Coach displays tips and suggestions about the page you re working on step by step procedures for any object you select and design guidance Leave the Coach open as you work and note how the information in the Coach window changes dynamically according to the object and page you re working with gt To display the Coach e From the Help menu choose Coach ToolBook Coach Multiple choice buttons allow the user to click a button to choose an answer To display a question or statement drag a text field from the Catalog drop it on the page and then enter your text If you want to add an additional answer choice select one answer button and choose Duplicate from the menu Quick Steps 1 Onthe Answers tab of the Properties dialog box select one button caption and then click the Edit button 2 Enter answer text to be displayed on the button 3 Click the Incorrect or Correct button to switch the setting for this answer 4 Click OK to close the Edit the
38. Editor toolbar The Parameters and Variables dialog box appears 3 On either the Local Variables or Global Variables tab depending on the type of variable you want to define click New In the Variables dialog box enter a descriptive name and then click OK Optional Type a starting value for the variable in the Initial value box Repeat steps 3 4 and 5 until you have defined all the variables used in your shared action sequence gt To set the return value 1 Create a new shared action sequence 2 Inthe Actions Editor from the Insert menu point to Action point to General and then select Set Return Value The Properties for Action dialog box appears 3 Type in the value to return to the action sequence or use the Build Expression dialog box to build an expression and then click OK Executing Shared Action Sequences A shared action sequence executes only when an action sequence or another shared action sequence Calls it Note If you execute a shared action sequence that returns a value you should define a variable to store that value gt To execute a shared action sequence 1 Open the action sequence in which you want to execute a shared action sequence 2 Select the action after which you want the shared action sequence to run 3 From the Insert menu point to Action point to General and then choose Execute Shared Actions The Properties for Action dialog box appears 4 Do the following Copyright 2
39. For more information see Creating and managing clips later in this chapter You can set a media player s properties to refine its appearance visual media clips only and behavior Media players also feature an Extended Properties dialog box You can select a clip to play specify when and for how long the clip plays and for visual media determine whether the clip will play in a stage or in a pop up window Note If you do not specify a stage in which to play a visual media clip it will appear in a pop up window at Reader level Working with Media Players and Stages Video players and media players are objects that you drag from the Catalog and drop onto a page in your book In native books the Catalog also features a stage that you can use in conjunction with a media player to play visual media clips You can also draw a stage using the stage tool on the tool palette gt To insert a media player from the Catalog 1 Open the Catalog from the View menu choose Catalog 2 Select the Media Players category 3 Drag one of the media player objects from the object pane and then drop it onto your page gt To draw a stage Using the interface 1 From the tool palette choose the stage tool 2 On your page hold down the mouse button while you drag and then release when the stage is the size you want 182 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Using Other Media Players Using
40. Format EMF Enhanced Metafile and BMP Bitmap Importing and exporting text and graphics allows you to incorporate material from other sources into your ToolBook application and reuse material from one ToolBook application to another Importing books and pages from other ToolBook applications is a way to take advantage of your earlier work For example if you have created a tutorial application in another book in ToolBook you can import its pages into new tutorials that you create Importing or exporting is also useful when you need to share information with an application that doesn t support Dynamic Data Exchange DDE object linking and embedding OLE or the calling of functions in a dynamic link library DLL For example you might need information from a database that doesn t run under Windows You could export the data from the database into a text file and then import the text file into your book You could also export text from your book into a text file that you can then import into a database spreadsheet or word processing program The ToolBook XML format provides a way to import content that was created by other applications SumTotal provides a Publish to ToolBook add in for use with PowerPoint This add in exports the presentation in either ToolBook XML format tbkx or native ToolBook format tbk both of which can be opened in ToolBook This chapter discusses importing and exporting data in ToolBook but does not discus
41. J Edit Script Opens the script editor where you can write or edit a script for the selected object K Edit Shared Script Opens the script editor where you can edit a shared script L Select Shared Script Allows you to choose a shared script to edit or to create a new shared script M Help Opens the Help topic for the currently displayed tab in the Properties dialog box When you have finished setting properties you can click the Close button X in the upper right corner of the dialog box Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 97 Setting Object Properties Using the Right Click Menu You can set properties for an object by using the right click menu The right click menu contains commands specific to the object you right clicked these commands offer a quick way to set properties that you can also set in the Properties dialog box For example to rename a button simply right click the button and choose Rename from the right click menu The Rename dialog box opens where you can modify the name The name you specify is set as a property of the button and will appear in the Properties dialog box Button Action Trigger Action Trigger gt Actions FS Hyperlink Ctrl Shift H Hide Layer gt cut Ctrl x 3a Copy Ctrl C A Paste Ctrl LP Duplicate Ctrl D X Delete Del Rename eS Button Properties Shift F6 E Action Trigger Properties
42. Minimize ICON ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaee scence seaeeeeaaeeeeneeseeeeesaeeeseeeeenees 247 Changing a Book s System Cursor with OpenScript 0 c ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeseeeeenees 248 Getting Information about a RESOUICE rissin anaia naa aaaea aa alaaa 248 Replacing RESOUFCES oosporo EAEE AEE EARE 249 EXPOMMIMGRESOUICOS oirir E A AEE AATA EREE 250 Removing Resources froma Book essorer imni r 250 Importing ANG Exporting Data siccnscssicasssssecenssticisssvtarsssesisssssensssnusisonssasievsssseais 253 IO CUCUON een ES E OAO EAE 253 About IMPOrting ANG EXPONIN Gessa yee 253 Importing and Exporting Text ccccescceeeeseeceeeeeseceeeeseeeceeeeneeeeeesaaeceeesneaeeeeneeaeesenseaeessneeeeeeenaees 254 Importing Text Files into a Text Field eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseneeeeeseneaeeeeeeeaees 254 Exporting Text from a Text Field ee ceeccceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaeeeseeaaeeeseeaaeeeseeseneeseeseeaees 254 Importing Text into Record Fields 20 0 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseneeeeeseneeeeeseneaeeeeeeneaees 255 Exporting Text from Record Fields ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeseeaaeeeseegeneeeseennneees 258 Importing BOOKS ANd Pages eeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeseeaaeeeseeaeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeenenaes 261 Imporing BOOKS sesinin asnan EEEE E NEENA EEN ENEE DAEN ENNER NE EEE anette ate eS 262 Imporning Page Siisera iinkn E
43. OpenScript Description option Property Checked checkedGraphic Displayed when button is checked or Rollover or displayed as the rollover graphic when the mouse pauses over the button if this option is selected in the Properties for Button dialog box gt To adda graphic to a button Using the interface 1 Select the button to which you want to add a graphic and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar In the Properties dialog box click the Graphics tab Under Button graphics choose a button state Normal Invert Disabled or Checked and then click Choose Graphic The Choose Graphic dialog box appears 4 Select the type of resource you want bitmap cursor or icon in the Available resources list The resources listed in the Choose Graphic dialog box include all the resources of the selected type that have been imported into the current book Any new resources you import are added to the book s resource list 5 Do one of the following To use an existing resource select the graphic you want in the graphical list of resources To import anew resource click Import In the Import Graphic or Import Resource dialog box locate the graphic file you want and click OK then select the resource in the graphical list of resources Click OK to close the Choose Graphic dialog box Optional Under Graphic options do one or more of the following f you want the bitmap to fill the button select Stretch
44. PO smua vo ee ser FIFA TG o 1 2 3 Commonly Used Objects Pages Title O Topi megap me LESSONTITLE a edo Pe ACHAP TERTITLE Introduction Eg IB Toxic O BodyText lo 9 iver Media SmartStyle Button Zo TOPICTITLE Lal Image Placeholder yer 4 Objectives B Our Mission 4 Practice Question Organization Practice Question B Topic L QuestionText m JE Muttiple Choice E Feedback Submit Culture 5 Values unum 4 Practice Question Click Next to continue 4 Lesson Summary BPVooetbeey RE4 CoH OP ssw Backgrounds Figure 1 Various Author Level Tools Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 31 Learning the ToolBook Interface The following tools are available at Author level e Book Explorer An interactive browser that shows all pages and objects in an outline format It provides a convenient way to work with objects e Palettes Contain collections of tools or buttons that you use to draw new objects or change an object s shape color or other properties e ToolBook Catalog Contains graphics navigation panels question objects media players and other preprogrammed objects that you can use to design applications e ToolBook Coach Provides authoring guidance and step by step instructions as you work e The Properties dialog box and Extended Properties dialog box A
45. RINE AAE NE NEUSE ee 69 Media PlAY Ors scctecis sects iseni in EEEE NE hiatus 69 ME ea a E E E E A A E ie T A Y 69 QUESTIONS ssrin ae eras fates chase hati ied othe ated ENNEA 70 Quiz SUI ANY i vite nen ee stee iea At Eed cena adverse E EEE E Adele EES 70 ii Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Table of Contents Other Available Objects crrr iin nani he Ae ee ee 70 Customizing the Catalog iiccnccnticie eid ai ei i eo hee 71 Modifying the Categories in the Catalog cccccceesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeseeessaeeseneeeeaes 71 Adding and Removing Catalog ObDjeCts cceecceceeeeeseeceeseeeeeeeecaeeesaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeeneees 71 Worki g with ODJOCIS ssssrccsssonssstecsssssseuasnsesassndserscensstaunnssssiuessusboueuaastsseeossuausenubens 73 MTOCUCTION sass seke ty egeucesanbbed nveguert aueueatacduael E save sand nde eevean aint ss 73 ADOUTODI OCIS kisanii aea yede aiaa a i A aE a G wa NEE a ES oaa EEES 73 Using the Book Explorer nadons cewanbe aE EEEE SA peels parc aaa ee 74 Adding Objects trom the Gatalogne aaa caveat antei th ea ea n a aaa iS 74 Creating Objects Using the Tool Palette ceescccccceceeeeeeneeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeaeeseeeeesaees 75 SEISCUNG OD OCS inasin aaa aa aE tanec aAA aA AeA AEA aa AE a AEEA EAE ENAA 77 Gr ating Hyperlinks anisan Eaa aae EEEE EA a E a EAA EARE ERA 78 CHOOSING a Type Of LINK iyinin tuaana eaaa ANE NE
46. Select the Universal Media Player and then click the Extended Properties button on the toolbar 2 On the General tab click the Browse button The Select a Media File dialog box appears Navigate to and select the file you want to use and then click OK Click OK Using Time Markers You can use time markers to synchronize the playing of a media file with the behavior of other objects on the page For example you can display pop up text describing a scene at a certain point in a video and then hide it at a later point Once you define time markers you need to create an action sequence in the Actions Editor to handle the media timing event generated each time the file reaches a time marker Note If you do not plan to Publish to Web you can use OpenScript to handle the ASYM_TimeMarker media timing message Time markers identify positions in a media file When a time marker is reached ToolBook sends a media timing event with a parameter named mediaPosition The value of mediaPosition is equal to the position in the media file positions are measured in milliseconds or frames depending on the media type There are two types of time markers you can set You can set time markers that send the media timing event at periodic intervals for example every 1000 milliseconds or you can insert time markers at specific points in the media file gt To set periodic time markers 1 Select the Universal Media Player object and then click the E
47. SmartStyle Behavior Voice Recording Notes Topic title used by SmartStyle pages Introduction Background This page uses background Standard Background Page usage 2 fields 1 image object 0 buttons 0 stages 0 combo boxes 0 groups 0 draw objects 0 others Free space 98 3 Inthe Page box enter a new page number 4 Optional Close the Properties for Page dialog box Using OpenScript e Set the pageNumber property to renumber a page and change its order in a book where lt value gt is the new page number pageNumber of this page lt value gt 56 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Organizing Pages and Backgrounds You can also move a page by cutting and then pasting it This method is especially useful if you want to move a page to a different book gt To cut and paste a page 1 Goto the page you want to cut 2 Choose Select Page from the Edit menu or click the page selection indicator on the status bar 3 From the Edit menu choose Cut ToolBook removes the page 4 Inthe current book or in another book go to the page after which you want to paste the page you cut 5 From the Edit menu choose Paste ToolBook inserts the page after the current page and renumbers the pages in the book Note When you reorder the pages in your book using a cut and paste operation ToolBook gives the page you are moving a new ID number When you reord
48. Summary tab of the Properties for Book dialog Date Displays the date of completion of the course This field is auto populated Graphic A Reusable Graphic placeholder that can be configured to display your own logo or other image Signature Provides an area that can be signed by a proctor or other designated individual after the certificate is printed Score Displays the learner s lesson score as a percentage This field is auto populated Certificate Control Panel This control panel includes a print and close button The close button closes the certificate page returning the user to the previous page The print button enables the user to print out the certificate page while ensuring the entire control panel is temporarily hidden so that it does not appear on the printed certificate In addition to all the objects present on the certificate page the Certificates category also contains the following two objects The Student Name Prompt If you will not using a Learning Management System add the Student Name Prompt from the Certificates category to the beginning of your book When learners take the course this Student Name Prompt object will enable them to enter their name This name is later displayed on the certificate page Display Certificate On clicking this button the user is taken to the certificate page The Display Certificate button can be added anywhere in your book Typically it would be placed after the quiz or as
49. Switch to Author level if needed using the View menu 2 Ensure the Catalog is Open 3 Choose Customize Catalog from the View menu Modifying the Categories in the Catalog You can change the contents of any category that you see in the Catalog and modify the properties for the Catalog object icon images displayed in the Catalog window In the Customize Catalog dialog box you can edit the existing categories and add new categories to the Catalog Customize Catalog Edit Catalog Categories Categories Commonly Used Objects on Objects Arrows Clipart V Buttons Certificates Draw Objects Legacy Objects Media Players Navigation Objects Description File information Interactive objects you use to initiate trigger or reset actions in an application Figure 2 The Customize Catalog dialog box Tip Inthe Customize Catalog dialog box you can clear the check box next to a category to hide the selected category from view This does not permanently delete the category from the Catalog Adding and Removing Catalog Objects You can add your own objects to the Catalog For example if you have customized the behavior of an object using the Actions Editor visual programming tool you may want to store that object in the Catalog to use again You can add your own customized object to the My Objects category in the Catalog or to any of the existing Catalog categories You can also create a new category for
50. The full action sequence and shared action sequence for Example 4 Building the Shared Action Sequence Building this shared action sequence shows you how to e Create a new shared action sequence Define parameters and variables for a shared action sequence Calculate a value and store it in a local variable e Return a value to an action sequence Creating a New Shared Action Sequence Shared action sequences are stored by unique names as properties of your book You access the Shared Actions dialog box to create edit duplicate import or export any shared action sequence gt Tocreate a new shared action sequence 1 From the Object menu choose Shared Actions The Shared Actions dialog box appears Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 233 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples 2 Click New The Actions Editor appears where you can create a new shared action sequence Defining Parameters and Variables When you create a shared action sequence you can define the parameters it uses to complete any operations it performs In this example the parameters required to calculate sales tax are a price and a sales tax rate gt To define a parameter 1 Click the Define Variables and Parameters button on the Actions Editor toolbar The Parameters and Variables dialog box appears 2 On the Parameters tab click New 3 Inthe Parameter dialog box enter Price as the name
51. You can use the Spread and Center commands on the Draw menu to automatically spread or center a selection of objects on a page or background The Spread command distributes a set of selected objects along a horizontal or vertical axis on the page The Center command centers a set of selected objects between the left and right sides of a page top and bottom of a page or both gt To spread a selection of objects 1 Select the objects you want to distribute 2 From the Draw menu point to Spread and then choose an option from the submenu gt To center a selection of objects 1 Select the objects you want to center 2 From the Draw menu point to Center and then choose an option from the submenu Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 81 Working with Objects Flipping and Rotating Objects You can transform ToolBook draw objects by flipping or rotating them Flipping transposes an object on an axis Rotating moves an object around a center point You can combine flipping and rotating to move an object to the position you want Note You cannot flip or rotate some objects such as imported graphics button captions and text in a text field gt To flip or rotate an object 1 Select the object or objects you want to transform 2 From the Draw menu choose one of the following commands Flip Horizontal Flips the selected object horizontally within its bounding box the rectangular
52. a fill color which are chosen from a color palette or the Color dialog box See also hue lightness and saturation red green and blue values Color Palette A predefined set of colors stored in a palette file with the file extension pal ToolBook uses a 256 color palette Visual media animations videos or bitmaps have their own color palettes Color Tray A ToolBook system object used to assign stroke and fill colors to objects Column Report A report printed in columns each column contains the contents of one record field See also record field Compare group report Combo Box A single object composed of an edit box a pushbutton and a drop down list used to present a list of choices in an application A combo box shows only the selected item To display all items the user clicks the pushbutton Compare list box Command 1 A menu item that when chosen causes ToolBook to perform an action 2 A term in the OpenScript language Most OpenScript commands are verbs such as go move and ask See also Command window Command Window The window in which you can run script statements get information about objects and system variables and set object properties See also script system variable Command Window History The Command window contains a split bar that can be dragged down to display the last 20 commands entered in the current session Click a command to reinsert it in the Command window Comment Optional information t
53. a learner with a choice of the simulation mode As soon as a learner clicks one of the buttons an action method starts the simulation in the mode indicated by the button caption Likewise you can define behavior that will execute as soon as a simulation is finished or reset by clicking the Actions tab in the properties dialog box for the simulation Individual steps in a simulation have three built in events start step attempt step and complete step If you want to display custom feedback for a correct user response define an action method for the complete step event which checks to see if the score parameter equals Correct Another possibility is to add behavior that would occur in the real application after a step is finished For information about programming in the Actions Editor see Chapter 17 Using the Actions Editor and Chapter 18 Creating action sequences Practical examples 290 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working in the Simulation Editor Locating Objects on a Simulation Page A simulation may have many graphics and interactive objects residing on different layers of a ToolBook page making it a challenge to locate a specific object that you wish to modify To find an object you can use the Book Explorer to view a list of objects on a simulation page When you locate an object in the Book Explorer that you want to modify you can select it in the Book Explorer and th
54. an object can receive the focus or mouse event messages When an object is enabled it is included in the tab order and can receive the focus or mouse event messages as a result of keystrokes and mouse clicks See also button text field record field tab order Enclosed Object An object that is closed on all sides and that can be filled with a color or pattern The following objects are enclosed rectangle rounded rectangle ellipse polygon irregular polygon and pie End of File EOF An OpenScript constant that represents ASCII value 26 a character often used to mark the end of a DOS file Error Box A window that appears in the Debugger and describes why a script s execution was suspended See also Debugger script Event An action recognized by ToolBook such as the clicking of a button or the pressing of a key Events can be initiated by user action by sending the generic User event in an action sequence or by an OpenScript command Event Focus Properties ToolBook system properties that indicate what object is currently receiving messages such as target focus targetWindow focusWindow and selection Execute To carry out actions defined by OpenScript statements or actions created in the Actions Editor See also statements Execution Suspended Message A message that contains details about why and where an error occurred in a handler The object that was handling the message when the error occurred is also specified See also han
55. and right boundaries of a field and the left and right edges of text in a field Initialize To assign a starting value to a variable See also variable Insertion Point A blinking cursor that shows where the next text entered will appear See also cursor Instance A open copy of any Windows application appearing as either a window or an icon You can run multiple instances of ToolBook in order to work with more than one book or page at the same time International System Properties ToolBook properties containing format information for data that changes according to country and language such as sysCurrency and sysDecimal which specify what characters are used for these functions Internet A network of networks where information is shared and exchanged using agreed upon hardware and software communications protocols iPhone Any Apple PDA which includes the Safari browser presently these are the iPhone and iPod touch Irregular Polygon An enclosed draw object with unequal angles and sides of varying length Compare polygon Item One data element out of a string separated by commas The item does not include the comma which is used only as a delimiter Compare textline Label Button A button style composed of text with an access character The user presses the ALT key in combination with the underlined letter in the button s caption to achieve a button click Often used for labels containing read only information and for dialog box contr
56. and utilities to assist you in using the ToolBook software ToolBook Utilities The following Utilities are available and can be found in the Windows START menu within the ToolBook Utilities folder e Display Book Information This utility will provide you with book information details about an entire folder full of ToolBook files It will allow you to quickly see important information about each file ina folder such as which version of ToolBook last saved each file This is a very useful utility in determining which ToolBook files are in need of being Version Updated e FTP Utility The FTP utility works either as a standalone application or as a ToolBook system book to allow you to transfer files to or from FTP servers on the Internet e Log Decryption Utility For Native ToolBook developers this utility will decrypt an encrypted log file so that it can be read by the log reader e Log Reader For Native ToolBook developers this utility will read a log file and present the data ina summary view for analysis e Menu Bar Editor For Native ToolBook developers the Menu Bar Editor will allow you to create your own Reader Level menu bars e Repair Kit This utility will copy all or part of an existing book into a new book By doing this you can potentially remove corruption within a ToolBook file e Script Remover For Native ToolBook developers the Script Remover utility removes the readable text of your ToolBook application s scrip
57. are displayed on top of a background A background is the foundation for a page that is shared by any number of pages in a book One book can contain several backgrounds each designed for a specific purpose Objects that you place on a page s background appear in the same position style and size on every page that shares that background For example you might put a panel of navigation buttons on the background so that they appear in the same place on every page Making changes to several pages this way is easy If you change the background of any page you see the changes on all of the pages that share the background You will also save disk space by placing objects on the background because ToolBook stores only one copy of each background and the objects on that background When you want an object to appear on only a single page put it on the page itself the foreground gt To switch between the page foreground and background e Choose Foreground or Background from the View menu or press F4 to toggle from one to the other You can display pages in a book s main window and also in special viewersike a pop up window For details about creating and using viewers see the electronic book included with ToolBook Advanced Features About Templates A template is a prebuilt book that provides a basic structure for your application including page organization graphic theme interactive objects and navigation controls To this structur
58. are exported to the target directory i e the location you have specified for publishing your book For audio files linked in your PowerPoint presentation however there are two options on how they are exported to ToolBook they can be copied to the same directory as your published ToolBook file or linked to their original locations Refer to the topic About PowerPoint Audio Export in the Help for details on basic concept and rules for publishing audio files About the Export of Speaker Notes The SumTotal Publish to ToolBook Add in now has the ability to export speaker notes from PowerPoint into ToolBook These speaker notes exported from a PowerPoint slide can be accessed through the page properties dialog box for the corresponding page in ToolBook If there are no speaker notes for a slide in PowerPoint you can use the page properties dialog box in ToolBook to enter notes or instructions relevant to a given page These notes can serve as a storyboard that capture relevant instructions for you to put the finishing touches on any given page Example An instruction to the author to add a hyperlink to a website on a given page The text on the Notes tab retains extended characters such as Danish and Spanish present in the speaker notes However there are no additional formatting options available on the Notes tab 266 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Importing ToolBook XML Using the Sum
59. area that indicates the object s dimensions switching the location of the object s left and right sides Flip Vertical Flips the selected object vertically within its bounding box switching the location of the object s top and bottom Rotate Left Rotates the selected object 90 degrees to the left counterclockwise Rotate Right Rotates the selected object 90 degrees to the right clockwise Aligning Objects You can use the following methods to precisely position objects on a page e Arrange objects using the grid as a reference e Snap objects to the nearest grid point for precise placement e Measure and align objects with the rulers e Align objects with one another using the Align command For information on using the grid and rulers see Chapter 3 Learning the ToolBook interface 82 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Changing the Size and Shape of Objects Using the Align Command When you create diagrams and other complex objects it may be important to align the objects For example you might need to align rows of fields along their top edges or to center columns of fields Use the Align command on the Draw menu to align several selected objects in precise relation to each other When you select multiple objects ToolBook uses one object as the reference against which it aligns the others For example to move objects so that their left edges align with the left
60. as the intended audience Note Your book will go through the Publish process much faster if you use the Web Graphic Placeholder object to display GIF PNG or J PEG graphic files on the pages of your book 294 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Publishing Your Book as Web Pages Publishing Your Book as Web Pages ToolBook can Publish your application as a series of Web pages using the Publish to Web feature This will gather information from you about your application By selecting various options you are providing the information that ToolBook needs to Publish your book Publish To Web Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 0 and later O Firefox 3 0 and later C Apple iPhone and iPod Touch 2 0 and later O Apple iPad 3 2 and later O Safari 3 0 and later O Google Android 1 6 and later O BlackBerry 6 0 and later CO Google Chrome 5 0 and later CO Mobile Internet Explorer 6 0 and later Publish the DHTML files to the following location C desktop Fire Safety WebE sports Page Range fe Al Current page Pages Figure 1 Publish To Web You can use the Publish to Web process to convert your application into a series of Web pages that you can then choose to place on a Web server Note This process Publishes your files to a project directory that you specify If your application contains hyperlinks to other books Publish those books to the same project direct
61. becomes the target of commands you choose from the ToolBook menus Move or resize the selection using its handles When text is selected it can be edited or formatted Selection Rectangle A dotted box that appears when you drag the pointer across a page When the mouse button is released ToolBook selects all objects completely enclosed by the selection rectangle Server A computer connected to a network or the Internet or both that contains documents available via the network or the Internet 324 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Uninstalling an Application Server Application An application that creates objects that can be linked or embedded in a client application ToolBook is a client application that can receive OLE information such as graphics or text from server applications See also client application object linking and embedding OLE container object Session One or more instances of any Windows application See also instance Shared Action Sequence An action sequence that runs only when executed as part of another action sequence You can create a shared action sequence that performs an operation and returns a value to the action sequence that calls it You can define parameters the shared action sequence uses to complete any operation it performs See also action sequence parameter Shared Script OpenScript code that can be shared among ToolBook objects Once defined the
62. below to insert into your expression Execute subsequent actions if this conditional expression is true Type an expression here or use the lists below to build an expression Checks if ae expression is in Insert items into the expression correct form 1 Select the type of item to insert Operators and functions 2 Select a category 3 Select an operator or function Teann Shows operation number number performed by Adds two numbers selected items Inserts selected items into expression 4 Insert the operator or function into the expression Insert into Expression Lok cancet He Figure 9 The Build Expression dialog box Operators and Functions An operator is a symbol or word that causes ToolBook to perform an action on operands resulting in another value For example in the expression Variable1l lt Variable2 the operator is the lt symbol and Variablel and Variable2 are operands A function is an operation that returns a value For example the function round returns the number or results of an operation supplied in parentheses rounded to the nearest integer Variables and Parameters A variable is a named container that can hold any value You can use the Set variable action to assign a value to a variable in an action sequence For more information see Using variables later in this chapter A parameter is a read only value defined for a specific event or shared action sequence Certa
63. by which you want to sort in the Available record fields box and then click Add If you want to add more than one record field to the Sort on record field s list you must select each individually and click Add for each one ToolBook sorts pages using the record fields in the order that you have selected them Under Sort order choose Ascending or Descending Under Sort type choose one of the following Text Sorts pages in alphanumeric or reverse alphanumeric order using the text entered in the record field Number Sorts pages in numeric or reverse numeric order using the numbers entered in the record field Date Sorts pages using the date entered in the record field For example if you choose Ascending ToolBook puts a page with the date 08 18 68 before a page with the date 02 07 93 ToolBook uses the date format set by the sysDateFormat property Name Sorts pages using the name entered in the record field ToolBook uses the last word in this field for sorting For example if you choose Ascending ToolBook puts a page with the name Zoe Z Benton before a page with the name Angela Victor If ToolBook encounters data that does not match the type you have specified for example text ina field that you re sorting as a date it places that page at the end 6 Click OK to sort the pages Using OpenScript To sort pages use the sort command with any expression that can be evaluated in the context of a page such as
64. can order the books to create a sequenced course in which your users access one book after the other Alternatively you can join books with hyperlinks so that your users can access them on an as needed basis for example one book may be a glossary for another book in your course In your online book each screen is considered a separate page Pages contain the elements that determine the look and behavior of your application buttons graphics text media players and so on You arrange the pages in any order that suits your material and then determine a way for your users to navigate through the pages A background is the foundation for a page Several pages can share one background and a book can contain many backgrounds Placing objects on the background allows you to maintain a consistent layout throughout your book The main ToolBook window displays one page In addition you can create pages to display in windows that appear along with the main window These windows are called viewers and can be small like a pop up window or larger like the main window For example you might use the main window to display your application and use a smaller viewer to display glossary definitions Objects and Properties All of the visual elements of your application buttons text graphics and even pages and backgrounds are objects You can create objects in ToolBook using the tool palette or you can drag an object from the ToolBook Catalog
65. cesses AE aaa aE 89 Planning Layer Order for Tabbing at Reader Level cceccceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeseeeeeaes 90 Grouping ODO CUS ausiai a aE a E a seas seuges Vaden E aiweveneds 91 Editing GROUPS asus ioaonae ea a a a E E ag E EE NR 91 Editing Objects Within a Group ssid EE E aN E Eae 92 Moving Grouped Objects sci noniu nna a ahi A aa E aa 92 Adding and Deleting Objects from GroUpiisnscicisiiini aa aen 92 Setting Group Propertie Senin RA Be A ee nn Gee 93 Ungrouping Objectsisccikciciseisiti niet Mina ie eA eis Dla od a a e 94 Nesting Groups tscnc nederdel ee 94 SEHING Object PIOP CIOS sesasasidiecisecinandsecianatnashnsudsasin cian tiianstasdanegda aian aaisan esis 95 MATFOCUCTION sonais TE E E A E A aaah axial et AEG 95 Understanding Properties and Extended PropertieS sssseesseessrrsseernesssrnnsrsnnessnnnnnennnesnnnnnnennnne 95 Using the Properties Dialog Box iigecievistes eco tetvasts ie peter tiaiast ahi eres 96 Toolbar Buttons in the Properties Dialog BOX eescceeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseeaeeeeneaas 97 Using the Right Click MO RU ciracas iiaaaeaoe dN evade aE ETARA 98 Using the Extended Properties Dialog BOX cccccessscceceseeeceeeeseeceeeseeeceeeenseeceeeeseeaeeesneeaeenenanes 99 Setting Extended Properties for Group ccccceceecceeseeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeeeaaeseeneeseaeeeeaaeseeneeeeeeees 99 Using the IBook Explorer sosro spip Ds a R ENES A AREE 100 Using the Prop
66. click on the title bar select Viewer Properties choose Choose icon and then in the Choose Icon dialog box import your custom icon or create a new icon When you save your book as an EXE file the title bar icon appears as the book s Windows icon Creating and Modifying Resources You can create and modify menu bar and shared script resources using the utility applications that come with ToolBook Other types of resources can be created using other Windows applications For example you can create graphic images using Adobe Photoshop and then import them to ToolBook Menu bar and shared script resources are unique to ToolBook You create and use them only in ToolBook products Access the Menu Bar Editor from the Resource Manager dialog box Creating and modifying resources To create this Identified by this file extension Use this resource type Bitmap gif jog omp dib ong wmf emf Graphics program Font ttf TrueType fonts editor Icon ico Graphics program Menu bar mnu ToolBook Menu Bar Editor Palette pal Graphics program Shared script ToolBook s script editor These files may contain more than one image ToolBook uses the first image it encounters in the file gt To create or modify a resource in the Resource Manager 1 From the Object menu choose Resources 242 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating a
67. condition to your action sequence In ToolBook you create action sequences using the Actions Editor The Actions Editor is a tool for visual programming that is you specify behavior using an interface that features familiar elements such as menus and a toolbar You can create action sequences to program the behavior of any object you add to your ToolBook application An action sequence for an object responds to a specific event In Figure 1 the event handled by the action sequence for the button is a button click SUS SOC aM eee TORS STIRVSA MAsark BUSINESS BASICS SERIES 2 MoCHAPTERTITLE Business Communication Welcome to Business Communication a course offered as part of the Business Basics training series This introductory course covers information you need to know to compose effective business letters emails memos and proposals asasssssssa aore m Actions Editor Button Continue Which one of the follo File Edit View Inset Action Tools Help me pm EE Ww ma zy X amp B XK t 0 e z Returning Student L l EB New Student General im f On click Parameters mouseX mouse shiftDown ctD own Object D If checked of button New Student Choice true A Ss S Go to page New Student N PEPENE 4 Eke if suas button peared Student Choice true Ne i m i Display Confirmation Go to page R
68. conditions for behavior e Display text messages e Cut paste and edit actions in the Actions Editor Opening the Actions Editor and Selecting an Event Every action sequence for an object handles a specific event The action sequence you create in this example occurs in response to a user clicking the Hint button gt To open the Actions Editor and select an event 1 Select the Hint button 2 From the Object menu choose Actions The Actions Editor appears 3 If On click is not selected click the name of the event and select On click from the Event list Defining a Variable This action sequence uses a global variable named g_HintCounter to track how many times the user clicks the Hint button This action sequence uses a global variable rather than a local variable since the value of a local variable is reset each time the action sequence runs gt To define a variable 1 Click the Define Variables button z on the Actions Editor toolbar The Variables dialog box appears On the Global Variables tab click New In the Variables dialog box type g_HintCounter and then click OK In the Initial Value box type 0 zero Click OK ao PF wn Note When you define variables they are not displayed as part of the action sequence To see a list of variables defined for an action sequence click the Define Variables button on the Actions Editor toolbar Inserting Actions In order to display a different hint each time a user c
69. converting from other file formats such as PowerPoint SumTotal provides a tool for converting a PowerPoint presentation into tbkx format This tool is an add in for PowerPoint Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 265 Importing and Exporting Data About the SumTotal Publish to ToolBook Add in The SumTotal Publish to ToolBook add in is a utility that converts a PowerPoint presentation into a ToolBook book or a ToolBook XML file depending on which file format the user selects for the conversion Many organizations typically have legacy content for training in the form of PowerPoint presentations Converting these PowerPoint presentations manually into online learning in ToolBook using copy and paste can be a very time consuming process The SumTotal Publish to ToolBook add in does this conversion in a fraction of the time It now supports the conversion of audio files and Speaker Notes in PowerPoint as well Users can take an existing PowerPoint presentation or create one using one of the new PowerPoint Templates included with ToolBook click the Publish button and have the content automatically published to a ToolBook book ToolBook s native format with a tbk extension or a ToolBook XML file with a tbkx extension The ToolBook XML file can be opened in ToolBook by double clicking the respective tbkx file The ToolBook XML file can also be imported into current or future versions of To
70. directory structure it can copy or move the file to the book s directory or a subdirectory of that book s directory For more information about organizing book files see Creating a central book directory structure earlier in this chapter Packaging Files Using the AutoPackager you can specify the default installation options that determine whether media ToolBook and cache files will be copied to the user s computer or whether they will remain on the CD ROM When you package a book the AutoPackager creates a Package directory and a Setup directory The Package directory contains files that the AutoPackager uses to create the Setup directory If you package the same book again the AutoPackager can reuse the files in the Package directory and will process your book quickly After you have finished packaging your book you no longer need the Package directory The Setup directory contains all the files required to install your application on another computer Copying Files When you create a package for distribution via CD ROM the AutoPackager copies the archive and setup files to the directory of your choice and creates any subdirectories within that directory You can then test the setup program from this directory structure before you generate a CD ROM Including the Run time Version of ToolBook When you distribute your application you need to include a run time version of ToolBook so that users of your application who do not have acc
71. edge of the leftmost object from the Draw menu point to Align and then choose Left Align left sides Align right sides Align tops Align bottoms Align horizontal centers Align vertical centers d S Figure 4 Aligning objects with each other gt To align objects with each other 1 SHIFT 4click to select the objects you want to align 2 From the Draw menu point to Align and then choose an option from the submenu Note The Align command aligns objects by their bounding box which can be seen when the object is selected The bounding box of a curve arc or pie wedge can extend past the visual portion of the object it may be easier to align these types of objects manually Changing the Size and Shape of Objects You can change the size and shape of any object manually You can also use the Size command on the Draw menu to automatically size one object to another gt Tochange the size of an object 1 Select the object you want to resize 2 Draga handle until the object is the size you want Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 83 Working with Objects e To change an object s width and height at the same time drag a corner handle e To change an object s width drag a side handle e To change an object s height drag a top or bottom handle e To resize an object proportionally press CTRL as you drag a corner handle If you drag the handle of one object when seve
72. exit the book If your results do not match the description above your action sequence is not working Return to Author level and review the steps in this example Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Example 3 Changing Object Properties Example 3 Changing Object Properties One advantage of online learning is that users can move through a course at their own pace and choose which topics to visit based on their individual information needs You can help users track their progress by creating a table that is continually updated to show users the pages they have visited In this example you will change the checked property of a table item depending on whether its corresponding page has been visited At Author level open page four named Contents of the Actions Editor Walkthrough book You will see a list of page titles Although no check boxes are visible each of the titles in this list is a separate check box object T ToolBook Walkthrough tbk File Edit View Go Insert Object Text Draw Tools Help Suc SOc M uae wd ae E E OOOO e es Oe OOOO To learn more about using the Actions Editor to add behavior to your application click one of the topics below About variables About events About expressions About actions m 3 B Ps ay N aT m 10830120 6 A dj 4of7 D Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplicat
73. file extension or in RTF with an rtf file extension Under Directories navigate to and select the directory where you want to export the file 254 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Importing and Exporting Text 4 Click OK ToolBook exports the text in a text file to the specified directory Importing Text into Record Fields When importing into record fields you can import text files only in ASCII format The ASCII file can be formatted as a fixed field or delimited field file ToolBook automatically creates a new record field for each data field and a new page for each data record in the imported file You cannot import data into a record field on the background of an existing page Rather when you import data into a new or existing book ToolBook creates a new page with a blank background and inserts new record fields as needed All tabs and control characters are imported into ToolBook along with the data The first new record field is always placed at the top of the background on layer 1 and each successive record field is placed below it ToolBook imports data from the first data field into the new record field on layer 1 of the first page and imports data from successive data fields into record fields on subsequent layers Imported text is formatted according to the current settings in the Properties for Record Field dialog box For more information about working with text a
74. how frequently an event is tested or sampled to convert it from analog to digital format Scope The specific handlers in which a variable s value is available For example the scope of a local variable is the current handler only See also handler variable Script A series of statements written in OpenScript that define ToolBook s behavior Scripts are object properties and are divided into parts called handlers Handlers define responses to specific events When an event occurs such as when a user clicks an object ToolBook runs the corresponding handler in the object s script See also handler statement Script Editor The window in which you can create and edit an object s script Scroll Bars A bar along the right side and or bottom of some windows and fields used to view all the contents of a window with more information than can be shown on screen at one time Segment One leg of an animation path along which an object moves When you draw an animation path you click to create a new vertex ToolBook then draws a segment from the end of the existing path to the new vertex By default segments are straight lines but they can be converted to curves Select To identify the target for the next action Selected text is highlighted Selected objects display handles When a page is selected the page selection indicator is highlighted in the status bar Selection The text object or page that is selected An object selected at Author level
75. hyperlink in an activated field ToolBook navigates to a specified page For more information about hotwords see Chapter 10 Adding Interactive Features to your Application The following table describes the options available in the Properties dialog box that define the behavior of a field at Reader level Field behavior options Option Result when applied Enable the field The field can receive the focus or mouse event messages at Reader level Allow users to enter or modify text The text in a field can be edited by users at Reader level This option is available when a field is enabled Lock the text and activate mouse events The text in a field cannot be edited by users at Reader level Mouse events are activated for example a hotword s hyperlinks can be run This option is available when a field is enabled 108 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Adding Text to Fields Adding Text to Fields To add text to the pages of your application you type or import the text into a text or record field and format it using the options in the Properties dialog box You can also use the Clipboard to transfer text from another application or between books and incorporate preformatted text in Rich Text Format For details see Cutting copying and pasting text later in this chapter Typing Text To select or enter text double click a field to
76. if you have a similar list on several pages with the same background you can create a list box from a record field A combo box has three parts a single line edit box a pushbutton and a drop down list box When the user clicks the pushbutton the drop down list appears Users can type in the edit box if allowed by the author or select an item from the drop down list The edit box displays the currently selected item When the user selects an item in the drop down list the list box is hidden and the newly selected item appears in the edit box By default users cannot enter text in combo boxes at Reader level that is the user can only select the items in the drop down list You can also create a combo box that can be edited by the user In this case the user can click an insertion point in the edit box and type any entry Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 139 Working with List Boxes and Combo Boxes The edit box displays _ Aral d a_i the current selection Courier A scroll bar can The pushbutton displays Garamond p be added ifthe list the drop down list box Helv is longer than the Car Letter Gothic display area The list displays each Stone item on a separate line Figure 2 Combo box You might choose to use a combo box when e The set of choices is too large for radio buttons or check boxes e Space is tight making radio buttons and list boxes impract
77. key press to let the learner choose when to advance to the next step in the demonstration Setting the Simulation Mode The mode setting is a property of a simulation In the Simulation Editor this property can be set on the General tab of the Properties for Simulation dialog box It can also be set in the property grid available in the Simulation Editor Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 277 Building Software Simulations Creating a Simulation with the Sim AutoBuilder The Sim AutoBuilder feature lets you record mouse clicks keyboard entries and other interaction with a software application Every software simulation created with the Sim AutoBuilder is a reproduction of the original software application with buttons and menus and other interactive objects that act like the real objects in the original software program ToolBook Sim AutoBuilder Software application s to capture oO amp Calculator OK Close Settings Refresh About Help 7 Include applications that open during recording Save recorded file to C Documents and Settings dennyd My ibrecordingitbr Browse Figure 1 The Sim AutoBuilder 278 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating a Simulation with the Sim AutoBuilder You prepare to use the Sim AutoBuilder by opening the software application that you want to record Re
78. lt Viewer IdNumber 0 gt lt Book Viewers gt lt Book Pages gt lt PageLocator IdNumber 0 Source Page0 Page xml gt lt Book Pages gt lt Book Backgrounds gt lt BackgroundLocator IdNumber 0 Source Background0 Background xml gt lt Book Backgrounds gt lt Book gt 270 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Importing ToolBook XML Importing a ToolBook XML Book into ToolBook In ToolBook the File menu command Open XML Book enables you to import both compressed and uncompressed forms of a ToolBook XML book into ToolBook Edit View Go Insert Object Text Draw Tools Help New Ctrl 0 Open XML Book Ctrl S Save Save As Save s Template Publish to Web DHTML Extensions Ctrl E Bound System Books Ctrl Print Setup Print Pages Ctrl P Print Report Run Exit Alt F4 Figure 9 The Open XML menu command Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 271 Importing and Exporting Data The Open XML Book command opens an Open XML dialog box in which you can navigate to the ToolBook XML book you want to open in ToolBook To import a compressed ToolBook XML book you just open the tbkx file by double clicking it Open XML Book Certification tbky File name Certifications My Network Files oftype X
79. marks 7 Click OK to return to the Export dialog box and click Save ToolBook exports the contents of the record fields to the file name you specified The data in each record field becomes a data field in the text file enclosed in quotation marks Using OpenScript To export text from record fields to a delimited field text file use the export command with the delimited keyword and a character to use as the delimiter Exports text to a text file putting between each field export temp dat as delimited using For details about using the export command refer to its entry in the OpenScript reference in Help Importing Books and Pages You can import entire ToolBook books or specific pages into a new or existing book When you import an entire book ToolBook inserts all of the imported book s pages backgrounds viewers and referenced resources into the current book This method saves time when you want to use all of the information in a book without recreating it Importing pages into a book is useful when you want to use the contents of a specific page When you import a book or pages into another book the book properties of the imported book do not get applied to the new book s properties Book scripts will not be assigned to the new book from the imported book nor will settings such as page size and hyperlink color Resources that are used on the imported pages will be added to the new book s resource system Resource
80. mode only Click the Edit Message button to specify an OpenScript message that ToolBook sends as feedback The following feedback messages are available OpenScript feedback messages This message Does this ASYM_PlayFeedback Causes question feedback to play If delayed feedback is assigned it will play otherwise immediate feedback will play ASYM_PlaySummaryFeedback Causes delayed feedback to play ASYM_ Reset Resets the question to the default state appearance score and so forth ASYM_ShowYourScore Shows the current score for the question Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each answer Click OK To specify delayed feedback for a question object Select the question object and then click the Extended Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar Click the Delayed Feedback tab Under Feedback to execute on request when the responses are specify whether the delayed feedback should play when responses are All correct All incorrect or Partially correct Specify one or more of the feedback types for each possible outcome For details see the feedback type descriptions in the preceding procedure Click OK You can display delayed feedback using a preprogrammed Catalog object gt To display delayed feedback for a question object 1 2 3 4 160 Navigate to the page that contains the question for which you want to display delayed feedback If the Catalog is not already open c
81. or to specify whether the background is imported click the Format button Enter a range of pages and then click OK By default ToolBook imports all pages with their backgrounds from the source book unless you remove the check from the box labeled Include Background 6 Click OK ToolBook imports the specified pages from the source book into the target book 54 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Organizing Pages and Backgrounds Using OpenScript e To import the entire source book into the target book display the page after which you want to import the book and then use the import book command import book c toolbook add tbk e To import one or more pages use the import pages command To import pages without the source book s background add the without background parameter For example import pages 5 to 5 of book c toolbook add tbk import pages 12 to 24 of book c toolbook new tbk without background If the source book s page size is larger than that of the target book you may need to increase the target book s page size to see all of the objects For details see Setting the page size later in this chapter Organizing Pages and Backgrounds You can reorder your book s pages by using the Book Explorer to drag and drop a page to another position in the sequence of pages Other ways to change the order of pages is to renumber them or cut and paste pages Usi
82. return linefeeds CRLF The textline does not include the CRLF which is used only as a delimiter See also carriage return linefeed delimiter Tile A property of a window that contains a caption or the file name 326 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Uninstalling an Application Title Bar The bar at the top of a window that contains a caption or the file name Tool Palette The tools that appear at Author level for creating and working with objects Toolbar The bar containing buttons that are shortcuts for frequently used menu commands Displayed by default at the top of the ToolBook main window at Author level ToolBook XML A way to represent a ToolBook book as XML It consists of a series of files and supporting resources This folder structure can be compressed into a tbkx file for improved portability Trace To go through the execution of a script in the Debugger one statement or keyword at a time to locate an error See also Debugger script Transition A special effect such as a fade out that occurs as a user navigates from one page to the next Transparent A property that determines whether an object is displayed so that objects on layers behind the object can be seen through the object See also layer Ungroup To separate grouped objects into individual objects Ungrouping discards all the group s properties and its script but does not affect individual object s scripts
83. select the answer or answers for which you want to provide feedback You can click the Select All Correct or Select All Incorrect buttons to select all the correct or incorrect answers at one time The Select All Correct and Select All Incorrect buttons are available only for question objects of the appropriate type 5 Specify one or more of the following feedback types the object activates the feedback in this order Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 159 Creating a Quiz using Question Objects N O 9 N gt 5 Play media Select the type of media response you want from the options in the drop down list Select the media clip option if you want to play a clip This enables a field called Media clip in which you can specify which clip to play Select the media player option if you have a media player on your page in which you want to play a media file Selecting this option enables a field called Media player in which you can specify the media player to associate with the question object Feedback text Click the Edit Text button to specify text for ToolBook to display ina pop up window or in a text or record field named Feedback that appears on the current page or background Hyperlink Click the Select Hyperlink button to specify a hyperlink indicating a target page in the current book or in another book to which the object should jump Send message applicable to Native
84. several flexible deployment options Your students can view your course in a Web browser that displays Internet based file formats such as HTML Hypertext Markup Language You can also distribute your course as a run time stand alone application that runs from a hard drive or CD ROM Before You Install Before installing ToolBook verify your computer meets the requirements System Requirements To run ToolBook a computer must meet the requirements below Minimum and recommended system configurations Component Minimum Recommended Computer Intel Pentium processor or Same as minimum configuration compatible 1 GHz RAM 1 GB Same as minimum configuration Hard disk space 600 MB 600 MB Operating system Windows XP Professional SP 2 Same as minimum configuration or later Windows Vista Windows 7 or Windows 8 Graphics card Video graphics adapter Same as minimum configuration but capable of displaying with 1024x768 pixel resolution or 800 x 600 pixel resolution higher with 24 bit color for authoring t You must have an administrator account on in order to install and use ToolBook See your system administrator or refer to your Windows documentation for details 12 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Additional Digital Media Requirements Additional Digital Media Requirements e You can add media to courseware in a variety of ways Most computers co
85. specifies which element of the array is being referenced For example in an array named city city 3 references the value stored in the third element of the array which could store a value such as Seattle In the Actions Editor an array can have only a single dimension The array index can be numeric or any string that does not contain a space comma or tab In the following examples the array index is a string of characters PersonaliInfo FirstName PersonaliInfo LastName Personalinfo Age gt To define an array 1 Inthe Actions Editor click the Define Variables button on the toolbar The Variables dialog box appears 2 On either the Local Variables of Global Variables tab depending on the type you want to define click the New button 3 Enter a name for the array 210 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating and Using Shared Action Sequences 4 Select the checkbox labeled Make this variable an array and then click OK You can refer to an element of an array in an expression or in any action that allows you to set a variable In actions that allow a variable to be set such as Set Variable or Score Pages you can choose array variables from a list or you can type in an array name followed by the specific element in brackets Creating and Using Shared Action Sequences In most ways creating a shared action sequence is identical to creating an action se
86. string of characters or a number that is assigned to a container or used to compare information If a literal value contains spaces it must be enclosed in quotation marks In the following example New York is the literal value text of field ID 1 New York See also container Local Variable In an action sequence or script a variable whose value can only be accessed and changed as the script or action sequence in which it is defined is running and which only maintains its value while the script or action sequence is running See also variable Compare global variable system variable Log File A file maintained by ToolBook that stores information about a user s progress in a lesson such as the pages visited the user s score the time the date and the elapsed time You can use the log reader utility to view a log file Logging The process of recording user activity in a lesson Logging starts when the user enters the lesson and stops when the user leaves the lesson Logical Palette In a 256 color system the list of colors required to display a graphic Each graphic maintains its own logical palette of 256 colors from the 16 million colors possible Loop A special type of action that when inserted into an action sequence directs ToolBook to repeat a behavior an action or sequence of actions a specified number of times or until a condition is met See also action sequence action condition Margin 1 The space between a field s b
87. stroke color is applied to borders and the stroke elements of any pattern used For paint objects and picture objects stroke color is applied to the border Compare fill Style 1 An object s visual attributes such as its border type line style or pattern 2 The bold italic underline and strikeout text attributes that can be set using the Character dialog box Submenu A menu item that displays a cascading menu when clicked Submenus are indicated by small arrows to the right of menu items SumTotal Publish to ToolBook add in A utility that converts a PowerPoint presentation into a ToolBook book or a ToolBook XML book depending on which file format the user selects for the conversion Syntax The rules for writing script statements in OpenScript or for creating expressions in the Build Expression dialog box of the Actions Editor System Book A book whose book script is shared by other books System books are useful for defining general scripts for repeated use by other books For example you can put all of your user defined functions and user properties into a system book so that they are available for any applications you create See also user property user defined function System Palette In a 256 color system the list of colors currently used by the video display device to display graphics The 256 colors are drawn from the 16 million colors available to Windows System Properties Property that define default behavior for the ent
88. table outlines how to use commands on the Go menu and arrow keys to move between pages in a book Moving from page to page To move to this page From the Go menu choose Or press these keys Next Next Page ALT RIGHT ARROW Previous Previous Page ALT LEFT ARROW First page in book First Page ALT UP ARROW Last page in book Last Page ALT DOWN ARROW Last page visited Back SHIFT F2 History History CTRL F2 Lists the unique names of up to 100 of the last pages accessed in the current ToolBook instance Navigating using the Book Explorer The Book Explorer provides an additional way to navigate in Author view In the Pages area you can click the page you want to navigate to and that page will display in the authoring space The page you navigate to will be displayed in the Status bar 48 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Chapter4 4 Creating Books and Pages Introduction In this chapter you will learn about creating books and pages setting book properties to specify how your book will run setting up navigation between pages and controlling how objects display on a page In addition this chapter provides some tips about enhancing the performance of your book About Books and Pages The ToolBook applications that you create and run are called books A book is composed of pages that contain objects Objects that you place on a page
89. task Scripts created using the OpenScript programming language do not Publish to Web If you ve added functionality to your application using OpenScript you can deliver it as a native ToolBook application For complete information about using OpenScript refer to the Programming in OpenScript book You can also consult the Help system which contains an OpenScript reference resource 28 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Using OpenScript Extending ToolBook using Windows Technologies ToolBook provides support for such Windows technologies as ActiveX OLE ActiveX Data Objects ADO Automation sometimes referred to as OLE Automation and Dynamic Data Exchange DDE Using these technologies you can extend ToolBook s capabilities and allow ToolBook and other Windows programs to share data and interoperate in a networked environment ActiveX controls are software components that you can use within an online application to add some type of functionality These controls allow you to add custom features to a native ToolBook application or to an application you plan to Publish to the Web For more information about using ActiveX in your applications see the electronic book included with ToolBook named Advanced Features OLE is a technology based on a linking and embedding model that is used to integrate applications OLE enables you to create an object in one application the server applicat
90. tbk COMPLIANCE TRAINING This style contains a simple presentation of content through Text and Graphic pages This style does not contain a Menu page as it does not contain any chapters gt To exit ToolBook e Do one of the following m If you have opened a book from the File menu choose Exit Click the Close button on the title bar of the ToolBook Startup dialog box or the ToolBook main window 14 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Learning ToolBook Learning ToolBook ToolBook includes electronic documentation as well as a number of other resources to help you learn to use ToolBook Further assistance is available from the ToolBook site www toolbook com The ToolBook documentation includes several books in electronic format e This book the ToolBook 11 5 User Guide discusses how to use ToolBook s features and provides the context and procedures you ll need to use ToolBook effectively e A short introductory book Getting Started with ToolBook 11 5 covers the basic techniques for authoring in ToolBook e Programming in OpenScript provides information about how to extend the features of your application using the OpenScript programming language gt To open an electronic document e From the Start menu point to Programs point to ToolBook 11 5 point to Documentation and then choose the electronic book you want ToolBook ships with an assortment of documents
91. test the results Using OpenScript e To change the cursor that appears when an object is dragged set the object s draglmage property to a bitmap cursor or icon resource dragIimage of object baseball bitmap blur e To change the cursor that indicates an object cannot be dropped set the object s noDropImage property to a bitmap cursor or icon resource noDropImage of object bleachers cursor no drop Changing a Viewer s Minimize Icon You can change the icon that appears when a viewer is minimized using either the Properties dialog box or OpenScript gt To change a viewer s Minimize icon 1 From the Object menu choose Viewers The Viewers dialog box appears 2 Inthe Viewers of book list choose the viewer for which you want to change the Minimize icon and then click Properties The Properties for Viewer dialog box appears On the Style tab under Icon click Choose icon In the Choose Icon dialog box click Import The Choose Icon dialog box appears Select the resource you want to import and then click Open Type a unique name in the Name box under Resource properties ToolBook assigns an ID number to the resource that you can also use to refer to it 7 Close the Choose Icon dialog box Using OpenScript e To change the icon that appears when a viewer is minimized set the icon property to an icon resource icon of mainWindow icon fancy icon of viewer Navigation icon plain Copyright 2012
92. the graphic to fit the button You cannot stretch icons or cursors because they have a fixed size f you want the button to size itself to the graphic select Size the button to fit the graphic f you want to use the Checked graphic as the rollover graphic the graphic you see when the pointer is paused over a button select Use checked graphic as rollover graphic Repeat steps 3 7 to assign graphic resources for the other button states Optional Close the Properties for Button dialog box You might need to resize the button to see the graphic Using OpenScript To apply a graphic to a button set the checkedGraphic disabledGraphic invertGraphic or normalGraphic property of a button to a bitmap cursor or icon resource For example normalGraphic of button Baseball icon Balli Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Adding a Graphic to a Button Creating Transparent Areas in a Bitmap You can create transparent areas in bitmap resources in your book with the Use chromakey option The Use chromakey option appears in the Resource Manager dialog box on the Graphics tab of the Properties for Button dialog box and on the Draw tab of the Properties for Background dialog box ToolBook uses the Use chromakey setting in conjunction with a color value to determine the portions of the bitmap resource that will be transparent Note The Use chromakey option is applied to all instances
93. the objects available in that category Catalog x Commonly Used Objects i ES ei gt Auto Sizing Text Image Universal Media Field Player E SmartStyle Button Multiple Choice True False Question Question Question Text Field Action Objects Arrows Clipart Buttons Certificates Draw Objects Media Players Navigation Objects Pages Placeholder Objects Questions Scoring and Tracking Simulation Objects Styles Text Fields My Objects Figure 1 The ToolBook Catalog 66 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited m Authoring with the Catalog gt To display the Catalog e Click the Catalog button on the ToolBook toolbar Optionally press F2 As with other windows you can close move and resize the Catalog window Authoring with the Catalog The Catalog is designed for ease of use The intuitive browsing environment and drag and drop capabilities make it easy to build the pages of your book You can add objects to the Catalog or remove them The next few sections describe how to work with the Catalog Browsing Through the Catalog Take a moment to browse through the objects in the Catalog When you select a category small images of objects appear in the object pane below the category button you selected in the Catalog You can display a description of any Catalog object point to an object right click and select Properties for Icon from the right click
94. the select tool click the stage to select it Click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar The Properties for Stage dialog box appears 5 Inthe Name box type a name for the stage 6 Optional Close the Properties for Stage dialog box Using OpenScript e Use the draw command with the stage object type followed by the bounds and then assign the stage a name using the name property For example draw stage from 1000 1000 to 3000 3000 name of selection videoStage Note When a video clip is playing in a stage it is displayed in its own window which will obscure all objects on the page in that area even objects that appear in front of the stage when the media is not playing Setting the Appearance of a Stage To change the appearance of a stage in a video player you can set properties that define the e frame which is the decorative border around a stage e display area which sets the size and position of visual media clips in a stage e transition effects which determine the effect before and after a visual media clip plays Choosing a Frame Style You can set a stage frame that draws attention to the stage or that subtly adds dimension to a page gt To set the style of a stage frame 1 Select the stage and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar The stage may be part of a group the video player To select only the stage double click the stage 2 Onthe Draw tab under Frame widt
95. the selection Moving Grouped Objects You can move an entire group of objects or individual objects within a group by selecting the group or object and dragging it to a new location After you move an object in a group ToolBook adjusts the group s bounding box to show the new perimeter of the group Adding and Deleting Objects from a Group You can add objects to a group by pasting them from the Clipboard or by dragging them from the Catalog to the group When you drag an object from the Catalog to a group ToolBook opens the Select Target dialog box where you can choose an option to add the object to the group gt To add an object to a group from the Clipboard 1 Select the object you want to cut or copy 2 From the Edit menu choose Cut or Copy to place the object on the Clipboard 3 To identify the group that will contain the pasted object double click an object in that group 4 From the Edit menu choose Paste The object is added to the group The new object occupies the uppermost layer of the group and is pasted in the same location that it occupied before being cut or copied gt To add a Catalog object to a group 1 Drag an object from the Catalog and then drop it onto the group The Select Target dialog box appears Select Target Object dropped on group What do you want to do with the object Add to group Apply to target only Apply to objects of the group Copy to page background 2 Choose Ad
96. the shared action sequence So first you need to determine the user s selection You can insert a condition to create a conditional expression that tests a user s selection gt To insert a condition 1 From the Insert menu point to Condition and then choose If The Properties for Condition dialog box appears Click the Build expression button to open the Build Expression dialog box In the Build Expression dialog box do the following Inthe Select the type of item to insert list select Object properties in the Select an object list select self in the Select a property list select selecteditemText click Insert into Expression Position the insertion point at the end of the expression and then type Seattle 4 Click OK to close the Edit Expression dialog box and then click OK to close the Properties dialog box 5 Repeat the above steps until you have created a conditional expression that tests for each item in the list If selectedItemText of self Seattle Else if selectedItemText of self Atlanta Else 236 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Example 4 Using Shared Action Sequences Executing a Shared Action Sequence To perform the calculation you need to call the shared action sequence you created above You use a specific action Execute shared actions to run the shared action sequence When you run the shared action sequence you need to
97. then follow the instructions on the screen 306 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Uninstalling an Application Uninstalling an Application When your users install your application the Setup program adds entries to the Windows Registry which then allows files to be automatically removed using the Windows Add Remove Programs utility This utility is located in the Windows Control Panel Your application will be listed by the application name you assigned it in the AutoPackager Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 307 Glossary Glossary amp amp amp See concatenation operators Access Character An underscored character on a button menu or menu command that provides direct keyboard access to the option Press the ALT key in combination with the access character to select the button menu or menu command See also button label button Action A single complete instruction that you create in the Actions Editor to add behavior to your application In the Actions Editor you can specify actions conditions and loops and this behavior will automatically Publish to Web See also Actions Editor action sequence condition DHTML loop Action Method A type of action sequence you can create that is attached to a specific object An action method runs only when you call it from another action sequence Typically an action method wi
98. to Action point to Navigation and then do one of the following To specify navigation to any page in the current book or in another ToolBook book or to open a page in a pop up viewer choose Go to Page To specify exit from the lesson choose Exit Lesson To display a document created in another application or to specify navigation to a particular URL choose Display Document 5 Inthe Properties for Action dialog box select a destination and then set any other action properties Click OK In the Actions Editor from the File menu choose Update Actions amp Close 62 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Enhancing a Book s Performance Enhancing a Book s Performance Careful page and background design can greatly enhance the performance of your book When planning your book use these guidelines e Limit the number of objects and graphics in a book e Make a book s page size as small as possible e Use the same background for similar pages and limit the number of different backgrounds e Put objects that appear on every page on the background Testing is an essential step in building a book Test each part of your book as you complete it Switch to Reader level to see how the pages will look to the user and try out buttons and hotwords to make sure they work After the book is complete test it as a whole Go through it yourself to see whether the overall design and org
99. to Layer and then choose Send to Back gt To bring an object from its current layer to the top layer 1 Select the Object 2 From the Draw menu point to Layer and then choose Bring to Front gt To specify an object s layer number 1 Select the object and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar 2 Type a number in the Layer box 3 Optional Close the Properties dialog box Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 89 Working with Objects Planning Layer Order for Tabbing at Reader Level A user can press the TAB key to move the focus between objects on a page When an object has the focus it can receive input from the user For example when a button has the focus its caption is highlighted when a text field has the focus a cursor appears in the field The tab order the order in which the focus moves when a user presses TAB follows the layer order of the objects beginning with layers on the background and then moving to layers on the page If the layer order is the order in which you created those objects the tab order could seem random to the user For example the first field you create may be at the bottom of the page the second at the top and the last in the middle your user has to look all over the page for the focus To make your application easier to use you can define a new tab order There are two ways to determine the order in which readers wi
100. to the page and then highlights the text 5 Toreplace the text click Replace 116 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working with Record Fields Click Find Next to find the next occurrence of the text When ToolBook reaches the end of the book you are prompted to continue searching from the beginning of the book Click Yes or No 8 When you finish searching close the Find or Replace dialog box Working with Record Fields You can add record fields to your book using the record field tool on the ToolBook tool palette Because you can place a record field only on the background of a page you will notice that this tool is disabled when you are working on the foreground Like any object placed on a background a record field appears in the same style and in the same position on any page that shares that background However unlike a regular text field placed on the background a record field allows you to enter and display different text from page to page ToolBook can also sort pages and print reports using record fields Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 117 Working with Text Using Record Fields to Display Information Record fields are ideal for consistently presenting information that varies from page to page such as address and phone lists or client contact records After you ve created the record field on the background
101. to the text in a field using the Font and Paragraph tabs on the Properties dialog box gt To use the Properties dialog box to change text and paragraph formatting for the entire field Using the interface 1 Select the field and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar The Properties for Text Field dialog box appears 2 Do one or both of the following a To change the font style size or other text effects click the Font tab and then select the options you want To change the alignment line spacing indents or tab settings click the Paragraph tab and then select the options you want 3 Optional Close the Properties for Text Field dialog box Using OpenScript e To change character style for the entire field using OpenScript specify the field name fontStyle of text of field status bold e To change the character style used in all fields on a page select the fields and set the font select all field fontFace of selection Arial fontStyle of selection bold e To change the default text style set the sysFontFace sysFontStyle and sysFontSize properties sysFontFace Arial sysFontStyle bold e You can set the textAlignment spacing indents tabType and tabSpacing field properties to modify paragraph formats For example to set line spacing in a field spacing of field employees 2 112 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication pr
102. toolbar The Properties for Stage dialog box appears 2 Click the PreEffect tab Then from the Effect list select a transition effect to use before the clip plays 3 Click the PostEffect tab Then from the Effect list select a transition effect to use after the clip plays 4 Optional Close the Properties for Stage dialog box Creating and Managing Clips A clip is a reference to any media file a sound file video file animation file or still image file You can use the Clip Manager dialog box to create select edit duplicate remove and play the media clips in a book If you ve planned in advance all the audio and visual media you want to include you can use the Clip Manager to add them to your book all at once Note Animations discussed in this chapter refer to animation files not ToolBook animations created with the ToolBook Animation Editor For details about ToolBook animations see Chapter 14 Hiding Showing and Animating Objects Creating Clips A clip is defined by a file name or media source and start and end points For example a clip s start and end points could define the clip as the third song on a music CD or the first 20 frames of a digital video file A clip could also reference an entire file gt To create a clip 1 Do one of the following to open the Clip Manager dialog box From the Object menu choose Clips From the Extended Properties dialog box of the video player click Choose a Clip
103. type 1 Click the Draw tab of the Properties for Text Field dialog box 2 Inthe Field type list select Multi select list box 3 Optional Close the Properties for Text Field dialog box Adding Text to a List Box You add text to a list box in the same way that you add text to any field by typing pasting or importing Each text line must be separated from the next item using the ENTER key Note Text does not wrap at the ends of lines in a list box If you want to type in more text than fits on a line you must first resize the list box gt To type text in a list box Using the interface 1 Double click inside the list box or right click the field and select the Edit Text option in the right click menu An insertion point appears in the upper left corner 2 Type your text Press ENTER after each item in the list 142 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating Combo Boxes 3 When you are finished click outside the field Using OpenScript e You enter text ina list box by setting the text property of the field Separate the items in the list with a carriage return linefeed CRLF For example text of field Cities Alphaville amp CRLF amp Bellona amp CRLF amp Oz amp CRLF amp Zone e You can also use textline to set each item in the list separately textline 1 of text of field Cities Alphaville textline 2 of text of field Cities
104. used primarily in ToolBook Operand A value on which an operator performs an action For example in the expression a lt b the operands are a and b and the operator is lt See also expression operator Operator In an expression a symbol or word that causes ToolBook to perform an action on operands resulting in another value For example in the expression a lt b the operands are a and b and the operator is lt See also operand Orientation A setting that determines whether pages in a book are presented in portrait mode taller than they are wide or landscape mode wider than they are tall Overlay Video A means of displaying analog video on computer monitors When overlay video is played ToolBook designates the area of the screen where the video is to play The video signal is then routed through and intercepted by the videodisc controller card which replaces the designated area with data from the videodisc See also analog controller card Page The object that is the basic unit of a book Objects placed on a page are displayed on top of a background Page Number The relative order of a page among all pages in a book Page Size The dimensions of the pages in a book Page Units A measurement used to specify an object s bounds and location relative to the upper left corner of the page There are 1440 page units per inch or 57 per millimeter Page units do not vary in size with the resolution of the display device Compare pixel
105. user gt To display popup text 1 Select the first condition in the action sequence If g_HintCounter 0 2 From the Insert menu point to Prompts and then choose Display Popup Text 3 Ifthe Properties for Action dialog box does not open automatically click the Properties button on the Actions Editor toolbar 4 Select Enter literal text 5 Inthe Specify the text to display box type This is your first hint 6 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box To save time and steps you can use the editing tools in the Actions Editor to copy and paste the Display Popup text action you just created gt To copy and paste an action 1 Select the action you just created 2 From the Edit menu choose Copy 3 Select the second condition in the action sequence Else if g_HintCounter 1 and then from the Edit menu choose Paste A copy of the action appears below the second condition 4 Select the third condition Else and paste again You will need to edit the text that is displayed by the actions you just pasted gt To edit an action 1 Select the first pasted action and then click the Action Properties button on the Actions Editor toolbar 2 Select the text in the Specify the text to display box replace it by typing This is your second hint and then click OK 3 Select the second pasted action replace its text with Sorry no more hints are available for this question and then click OK Copyright 2012 Sum
106. user positioning the pointer over the object On property change A property change On reset A page or range of pages being reset On right click A user Clicking the right button of the mouse over the object On trigger A trigger message 202 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating Action Sequences Using the Actions Editor On unload page A user leaving the page Some events a button click for example are initiated by users as they interact with your ToolBook application Other events you create using commands available on the Actions Editor menus these include Send User Event Trigger Set Property and Reset Most events are generated as a result of the user performing some action or as the result of some change in the system You can also send a generic event called User event With the User event you can send any data in a single parameter This data may be in the form of a literal value variable or expression The User event is generated by the Send User Event action Note For more information about variables and expressions see Using variables and Building expressions later in this chapter gt To send the User event in the Actions Editor 1 From the Insert menu point to Action point to Object and choose Send User Event The Properties for Action dialog box appears if this default option is set on the Actions tab of the
107. want without adding to the file size of your application An object uses a resource by referring to the stored copy by name or ID number For example if your book has multiple backgrounds with the same navigation buttons on every page you would use a bitmap resource for the graphic image on the navigation buttons Because only one copy of the bitmap is stored your book s file size is much smaller than it would be if you duplicated the bitmap for each button Note You cannot share the same copy of a resource among multiple books You must import a separate copy of the resource for each book Customizing the ToolBook interface using resources To do this Assign this resource type Create a graphic button Bitmap cursor icon Display a graphic using the Image object Bitmap cursor icon Change the drag image and no drop cursor Bitmap cursor icon Apply a custom menu Menu bar Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 241 Using Resources Change a viewer st Minimize icon Icon Change a book s system cursor Cursor icon For details about creating custom menus see Chapter 2 in the electronic book Advanced Features t For details about creating viewers see Chapter 1 in the electronic book Advanced Features Tip If you plan to save your book as an EXE file you can customize its Windows icon Before you save your book as an EXE file right
108. you can design the look of the simulation page layout Using a consistent location for the navigation buttons and instructional text makes it easier for learners to find what they want in the interface Page layout considerations also include the look of the title or heading that may appear at the top of a simulation page If you are using the Sim AutoBuilder to record a simulation the number of responsive objects will be limited to the selections made during the capture phase For more information about the Sim AutoBuilder see Creating a simulation with the Sim AutoBuilder later in this chapter Planning a simulation before building it can reduce the overall time spent on development By deciding on the type of simulation that suits the needs of your learners early in the development cycle you can focus your development efforts and avoid misdirected work 276 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Choosing a Simulation Mode Choosing a Simulation Mode A simulation created in ToolBook can be shown in one or more of these modes e Practice mode allows a learner to try out each step for a limited or unlimited number of attempts e Assessment mode allows one answer attempt for each step and calculates a score for the user input e Demonstration mode shows how to complete the task These three modes are discussed below Practice Mode When a learner completes a step in a practice simulatio
109. you use the mouse to draw the path you want the object to follow A path consists of segments connected by vertices You can create a path animation that moves an object while the object changes size In addition you can create multiple animations for an object that you can trigger using an action trigger from the Catalog using a command you create in the Actions Editor or using OpenScript When you are finished drawing the path ToolBook compiles information about the path and stores it as a property of the object 170 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Animating ToolBook Objects Creating a Path Animation You create a path animation for a particular object by opening the Animation Editor and drawing the path with the Vertex tool Each click of the mouse adds a new segment to the path EE Segment Figure 2 Creating a path animation gt To create a path animation 1 Inthe main window select the object you want to animate 2 From the Object menu choose Path Animation ToolBook opens the Animation Editor and displays the objects on the current page with the first segment of the animation path for the selected object 3 Optional To change the location of the first segment move the cursor over the selected KA object until the Move cursor x appears and then drag the segment to a new position a 4 To add a segment click the Vertex button E or press the SPACEBAR
110. 012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 213 Using the Actions Editor Inthe Select a shared action sequence list select the shared action sequence Optional If the shared action sequence uses parameters enter a value as a literal value or expression for each parameter in the Parameter Value field For more information see Using parameters later in this section Optional In the Specify a variable to store the return value list select a variable name 5 Click OK Actions Editor Button Calculate File Edit View Insert Action Tools Help AET L e On click Parameters mouse mouse shiftD own ctrlD own D gt If text of field Days lt 7 and text of field Days gt 1 Object a Execute Shared Actions TimelnHours store return value in Time Prompts z Display ale Shared Actions Navigation gt Else Scoring and Tracking Display ale Media End if Control 4 1 Available Shared Actions TimelnHours Actions Editor Shared Actions TimelnHours File Edit Insert Action Tools Help fa te x Er T v asail Timelni our f Shared actions ars Parameters Days Minutes Retums returValue A Execute Shared Actions J Set AvaWeek to Minutes Days 60 Object JE Set ShortWeek to AvaWeek Minutes 60 Je Set returnValue to AvaWeek Short Week 50 Scoring and Tracking Media Contro
111. 2 The department goal is to achieve a 95 or greater acceptance for all submitted forms O True O False Click Next to continue Figure 1 Buttons are used to provide choices and control actions A button s appearance is defined by various property settings that you can specify For example a button s border style is a property that determines whether the button appears as a rectangle a radio button a check box or some other type of button For more information about border styles and other button properties see Setting button properties later in this chapter In addition to different border styles a button also has a state indicating its active status which you can represent with a graphic You can assign a graphic to a button in the Properties for Button dialog box For details about adding a graphic to a button see Adding a graphic to a button later in this chapter 128 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Using and Modifying Buttons Using and Modifying Buttons There are three ways to create a button You can drag a button with the functionality you want from the Catalog to your page You can also create a button using the ToolBook tool palette Finally you can use OpenScript to draw a button After you have created a button you can set properties that determine how the button looks for example you can format its border style color or caption text usin
112. 3 to go to Reader level and then click the hotword to test the hyperlink Using OpenScript e Use the createHotword message to create a hotword from selected text Select third word of textline 1 of text of field Intro send createHotword gt To set the properties of a hotword Using the interface 1 Select the hotword and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar 2 Select one or more options to set the hotword s properties Style Specifies whether the hotword appears in color with a frame around it with no distinction from the surrounding text and so on Choose Book default to have the hotword appear in the style indicated by a book s default hotword style The hotword is highlighted Always shows the hotword in its highlighted pressed state Highlight when clicked Highlights the hotword when the user clicks it 3 Optional Close the Properties for Hotword dialog box A hotword must contain at least one character You can format hotwords just as you format other text For details about formatting text see Chapter 8 Working with Text Using OpenScript e Use the book s hotwordStyle property to set all hotwords in a book to a color add a border or to have no style attributes The default value of hotwordStyle is color hotwordStyle of this book color e Use the hotwordStyle property of the hotword to set a different style for that hotword hotwordStyle of hotword Popup frame e To remove a ho
113. A 192 Navigate to the page on which you want the voice recording Click Properties for Page on the Object menu Click the Voice Recording tab in the Properties for Page dialog box Select the Enable voice recording playback checkbox Note that the New button is enabled Click New In the Voice Recording dialog box click Step 1 to start a new recording Click Step 2 to end the recording Click Step 3 to review the recording Click OK to save the voice recording Click Cancel if you want to cancel the recording You can start a new recording if required Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Using the Voice Recording Feature Alternatively To record audio from the Insert menu Navigate to the page on which you want the voice recording Click Voice Recording on the Insert menu In the Voice Recording dialog box click Step 1 to start a new recording Click Step 2 to end the recording Click Step 3 to review the recording Click OK to save the voice recording N Og PO N oy Click Cancel if you want to cancel the recording You can start a new recording if required Changing a Voice Recording Once you have a voice recording for a given page you can change it if required by deleting it and recording a new one Alternatively you can also directly record an audio file for the page overwriting the existing audio file gt To delete a voice recording 1 Navigate t
114. A E Controls we Calendar lt ue Instructions field Field Step_Inst it Contacts Keyboard speed 0 normal speed Button Web Graphic of Page page select file menu Figure 4 The Simulation Editor shows steps and properties gt To start a new simulation e From the Insert menu choose New Simulation The Simulation Editor opens immediately after you add a new simulation gt To reopen the Simulation Editor e From the View menu select Simulation Editor Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 283 Building Software Simulations Toolbar buttons in the Simulation Editor Click this button To do this Add a new step to the simulation Assign an evaluation of user input to a step Add a new trigger event to a step Cut the selected item s to the Clipboard Copy the selected item s to the Clipboard Paste the selected item s to the Clipboard Undo the last command Redo the last command Delete the selected item s Edit the properties of the selected item s Move the selected item s up one line Move the selected item s down one line S PS VERE VSS DE VS EEIE Le K e 284 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working in the Simulation Editor Setting Properties for a Simulation A simulation has a number of properties t
115. Author level users interact with them at Reader level Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 25 Basic Concepts Author Level and Reader Level ToolBook has two levels of operation Author level and Reader level At Author level you create and modify applications using authoring and development tools such as templates the ToolBook Catalog dialog boxes and various palettes At this level you can create and modify objects and set properties to define their appearance and behavior Reader level is the level at which you test your applications as you develop them and also the level at which users run your applications At this level users can navigate to particular pages type text into fields respond to interactive question objects and trigger events T ToolBook Example tbk File Edit View Go Insert Object Text Draw Tools Help sasaoBercaQ use vo eae serT2a ok Expl Pages 4 Tith Sane LESSONTITLE 5 Introduction Topic gt CHAPTERTITLE J BodyText tal Image Placeholder TOPIC TITLE E orem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do 4 Our Mission eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua Lorem Gi Practice Question ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua 4 Organization wo E Practice Question Culture J Values
116. Click the Insert into Expression button Inthe Enter your expression here field insert the cursor at the end of the expression and type the equal symbol and then type in the value of your first time marker Click OK 6 Select the conditional expression you just created and then create an action or series of actions that ToolBook runs if that condition is true 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 until you have created a sequence of actions to handle each time marker event that you defined Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 181 Adding Audio and Video Files 8 From the Actions Editor File menu choose Update Actions amp Close Actions Editor Universal Media Player Company Meeting File Edit View Insert Action Tools Help w a BOM x amp t J e Parameters mediaPosition D If mediaPosition 5218 Set text of Field Key Points to This is our standard procedure Endif If mediaPosition 11184 Set text of Field Key Points to Notice the sequence of events Endif Figure 1 Handling multiple media timing events in an action sequence Using Other Media Players The Catalog also includes several other objects that you can use to add multimedia to your application which function quite differently from the Universal Media Player These objects play clips which are named references to a specific segment of a media file rather than the media file itself
117. Display Certificate object from the Certificate category of the catalog to that page Typically you would add it to the summary page of the book where the final score would be displayed Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 165 Chapter14 14 Hiding Showing and Animating Objects Introduction You can hide and show objects and animate objects to add visual effects to your book Hiding and showing objects is a simple way to add interactivity and animation can effectively demonstrate change over time or illustrate a chain of events This chapter describes how to hide show and animate objects using the ToolBook Animation Editor the Actions Editor and OpenScript Creating Visual Effects Visual effects such as hiding showing and animating obj ects can help make your ToolBook application dynamic and engaging To create these effects you can use e The ToolBook Animation Editor to create path based or cel based animations for objects e The Actions Editor to create action sequences that hide show or animate objects in response to specific conditions e OpenScript to change the position size or shape of objects or to display a changing set of pictures that gives the illusion of motion For a detailed description of how to use OpenScript to create special effects in an application refer to the Programming in OpenScript electronic book Hiding and Showing Objects Hiding
118. Draw transparent Use Windows colors Draw baselines Use custom colors Fill color C Stroke color a 2 Click one or more tabs and select or enter the options you want to set as described in the following table 3 Optional Close the Properties for Text Field dialog box Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 141 Working with List Boxes and Combo Boxes List box properties Click this To do this tab Draw Set drawing options border style field type color and visibility state options Bounds Set the field s position and size Font Set the font style size effects and formatting options Paragraph Set text alignment indentation spacing and tabs Behavior Specify the field s behavior at run time Drag amp Drop Specify the appearance and behavior of the field when it is dragged or dropped at Reader level For more information about formatting text fields see Chapter 8 Working with Text Modifying Field Type A list box organizes field text into a list with one item per line By default list boxes allow only one selection at atime If you want the user to be able to select more than one item at a time you can change the single select list box to a multi select list box ToolBook highlights the selected list option or options Figure 3 Single select and multi select list boxes gt Tochoose a multi select field
119. E Rectangle Inset Raised Shadowed Borderless Text F Text E Text jS Text 7 Text ex Text 5 Text E Text 5 Text fj Scrolling Auto Sizing Field Single select List Multi select List Combo Box Box Box Figure 1 Text fields in the Catalog Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 103 Working with Text Text fields and record fields like other objects have properties that you can set to define their physical appearance such as border style font and fill color In addition some fields in the Catalog have extended properties that you can set These properties define the extended capabilities of a field such as automatic sizing which you set in the object s Extended Properties dialog box Together these properties of a text object define its appearance and interactive behavior in your application Working with Fields Like other objects text and record fields have properties that define their appearance and behavior After you add a field to a page you can type or import text into it and then edit format or apply a color to the text You can also resize and move the field Fields can contain graphics and hotwords For example you can insert a graphic such as a bitmap into a field to create an inline graphic You can also select a word or phrase and make it a hotword Hotwords act as buttons They can trigger an action such as navigating to a page or playing an animation For de
120. E RECOMGING casscccsshevescectecacns aces gesatetaseedaaed des cachasmeecseteassnebavaneadidaescetagetiiealaces 192 Changinga Voice ReCOrding isisisi anaa tin a AN indented nies 193 Copying an Existing Voice Recording to a Page ccscesseeceeseeseeeeeeneeeeeseeseeeeseaeeeseeeneees 193 Using the UMP to Play Pre recorded Voice RECOrdingS ccceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeenees 194 USING the Actions EQN OM vicissscsssscassusnisscteassesssansastisuatentsiassanussnissuadcameasssanudseasens 197 INTFOOUCTION Sisto tiietin sorties hanes seine hints edie tees Dandie ieee eee ae ee E 197 About Action Seg ent S ui neha wi a Ae eee eee a i ee 198 Choosing When to Create Action SEQUENCES ccecceeteeeeeneeceeeeeceaeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeeeeeeeeneeeaas 199 Using Action Sequences in Place of Catalog Objects 0 cccceeeeceecseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 199 Using Action Sequences in Place of OPENS Cript cccceeceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeesnaeeeeneeees 199 Opening the Actions Editor secciesccvearisesecessenda ikl aa a Eana 199 Creating Action Sequences Using the Actions Editor ccecccessesceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeesseneaeees 200 Working with the Toolbar in the Actions Editor sscsssssnsssisna 200 Working with the Actions Palette 0 cceecccceeeeeccceeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeseeaeeeeaseaeeeeeeeaeeneeeeaeeeteees 201 CHOOSING am EVENT saaiste ondada iradiere aana a a aa aae eaa a AAEE a
121. En NEEESE en eee eee 263 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited vii Table of Contents Customizing the Import Process oisinn ade ae A Me A ed 264 Importing TOoOlBOOk AML ticcs ssctiees Anche ies E aeditee diined dene tne ented 265 About the SumTotal Publish to ToolIBook Add in eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeeesnaeeseeeeeaes 266 Using the SumTotal Publish to ToolBook Add ins iiien 267 About TOOIBOOK XML ieioea A E E E acini E eit 269 Importing a ToolBook XML Book into TOOIBOOK eccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 271 Building Software SIMUlAU ONS veiececiescsteccsecsteverereressrerstecaresssssnsnessssessenssenseensios 275 MMTROCUICTIOMN irass TAE EEES E E EE 275 ADo t Software SIMULATIONS izinan aaa aE A a aa RAAE AAE a AAE 275 Planning a Software Simulation tsasoa n a n a aa aaa aa aE ented secede 276 Choosing a SimUlation Mode sussies aaaea Ea aE a AAEE SEA 277 Practice MOOG nirosirasiirrr iiaia ien on SO E EEEE ete 277 Creating a Simulation with the Sim AutoBuilder ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeesaeeeeeeeeeaas 278 Developing a Simulation Manually cccccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeeeeaeeeseeeeseaeeeeeeseneeess 280 Preparing Screen IMAGES agiies aaa Maal ie eee aed eant A E ee 282 Working in the Simulation Edito frissons aa aaa EaR 283 Setting Properties for a Simulation 20 2 eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeceeee
122. For example if you are creating a book called Sample tbk create a directory called Backup periodically choose Save As from the File menu and then save your book as BackupSample tbk in the Backup directory Immediately after saving BackupSample tbk choose Save As from the File menu and this time save your book as Sample tbk in the original book directory This simple task can greatly reduce your file size and has the added benefit of creating a backup copy of your book Regardless of whether you ve been saving your book under a new file name periodically you ll want to do this before you prepare your application for release Be certain that after you save your book under the new file name you save it once again using the original file name Resetting your Book When you choose Save or Save As from the File menu you may have the option to reset your book Resetting prepares your application to be run by the user by putting all obj ects and pages in their reset state When you have finished developing your application reset the book so that features like quizzes and animations are ready to run If you don t see the option to reset your book when you save the option to display this dialog box may be turned off in the Properties for Book dialog box or your book may not contain any objects that require resetting gt To turn on the prompt for reset when saving 1 From the Object menu choose Properties for Book 2 On the General tab selec
123. In the Choose Media Clip dialog box click the Clips button 2 Click New to open the Choose Source Type dialog box select the type of multimedia you want and then click OK If you are creating a clip from a file the Choose Source File dialog box appears Navigate to and select the file you want to use and then click OK In the Clip Editor type a name for the clip you re creating in the Clip box On the Timing and Options tabs adjust the settings that apply to your clip such as volume control start and end points and palette options Click OK to close the Clip Editor Repeat steps 2 through 5 until you have finished creating clips 184 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating and Managing Clips 7 Click Close to close the Clip Manager Note Start and stop position settings for a clip are not supported in an Published DHTML application If you Publish your book to DHTML the entire media file will play in a Web browser Properties for Video Player cereal td Name Video Player Clip to play cip Try this I Play all of clip befo J T Play clip continuous Select a media type lt none gt clip Try this Stage to play clip lt Video Player stage gt Play entire clip before continuing Figure 2 Creating a clip Using OpenScript You can write and execu
124. ML Book tbi sbo Cancel Figure 10 Open XML dialog box with a tbkx file selected When you open a compressed ToolBook XML book in ToolBook a ToolBook book with the same name as the compressed ToolBook XML book is saved to the location of the compressed ToolBook XML book For example if you open a compressed ToolBook XML book called sample tbkx in a folder called test a ToolBook book called sample tbk is created in the same test folder If the ToolBook book already exists ToolBook displays a prompt before overwriting it To import an uncompressed ToolBook XML book you need to open the root Book xml in the directory where it is located This creates a ToolBook book with the same name as the directory in which the ToolBook XML files are located For example if you open Book xml from a directory called test a ToolBook book called test tbk is created in the test directory If the ToolBook file already exists ToolBook displays a prompt before overwriting it gt To open a ToolBook XML book in ToolBook 1 From a new book choose Open XML Book from the File menu 2 Inthe save current changes dialog box click No The Open XML Book dialog box is displayed 3 Inthe Files of type combo box select the type of ToolBook XML book XML Book or Uncompressed XML Book you want to import into ToolBook 4 Navigate to the location of the ToolBook XML book you want to import into ToolBook and
125. Parameter In OpenScript programming the part of a statement that indicates which object or dataa command is to act on the data a function uses in the operation it performs or the data passed with a message from one handler to another Also a value defined for a shared action sequence or ActiveX method that supplies information used in the execution of that particular shared action sequence or ActiveX method See also function handler statement shared action sequence Parent Object Any group page background book or system book that contains and is directly above another object in the object hierarchy See also object hierarchy Parent Window A window that owns another window Compare child window pop up window Path The course that an object follows as it moves during an animation You create a path in the Animation Editor by clicking to create vertices that define the path By setting the number of steps per second the total duration of the animation and the animation rate you can control how quickly and smoothly the object moves along a path The path is stored as a list of coordinates for each step of the animation Pattern A repeating arrangement of pixels used to fill a background or draw object Pattern Palette A palette available at Author level from which you can assign a pattern to a background or any enclosed object Patterns use the stroke and fill colors specified in the color tray See also fill stroke Picture Object A
126. Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar 3 Click the Draw tab select an end in the End1 list to appear as the line s starting point and then select an end in the End2 list to appear at the line s ending point 4 Select a value for the size of each line end from 1 to 9 Optional Close the Properties dialog box Applying Color to Objects Fill color is the color of the inside of all draw objects Stroke color is the color of the outline of any draw object text or imported object Enclosed objects such as rectangles and ellipses have both a stroke outline and a fill interior color You apply colors and patterns to an object in the Properties dialog box gt To apply color to an object 1 Select the object you want to color 2 Click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar and then click the Draw tab 3 Under Colors choose Use custom colors and then do one of the following To assign a fill color to the object click the Fill color button To assign a stroke color to the object click the Stroke color button A pop up window appears where you can choose from a palette of commonly used colors 4 Optional To choose a color not shown in the color palette click More Colors and select a color Using Windows Colors You can set the Use Windows Colors command on the Draw menu to specify whether an object or the background uses Windows system colors If you specify that an object use the Windows system colors the ob
127. Romance tbk Romance and shared media FRENCH IntroFrench tbk AdvFrench tbk FRENCH MEDIA EiffelTower avi SPANISH IntroSpan tbk AdvSpan tbk SPANISH MEDIA PradaMuseum avi etc Checking Spelling You can use the ToolBook spelling checker to ensure that your application is free from spelling errors You can also set the spelling checker to use a custom dictionary that you create ora foreign language dictionary that you purchase To check the spelling in an application gt To check the spelling in an application 1 From the Tools menu choose Spelling The Spelling dialog box appears 2 Optional Do one or both of the following m Click the Options tab and then select options to define the conditions of the spell check Click the Dictionary tab to select the dictionary to use 300 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Organizing and Checking Your Application 3 Click the Spell tab and then click Start The Start button becomes the View button When the spelling checker finds an unknown word or other error such as a duplicate word it highlights the word and displays the text in the Old box 4 Use the buttons on the Spell tab to ignore or change the unknown word to add the word to a user dictionary or to skip to the next object or page To view a list of alternative words click Suggest To have the list of alternatives appear automatically select Automatic
128. Scoring tab makes this negative weight assignment automatic For question objects that can recognize only a single answer at a time such as a fill in the blank or rating by multiple choice question object you can assign a higher weight to the most desirable answer and a lower weight to the other answers For example if your application solicited an opinion with a question such as Please rate the service at our hotel you might use a rating by multiple choice object with three possible answers weighted as shown below Rating by multiple choice Answer Weight Excellent 100 Average 50 Poor 0 Specifying Feedback With question objects you can specify feedback which is how the object responds when the student interacts with it For example when a student chooses the correct answer for a multiple choice question the question object can display the message Correct Providing feedback to a student allows for a higher level of interactivity which results in better retention Feedback is traditionally used in computer based training to provide responses or remediation to students according to how well they answer a question However you can use feedback for a variety of purposes such as guiding a student through a task or through your application Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 157 Creating a Quiz using Question Objects Types of Feedback ToolBoo
129. Screen key or a key you selected to indicate the end of the step 8 Continue to record each step in the software program pressing the Print Screen key at the end of each step until you are finished 9 Press CTRL Print Screen to stop recording or another selected key Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 279 Building Software Simulations 10 Open ToolBook In the book that will display your recorded simulation navigate to the page where you want to add the recording From the Insert menu choose Simulation from Recording 11 Select the name of the file containing the recording ToolBook processes your recording and adds the simulation to your book New pages will be added to the book if necessary Developing a Simulation Manually Starting from a blank ToolBook page you can create a new simulation by placing objects from the ToolBook Catalog over graphics that show the appearance of the screen in the software being simulated This section discusses how to develop a simulation manually without using the recording feature of the automated Sim AutoBuilder tool A page with a simulation contains a variety of different objects Graphics that show the appearance of the software being simulated are stacked up on a page to display visual changes in the appearance of the screen Text fields can show instructions and feedback text Buttons and other ToolBook Catalog obj ects may provide
130. SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Learning the ToolBook Interface Introduction This chapter helps acquaint you with the ToolBook visual interface Here you will learn about each interface component how to customize the interface and how to use built in tools to navigate in ToolBook applications Introducing the Visual Interface Designed for ease of use the ToolBook tools and visual interface let you focus on the important tasks of presenting your content and measuring student results ToolBook has two working levels Author level and Reader level At Author level you build applications using development tools such as the Catalog Book Explorer palettes and the toolbar With these tools you can build books create and modify objects on pages and add interactive behavior to your application At Reader level you can test your application to see how it will appear to your users Users will run your application at Reader level where they can navigate to pages respond to question objects and trigger events To switch between Author level and Reader level press F3 or choose Author or Reader from the View menu Working at Author Level When you first start ToolBook you see the Author level workspace At Author level you use tools such as the toolbar status bar tool palette and Catalog to build your application T ToolBook Example tbk File Edit View Go Insert Objet Text Draw Tools Help au
131. SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 13 Getting Started Starting and Exiting ToolBook You start and exit ToolBook as you would any Windows application gt To start ToolBook e From the Start menu point to Programs point to ToolBook 11 5 and then choose ToolBook 11 5 When you start ToolBook the ToolBook Startup dialog box appears Use this dialog box to start a new book or open an existing book T ToolBook 11 5 Startup From A Template Blank A template is a prebuilt book that provides a basic structure for your lesson Froma Template including page organization graphical theme interactive objects and navigation controls Use a Book Wizard Open Book If the Template is based on a SmartStyle you will be provided with page sizing options Select a File as Opes Bonis Available Templates Help Resources Compliance Training tbk Getting Started Conceptual with Chapters and Practice Questions tbk Leaming Training Conceptual with Three Chapters tbk Default tbk Android Health and Safety Training tbk BlackBerry Default Template Size Generic Desktop Browser Generic Mobile Device 777 x 556 Size Page To Fit Leadership tbk New Hire Training tbk Policies tbk Procedural with Practice Questions tbk iPad Sales Training tbk iPhone Scenario based Training Media Intensive tbk Windows Mobile Scenario based Training tbk Specify Custom Size Simple Conceptual with Interactive Pages
132. SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 247 Using Resources Changing a Book s System Cursor with OpenScript ToolBook comes with a number of system cursors that you can use Alternatively you can import a cursor as a resource and then set the OpenScript sysCursor property to that resource For example sysCursor cursor hand You can make the cursor change whenever it passes over something that you want the user to click For example use this script to make the cursor change to a pointing hand every time it passes over a button Sent when the cursor crosses the bounds of an object to handle mouseEnter if object of target is button then system oldCursor Declares the system variable oldCursor sysCursor Saves the current cursor sysCursor cursor hand Resets the cursor to a hand end end to handle mouseLeave The mouse pointer is leaving the object system oldCursor Redeclares the variable sysCursor oldCursor Resets the cursor to its old value end Getting Information about a Resource You can get information about a resource such as the size or ID number from the Resource Manager dialog box or by requesting the resourcelnfo property in the Command window gt To get information about a resource 1 From the Object menu choose Resources The Resource Manager dialog box appears 2 Inthe Available resources list select the type of resource about which you want to v
133. To set the extended properties for a single object within a group double click to select the object and then click the Extended Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar Properties for Navigation Button Name Image bitmap TBSTYLE BO0A34DADEE7F2F5 tal ras T Toggle the border between author and reader mode Resize to fit the entire image HTML imace oma aah HTML border width To enable the border feature ensure an image has been assigned e Figure 5 Extended Properties dialog box Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 99 Setting Object Properties Using the Book Explorer The Book Explorer is an interactive browser that shows the objects on each page in an outline format Right click any object shown in the Book Explorer to access the properties for that object gt To open the Book Explorer e From the View Menu choose Book Explorer You can move objects in the Book Explorer using drag and drop This allows you to move an object to a different layer on the page reorder the sequence of pages or move an object into a group Using the Property Browser The Property Browser allows you to view and edit a complete list of an object s property settings In addition you can view and edit system properties and variables using the Property Browser System properties define default behavior for the entire ToolBook system Because properties are displayed in the P
134. ToolBook Options dialog box 2 Do the following m Inthe Select the object to receive the User event list select an object Or drag the Choose object button over a named object to select it Optional In the Specify a value to pass as a parameter with this event list type ina literal value or use the Build Expression dialog box to create an expression to pass as a parameter with the event m Click OK gt To handle the User event 1 Select the object that you specified to receive the User event 2 Click the Actions button on the ToolBook toolbar The Actions Editor appears In the first line of the action sequence click the name of the event to open the Event list In the Event list select On User event Create an action sequence to respond to the User event Inserting Actions Conditions and Loops Action sequences are composed of a variety of actions that are grouped in three functional headings actions conditions and loops Actions add behavior to your application conditions specify the circumstances under which actions take place and loops repeat actions Every action sequence you create must include at least one action that is not a condition or loop gt To insert an action into an action sequence 1 Optional If your action sequence will use variables to store values that are used in the action sequence click the Define Variables button x on the Actions Editor toolbar to display the Variables dialog
135. ToolBook XML book Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 269 Importing and Exporting Data Each page and background has its own sub folder each with an XML file Pictures and other resources are saved separately A Book xml file is in the root folder of the directory Here is a sample from the Book xml of a ToolBook XML file lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 standalone no gt lt Book Size 11563 8672 HDMediaPath HotwordColor 240 50 100 HotwordStyle underline xmins urn sumtotalsystems toolbook tbkx xmlns ae urn sumtotalsystems toolbook tbkx actions xmlns x http schemas microsoft com winfx 2006 xaml xmlns sys clr namespace System assembly mscorlib gt lt Book UserProperties gt lt UserProperty Name ASYM DeploymentMethod Value HTML gt lt UserProperty Name ASYM EA Version Value 8 0 gt lt UserProperty Name ASYM AuthorResetPrompt Value TRUE gt lt UserProperty Name info Title Value sample gt lt Book UserProperties gt lt Book Resources gt lt Bitmap IdNumber 100 Source Resources Bitmapl00 png gt lt Bitmap IdNumber 101 Source Resources Bitmapl0l png gt lt Bitmap IdNumber 102 Source Resources Bitmapl02 png gt lt Bitmap IdNumber 103 Source Resources Bitmapl03 png gt lt Bitmap IdNumber 104 Source Resources Bitmapl04 png gt lt Book Resources gt lt Book Viewers gt
136. Total Publish to ToolBook Add in The SumTotal Publish to ToolBook add in supports PowerPoint 2007 or later To launch the add in go to the Home tab of the PowerPoint ribbon E 0B BORD Presentation1 Microsoft PowerPoint Srey i lt Home Inset Design Animations SlideShow Review View Developer tanes DEE Da iM lay SyReset E ri ZB a3 Replace Paste New Ay SRB aE Shapes Arrange Quick Publish to About J Slide X Delete Biei anA Ss 2 cig Styles l Selecty ToolBook Clipboard slides JL Font TJE Paragraph Drawing Editing ToolBook Figure 7 The home tab of the PowerPoint ribbon gt To convert a PowerPoint presentation 1 Open the PowerPoint file you want to convert in PowerPoint 2007 or later 2 Click the Publish to ToolBook icon on the Home tab of the PowerPoint ribbon The SumTotal Publish to ToolBook window displays T SumTotal Publish to ToolBook Page size Use PowerPoint slide size 960 x 720 pixels Choose your own size Page width Copy linked audio files to same folder as book Open in ToolBook when finished 3 Select a Page size for the new ToolBook book to be published from the following two options Use PowerPoint slide size a Choose your own size If you select this option do the following a Specify the unit of measurement in the Units drop down list avoid selecting pixels if there are any issues with th
137. Total Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Setting List Box Properties Creating a List Box Using OpenScript You can write and execute OpenScript code using the script editor or Command window List boxes you create using OpenScript will not Publish to Web For more information about using the OpenScript programming language refer to the Programming in OpenScript electronic book gt To create a list box using OpenScript e To make a field into a list box set the fieldType property to either singleSelect or multiSelect For example draw field from 2000 1000 to 4000 4000 name of selection Cities borderStyle of selection scrolling fieldType of selection singleSelect Setting List Box Properties After you have created a list box you can set properties that determine how the box appears and behaves at Reader level for example its border style and color Because a list box is a type of ToolBook field you set these properties in the Properties for Text Field dialog box Each tab in this dialog box sets some aspect of the field s appearance or behavior gt To set the properties of a list box 1 Select the list box and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar The Properties for Text Field dialog box appears Properties for Text Field i Cu AS sa m E 4 BEM g Nene Lee EJ Draw Bounds Font Paragraph Behavior Drag amp Drop E Drawing options
138. Total Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 223 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples Example 2 Using Variables There are many ways you can use variables in an action sequence In this example a global variable stores the number of times a user clicks a Hint button The action sequence uses this number to determine which hint to display At Author level open page six of the Actions Editor Walkthrough book named Question 1 There are several interactive objects on this page including a fill in the blank question object and three buttons One of the buttons is labeled Hint You will create an action sequence for this button that displays text as hints to the user T ToolBook Walkthrough tbk File Edit View Go Insert Object Text Draw Tools Help Su Sa SOc aM ue VO Reser grZa se y What kind of variable can be accessed from any action sequence Enter your answer below eV oebhesryY BEveD B dj o7 M 224 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Example 2 Using Variables Figure 2 shows the action sequence for Example 2 and the Variables dialog box ToolBook executes the action sequence as follows First ToolBook evaluates each conditional expression in turn comparing the value stored in the global variable named g_HintCounter against a specific integer If an expression is true for example if the value stored in g_HintCounter
139. Total Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 227 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples Now that you have created a conditional expression that tests the value of the g_HintCounter variable and a Display Popup Text action that runs if the conditional expression is true you need to insert an action that increments the value of g HintCounter You can use the Set variable action to change the value of a variable gt To set the value of a variable 1 2 In the Actions Editor select the last line of the action sequence End if From the Insert menu point to Action point to General and then choose Set Variable The Properties for Action dialog box appears In the Choose a variable to set list select g HintCounter In the Set the variable to this value box type g HintCounter 1 and then click OK In the Actions Editor from the File menu choose Update Actions amp Close Testing the Action Sequence You can test to see whether this action sequence executes properly at Reader level gt To test an action sequence 1 2 228 Press F3 to switch to Reader level Click Hint a few times The first three times you click Hint a different hint should display If you see This is your first hint followed by This is your second hint and finally Sorry no more hints are available for this question your action sequence is working You can now return to Author level to complete the next example or
140. Total Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 299 Preparing Native ToolBook Applications for Release Creating a Central Book Directory Structure It s a good idea to create an organized directory structure while authoring and it s especially important to have this structure in place before you prepare your application for distribution Take some time to make sure that all the files that users will need to run your application are in one place and that like items are grouped together Note If you plan to deliver your application locally that is if users will install your application on their computers make sure that the directory structure you create appears the way you want it to appear on the users systems All of the books that make up your application should reside in one central book directory with one or more subdirectories for the media sound graphics video and animation files that accompany those books Let s say your application has just one book introduction to French We suggest the following directory structure FRENCH IntroFrench tbk the ToolBook book FRENCH MEDIA EiffelTower avi a video file Now let s say your application is more complex You have one main book about Romance languages and several related books about French Spanish Italian and so on You could organize the files using several book subdirectories under a central directory as shown in this example ROMANCE
141. Trigger Action Trigger b Actions F5 Hyperlink Ctrl Shift H Hide Layer gt Cut Ctrl X 3 Copy Ctrl C i Paste Ctrl V lt 2 Duplicate Ctrl D X Delete Del Rename Button Properties Shift F6 E Action Trigger Properties Ctrl F6 Figure 10 Sample right click menu gt To display an object s right click menu e Click the right mouse button according to the table that follows gt To show advanced items in the right click menus 1 On the View menu click Options 2 Onthe Interface tab select the Show advanced items in right click menus option Right click menu access Object Type Where to click Page Right click an empty spot on the page or CTRL right click anywhere on the background Background CTRL right click on the page or right click an empty spot on the background Viewer CTRL SHIFT right click anywhere in the viewer Book SHIFT right click anywhere on the page Other Objects Right click the object 44 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working at Author Level By default you can display right click menus only at Author level However you can change the ToolBook default to display right click menus at Reader level as well Using right click menus at Reader level makes it easy for you to change an object s properties while you are running or testing an application gt To enable right click menus at Reader l
142. Universal Media Field Player W E SmartStyle Button Multiple Choice True False Question Question b m Question Text Field Action Objects Arrows Clipart Buttons Certificates Draw Objects Media Players aeta Obes Pages Placeholder Objects Questions Quiz Summary Simulation Objects Styles Text Fields My Objects Figure 1 The ToolBook Catalog 22 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Planning your project With Catalog objects it s easy to add interactive behavior to your application You simply drag objects with the behavior you want from the Catalog to a page The ToolBook Catalog includes hundreds of objects with preprogrammed capabilities that handle everything from page navigation and quiz scoring to special effects like multimedia feedback and animation These objects provide prebuilt functionality for the majority of your authoring tasks If you are new to developing online learning applications you ll find that the easy to use templates and the Catalog will get you quickly on your way to producing high quality interactive courses More experienced course designers will appreciate the robust content creation environment of ToolBook the Actions Editor visual programming tool the powerful OpenScript programming language and a variety of design options When you have finished authoring you can distribute the applica
143. Web browser after Publishing to Web Getting Started with ToolBook This guide covers the basic aspects of creating online content with ToolBook start with a template add your text and graphics and then use the Publish to Web menu command to automatically build web pages Programming in OpenScript This guide is a must read for anyone wanting to learn to program using the ToolBook OpenScript language Release Notes This documents contains last minute information which didn t make it into the standard product documentation before ToolBook shipped ToolBook Help The Help system for ToolBook should be used in conjunction with the User Guide as your main learning resources for using ToolBook You can access Help at any time in ToolBook by pressing F1 User Guide The document you are reading now The User Guide is the main ToolBook reference effectively the user manual It is the main learning resource for ToolBook containing information on a wide variety of topics Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Learning ToolBook Using the Help System The Help system is a fast comprehensive information resource about using ToolBook Here you ll find information on specific dialog boxes maps of screen elements keyboard and mouse shortcuts information about what s new in ToolBook and an OpenScript reference resource There are several ways to access Help From the Help menu choose Help
144. a a m FS aa Nene me Je Draw Bounds Font Behavior Web Sz Drawing options Figure 7 Properties for Group dialog box Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 93 Working with Objects Ungrouping Objects Groups can easily be ungrouped Ungrouping does not affect individual object ID numbers or names However ToolBook discards the group s ID number and name Tip Ungrouping a group will result in the loss of behavior assigned to the group by you or ToolBook ToolBook displays a warning if you attempt to ungroup a group with extended behavior gt To ungroup a group e Select the group you want to ungroup and then press CTRL SHIFT G or choose Ungroup from the Object menu ToolBook replaces the single set of group handles with handles for each obj ect showing that the objects are now ungrouped e To cancel the selection of an individual object within a group hold down the SHIFT key and click the object The other objects remain selected To cancel the selection of all the ungrouped objects click the page away from any selected object ToolBook places newly ungrouped objects on the layers in front of the old group s layer For example if a group contains three objects on layer 1 when you ungroup the three objects are placed on layers 1 2 and 3 Nesting Groups You can make a subgroup of objects within an existing group The inner or child group acts l
145. a color according to the amount of red green and blue in the color Compare hue lightness and saturation HLS Reshape Handles Handles that appear on a selected draw object when you choose Reshape from the Draw menu that you can use to reshape an object Curves angled lines arcs pies and regular and irregular polygons can be reshaped Resources Interface elements including graphics cursors fonts icons menu bars palettes and shared scripts that can be imported and shared in one or more ToolBook applications Rich Text Format RTF A text format that includes information about character and paragraph formatting for use in transferring formatted text between applications ToolBook preserves most character formatting and some paragraph formatting of text imported from any application that support RTF Right Click Menu The menu that appears when you right click an object Rollover Graphic The graphic that displays when the mouse pointer pauses over a button In ToolBook you can assign a rollover graphic to a button in the Properties for Button dialog box by selecting the option labeled Use checked graphic as rollover graphic RTF See Rich Text Format Ruler The horizontal or vertical scale used to measure and position objects on the page A hairline on each ruler shows the current location of the pointer See also grid Run Time A version of ToolBook that allows a user to run but not modify a book Sampling Rate A measure of
146. a fixed size regardless of the length of the data fields You can display data longer than the field by resizing the field on the background You can import a delimiter character as data by enclosing it in quotation marks For example you might have a comma separating city and state names in the source file If you want to keep that comma even though you re using a comma as the delimiter between fields you can import it as text by typing a quotation mark before and after the field containing the comma The text in the source file should read Bellevue WA instead of Bellevue WA All field delimiters and record delimiters are ignored in quoted regions of text in imported files To preserve quotation marks within a quoted region in the source file enclose them within a second set of quotation marks For example the field in the source file must contain this is a quoted region to import this is a quoted region into ToolBook gt To import a delimited field file Using the interface 1 Start a new book or navigate to the page in an existing book after which you want to insert the pages with imported text 2 From the Text menu choose Character The Character dialog box appears Select the font and point size for the imported text and close the window From the Insert menu choose Pages The Import dialog box appears In the Import type list select Text files txt Click Format to display the Text Format dialog box
147. aaea 202 Inserting Actions Conditions and LOOPS ccccececeesceeeseeeceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeseneeeeessneeeesseeeaeens 203 aa i e N I E AE E O T E A E A E AS 204 GONGIN S sagana raa E dene a aN rA EEE aaa EN aaa 205 LOOPS aosi E EE EE E OE EAE 206 Setting Properties for Actions sssssosseeseneseseseeesrseessnesensstsesessstsssressressresstesseesstesstenseensrense 206 Creating Valid ACtionS cccccccceceeseseeeeeeeeeeeaeeceeeeecaeeecaaeseeneeseaeessaaeeseaeeseneeeseaeeesaeeseaeessaees 207 Building ExpreSslOnS sisse axiieenssterettiel et Mente eerie eat a nei eee 207 Operators ANd FUNCTIONS c cceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeesaaeeseeeeseaeeeeaaeseeaeeseneeesiaeessnaeeseaes 208 Variables and Parameters ccceceecceceeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeseaaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeseneeseenenaeees 208 Opject Propertie Sisson cect laces bol eyve faeesien tee aad Sau seen aa daan aeaaea ae anole eee a a Aa Eai 209 Special Valg S sarnasena ananandur weve deters Gu ansaa aaaea aa aaea aaa Anaa 209 VRE N E A O A A T T A eed ee 209 vi Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Table of Contents Creating and Using Shared Action SCQUENCES ccceeeeeesteceeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeetaeeseaeeteaes 211 Naming and Locating Shared Action Sequences cceecceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceteeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeetnaten 211 Using Shared Action Sequences seseriai eaii a eee i
148. aan AEEA aaa a EE aaa AAAA aA 79 Cutting Copying Pasting and Deleting Objects ssesesssessessirssresiresirssirssrissrnnsrensrnssrnnsnn te 80 Moving ODJOCIS irrena aA cael AES Eea Ee NE NA eA ated a EEA cata adie aE 81 Spreading and Centering Objects rsisi aaa a a a a AA Naina 81 Flipping and Rotating ObjeCts ccccceesceceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeceaeeeseaeeseeeeseeeesiaeeseeeseneeeeaes 82 Aligning ODJOCtS sieceeeeccty senthedeecensttenuedeet save lgerts ects hn tere estes eeeepoeeediisieasili ae TAREA aAa 82 Using the Align Command ccccceeececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeecaeeecaaeceeeeesaeeeeaaeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesnaeeseeeeeaes 83 Changing the Size and Shape of Objects eeeccecececeee eset eeeeeeceeeeecaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeees 83 Constraining an Object s Shape cceecceceeeeeeececeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeesaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeseeeseneees 85 Modifying the Appearance Of Objects 0 ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeesaeeesaaeeeeaeeseeeeescaeeesaeeneeeeees 85 Applying Line Style S merna ian aa E A E AE E EE E 85 Applying Color to ODjEClS arcsin a E E E E aia 86 Using Windows COlorS sseni saiia aa ea E N EATE aa E ea EGE EEE 86 Making Objects Transparentna a a aE Ei 87 Filling an Object with a Pattern iaieiiea a aa a a 87 Moving Objects Between Layers cccccccccceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeesaeeseeneeceaeeeeaaeseeaaeseeeeeeaeeeeaeseeeeesseeeess 88 Changing Layer Ordet anusi tangaa E E
149. ackdrop of a background by setting the background s properties If you decide to make a change simply modify the background and the change appears on all the pages that share the background Applying Color and a Pattern to a Background The background provides a common design for all pages that share that background You can create a consistent look and interesting visual effects by adding color and a pattern to your background gt To apply a color and pattern to a background Using the interface 1 From the Object menu choose Properties for Background and then click the Draw tab 2 Toapply a color under Colors choose Use custom colors Click the Fill color button to choose a fill color from the pop up palette or click Other to open the Color dialog box where you can specify a custom color 3 Toapply a pattern under Pattern choose a pattern style from the pop up palette or click Other to open the Choose Pattern dialog box Choose a stroke color to use in the pattern 4 Optional Close the Properties for Background dialog box Using OpenScript You can set properties for a background by specifying the background s name or ID number or you can set properties for the current background by using this background To set colors set the fillColor and strokeColor or the rgbFill and rgbStroke properties To set the pattern set the pattern property fillColor of this background green pattern of background Intro 25 Adding an
150. aeeseeeeeseaeeesaaeeseneeseaees 180 Using Other Media Player Ssusse aA aa N AEE E weet uate alae 182 Working with Media Players and Stages cccccccecseeceeeeeceeeeeseeeeeaaeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeseaes 182 Setting the Appearance Of a Stage ecceescceeececeeseeseeeeeeaeceeeeeseaeeecaaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesnaeeeeneeseaees 183 CHOOSING aFraMe Style pect ete man ana aian van ena Naaa aa n EAEE ENNEA 183 Creating and Managing CWS sssrsnssaiea nannaa aE a ea aa a A EAE a ASEE 184 Creating Clips acca rete tear ents nolities adbal andebaetssWeeatersdev needle ceedev eea cee eds 184 M naging CUPS visa c ceiisneavgessecezeitanee eit an aaia daaa a aana aaa E i 186 Creating a Clip Library s ciumrosiiniiiesnaniiiiiinensn iiiad aeaiia aana adaa aaa aia 187 Working with Media Clip Paths ccccesceceeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeseaeeesaaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeaeeseeeeeaes 187 Making Clip Paths Independent ccccccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeceeeeecaeeeeaaeeseeeeseeeessaeeeeaeeneaeeee 188 How ToolBook Searches for Media ccccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeseeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeseeeees 189 Refining Media Search Paths sisien a aia aa a aaah 190 Adding a Voice ROCOPING ccinsesnnsisceissesntnsnsnsncesrersessinsusnensacnsrsssesetesesnensssntnsrsacns 191 MIOGUCHO N aaien E E E AO 191 About the Voice Recording Feature s sucaorsiceaiananuc a 191 Using the Voice Recording Feature ceessanuranenonossannsioin i E a 191 Creating a VOIC
151. age editing program allows you to select an area of a captured screen image and crop it to remove the remainder of the image 282 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working in the Simulation Editor Working in the Simulation Editor You can create new simulations and edit existing simulations in the Simulation Editor A simulation is made up of a series of steps that define the behavior in a simulated software process All of the steps in a simulation are displayed in the top panel of the Simulation Editor When an item in the steps panel is selected the lower panel in the Simulation Editor shows the properties for the selected item The lower panel is called the property grid T ToolBook OutlookSimulation tbk Simulation Editor File Edit Yiew Go Insert Object Text Draw Tools Help File Edit wiew Insert Help E So SOra B mme ad aes tagaa Hes Se Blo ox wt Simulation sim_select_file_menu a Gh Ay dk dD E S Step 1 Click File Bx 2 Objects the user must change in this step Eie Edit wiew Go Tools Actions Help i E Events that trigger an attempt la S S BS x Eo Reply Reply to All 4 Forward S end v Click on button trigger_file no modifier J M X Click on any object no modifier lt m cA o From ET Properties for Sula EAA Rene pan Inbox Microsoft Outlook Outlook Today amp Inbox 72
152. aiii 212 Executing Shared Action Segen ES ccceccceceteceeeeeeeeseeceeeeeeeaeeeeaaeseeneeseeeesaeeseaaeeneneeee 213 Using Parameters concre inde dda actin ci navidad ati Me dhe ee 215 Managing Action Sequences amikina anid inane aa diel 215 Validating ACCIONS seccnncitiiied aeieeliivne aii ee adie inte O ieee ee 215 Viewing Action S QUENCES asioinnin Ma ee A E ANE 216 Enabling and Disabling ACHONS cccsccracenisnur cinneann EEA E E R ES 217 Importing and Exporting Action Sequences ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeseneeesaeeeeaaeeeeneeees 217 Creating Action Sequences Practical EXAMples cccccsssseeesnensssensseeees 219 Aaa ENN e1 a g PESA A E A A E T E E A E E E N 219 ABOUL tHe ExXampl o Sunissa E E ET EE EAE ASE AA 219 Using Me Examples jcsic cexsecsivesastecinsvetenelsitercent eater UAE EE ARAE ENEE RANE EUNE AKEE EEEREN ANA 219 Example t Using GOMGITIONS sissien ra nana eE aa anaa TA aR A 220 Building the Action Segen E siasa aa aiaa aaa eia eta iN a 221 Testing the Action Sequence c cccccceeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeaeecaeeecaaeeeeaaeseeeeseaeeesaaeseeaeeeseneetaas 223 Example 2 Using Variables assisen innesiinnnnennun inunda annA AN AANEEN NEENA AEAN KAE ENNA AEKA EN 224 Building the Action Sequence ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeecaaeeeeaeeceeeeeaeeesaaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeneneeee 226 Testing the Action Sequence esseesseesseesseeeeresrtstrretrnesr netr nettnettnsttnsetnsstnsstn
153. align objects on a page Group A collection of objects that is defined to move and be resized as a single object Like any other ToolBook object a group has an ID number and has properties that can be set Group Report A report printed in groups where each group contains the contents of the record fields from one page For example a group report can print mailing labels from an address book See also record field Compare column report Gutter On a printed report the space between adjacent columns in a column report groups in a group report or ToolBook pages if you are printing more than one page per sheet of paper See also column report group report Handle 1 A small square that appears at each corner and edge of an object when it is selected Handles are visible only at Author level You can drag the handles to resize an object 2 A unique reference number assigned by Windows to any open viewer whether it is shown or hidden A handle can also refer to a memory location See also viewer Handler A collection of OpenScript statements in a script that defines the response to a particular event such as clicking an object A script can contain more than one handler each responding to a different event See also script statement Header Text that appears at the top of every printed page Highlight 1 The onscreen indication that text or another item is selected 2 The property of a button or hotword that controls whether it fla
154. alue of an object property Opening the Actions Editor and Selecting an Event Because you want users to view an updated list each time they open the Contents page you will want the action sequence to run each time the Contents page loads The event On load page corresponds with the user opening a page in the book gt To open the Actions Editor and select an event 1 On the Contents page select the check box object labeled About variables 2 From the Object menu choose Actions The Actions Editor appears 3 Inthe Event list select On load page 230 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Example 3 Changing Object Properties Inserting Actions The first task in this action sequence is to determine whether or not a user has visited the page named About variables You can insert a condition to create a conditional expression that tests whether a page has been visited gt To insert a condition 1 From the Insert menu point to Condition and then choose If The Properties for Condition dialog box appears 2 Inthe Condition box type visited of Page About variables True and then click OK 3 From the Insert menu point to Condition and then choose Else To change the state of the About variables button from unchecked to checked you can use the Set property action gt To set an object property 1 Select the first condition in the action sequence If visited of Page About
155. an choose Show Hotwords from the View menu to display all the hotwords on a page Alternatively send the OpenScript showHotwords message Applying Color to Hotwords Both books and hotwords have a hotword style property that determines how a hotword is distinguished from the surrounding text with color for instance A book s hotword color property defined on the Draw tab of the Properties for Book dialog box defines the color value of all the hotwords in the book However an individual hotword style property defined in the Properties for Hotword dialog box overrides the book s hotword style property You can apply a color to a specific hotword that is different from the color applied to other hotwords in a book or even make different parts of the hotword different colors Set the hotword s style to None and then apply formatting by setting the hotword s text color in the Properties for Hotword dialog box After you have applied special formatting to an individual hotword you can easily reapply the book s formatting by changing the hotword s style to Book default Removing Hotwords You can remove a hotword by changing it into regular text gt To change a hotword into regular text 1 Place the insertion point in the hotword or select any part of it 2 From the Text menu choose Remove Hotword ToolBook changes the hotword into regular text and discards its script and hyperlink properties Using OpenScript e To remove a hotw
156. and drop it onto your page The tool palette contains tools you can use to draw objects on a page You can draw graphical objects such as circles and lines as well as functional objects such as buttons The Catalog contains a rich collection of objects that you use to construct and enhance an interactive application Many Catalog objects have preprogrammed built in behavior Each object has a set of properties that define its appearance and behavior A text field for example has properties such as fill color width and height that determine its color and size and other properties such as text alignment and field type that define how it displays text and whether it allows users to enter data Some objects have extended properties that determine more sophisticated capabilities A media player for example has properties that control the player s interactive functionality such as which media file will play and how ToolBook will play the file at Reader level For more information about objects and object properties see Chapter 6 Working with Objects and Chapter 7 Setting Object Properties You can set most properties using dialog boxes available in the ToolBook interface However some behavior can be set only by using the Actions Editor or OpenScript Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 27 Basic Concepts Using the Actions Editor The Actions Editor is a visual programming to
157. and has positioned CCI as leader in both off the shelf and customized learning solutions Click Next to continue Figure 11 Reader Level 46 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Navigating in an Application Navigating in an Application You can use a variety of methods to move from one page to another in a book including e Page navigation features on the status bar e Commands on the Go menu e Arrow keys e Book Explorer You can also navigate by entering a page name number or id number in the Go To dialog box available from the Edit menu Using the Status Bar Page Navigation Features You can use the page navigation features to navigate at Author level gt To navigate using the status bar e Do one or a combination of the following m Click the right arrow or the left arrow to go to the next or previous page m Click the numbers ToolBook will prompt you to enter the number of a page m Click the check mark or press ENTER to go to that page Click the X or press ESC to cancel Click here to move to the fl 5of 6 iT Click here to move to the next previous page page Click here to move to 2 particular page xivi Go to page Figure 12 Using the status bar to navigate Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 47 Learning the ToolBook Interface Using the Go Menu and Arrow Keys The following
158. and properties See also group Uniform Resource Locator URL An address used to locate Web pages on Web servers Much like your area code and telephone number identify your region and then your location the URL of a Web page identifies a computer and then a specific document Unique Identifier A method of identifying an object in any book Includes the object type name such as button page field and so on object ID number and the unique name of the page or background on which the object is located URL See Uniform Resource Locator User Property A property that a developer creates for an object beyond those which are built into the ToolBook object and for which the developer can get and set values as with any other property All objects in ToolBook can have user properties For a list of user properties defined for an object get the value of the object s userProperties property User Defined Function A function in OpenScript that is defined by a handler written by the developer in contrast to a function that is built into OpenScript See also function handler User Defined Message Any message that is not one of the built in messages that ToolBook sends in response to an event The developer must provide a corresponding handler for all user defined messages ToolBook s default response to user defined messages that are not handled is to display the Execution Suspended message See also Execution Suspended message User event Compare bu
159. and showing objects is a simple and effective way to create interactivity in your application An object hidden at Reader level can be made to show when the user performs a certain action To create hide and show behavior you can use an action trigger from the Catalog You can also use the Actions Editor to create an action sequence to hide and show objects One advantage of hiding and showing objects in an action sequence is that you can closely control how the effect fits into your overall lesson design For example you can hide or show an object as part of a longer sequence of actions all activated by the same event You can also create conditional expressions and loops that determine when an object is hidden or shown Using an Action Trigger to Hide and Show Objects You can use an action trigger to hide and show objects Simply drag the action trigger from the Catalog onto your page and specify the obj ect to hide or show You can add a delay when hiding or showing an object using the action delay trigger The following procedure uses an ellipse as an example You can choose any Catalog object to hide and show gt To create hide and show sequence using action triggers 1 If the Catalog is not open from the View menu choose Catalog 2 Click the Draw Objects category and drag an ellipse object onto your page 3 From the Action Objects category drag two action triggers onto your page Arrange the three objects on your page so that non
160. anges described in the instructive text to the evaluation object and no other changes in order to complete the step correctly Tip The text entered in a text field during a simulation can be evaluated to determine if the text input is correct gt To add an evaluation object to a step 1 Select a step in the Simulation Editor 288 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working in the Simulation Editor From the Insert menu choose Evaluation Object Click the Properties button on the Simulation Editor toolbar Choose the name of the object to be evaluated ao FY nN Specify the required change for example the text to be entered Any undefined user interaction with evaluation objects will be ignored when a learner interacts with the simulation Evaluating Text Entry During a simulation the text entered by a learner can be evaluated automatically Many built in options exist for determining if the text response is correct These text response options are available in the Simulation Editor e allow multiple correct responses e require text to be case sensitive uppercase or lowercase characters e ignore punctuation e use the asterisk wildcard character to indicate any number of characters may be entered in a specific sentence location e require the word order to match the defined response e accept words that sound like the ones in the response specified by the author
161. anization work Then get someone else to try it a fresh perspective can be invaluable Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 63 Working with the Catalog Introduction The Catalog contains a rich collection of obj ects from simple navigation buttons to sophisticated objects such as the Universal Media Player and interactive questions You can use the Catalog to find objects to use in your applications Additionally you can create your own objects and store them in the Catalog to use in other applications you create This chapter describes how to use the ToolBook Catalog Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 65 Working with the Catalog About the Catalog The Catalog contains a collection of objects that you can use to construct and enhance interactive applications Authoring is fast and easy using the objects in the Catalog because you can simply drag the object you want directly to your page If you like you can use the Catalog as your primary authoring resource since it includes virtually everything you need from simple draw objects to sophisticated interactive objects More likely you ll use the Catalog as a resource for preprogrammed objects such as questions objects navigation panels media players and so on The Catalog window contains buttons that display the names of categories of objects You click a category button to view
162. at a time After you insert an action into the action sequence you can move it up or down in the order of actions as well as cut copy or delete the action You can also select multiple actions at a time to delete copy or move them as a group When running the action sequence ToolBook carries out actions in the order in which they are listed in the Actions Editor window In any action sequence you can modify the items that appear as hotspots in colored underlined text When you click one of these hotspots the appropriate dialog box opens and you can edit the existing settings You can change the appearance of these hotspots on the Actions tab in the ToolBook Options dialog box which opens when you select Options from the View menu Loops and conditions are types of actions with functionality that sets them apart from the other actions When you insert an action after a condition or loop ToolBook places it in a sublevel indented position to indicate that it is carried out only when the loop or conditional expression is true It also inserts a dashed vertical line connecting the beginning and end of the loop or conditional structure You can move an action into or out of a sublevel indented position using the Move Up a and Move Down buttons on the toolbar Working with the Toolbar in the Actions Editor The buttons on the toolbar are shortcuts to frequently used menu commands in the Actions Editor Toolbar buttons in the Actions Edit
163. ation you can set options that define the behavior and appearance of the animation such as duration or rate For example you can increase the number of steps per second to make an animation appear to run smoother and you can choose a variable rate to make an animation appear to accelerate or decelerate over its path gt To set animation options 1 Open the Animation Editor and select the animation whose options you want to edit 2 Click the Animation Settings button The Animation Settings dialog box appears Make the changes you want and then click Close Click Done in the Animation Editor to save your changes and recompile the animation 176 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Adding Audio and Video Files Introduction You can play media files in ToolBook including sound animation digital video and still images This chapter describes how to use the Universal Media Player object and other Catalog objects to add flair to your online application About Digital Media Audio video animation and graphics are all types of digital media that you can incorporate in an online learning application Media adds interest to any page making the learning experience dynamic and effective If you plan to deliver pages via the Internet by Publishing your book to DHTML use Internet compatible file formats when choosing media elements Choosing a Media Player The primary de
164. ause their interleaved format allows them to be efficiently retrieved by CD ROM drives Author Level One of two working levels in ToolBook Author level provides tools and commands for creating and modifying objects including pages books and backgrounds Applications are built at Author level and run at Reader level Automation A technology that allows you to access and manipulate the objects properties and methods of other Windows applications from a ToolBook application AVI See Audio Video Interleaved Aviation Industry Computer Based Training Committee AICC An industry standards group that publishes guidelines for interaction between course management systems and computer based training Backdrop A bitmap image placed onto one or all of a book s backgrounds Each backdrop becomes a property of its background Background A design shared by pages in a book Every book has at least one background Objects on a background appear on every page sharing that background Several pages can share the same background and a book can contain several backgrounds Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 309 Glossary Bandwidth The amount of data that can be sent via the Internet over a period of time with the equipment being used Bandwidth can refer to the connections on the Internet as well as the connection between a modem and an Internet service provider Baselines Lines that show the vert
165. bar Inthe object s Properties dialog box click the Extended Properties button on the dialog box toolbar With the object selected press CTRL F6 For more information about setting object properties see Chapter 7 Setting Object Properties Working with the Actions Editor The Actions Editor is a visual programming tool that you can use to build or edit a series of behaviors called an action sequence In the Actions Editor you use familiar interface elements including menus and a toolbar to construct sophisticated behaviors based on standard programming protocols Using the sequences you create in the Actions Editor you can respond to an event a button click for example by playing media prompting users for input changing the appearance and behavior of objects controlling user navigation and much more You can also specify conditions for behavior insert loops to execute actions repetitively and set and get variables all without writing a script Action sequences are a good way to deliver custom interactive behavior on the Web Action sequences will be converted and functional when Published to Web Actions Editor Button Continue File Edit View Insert Action Tools Help Actions Editor w ala wlx lt 2 lwxel Toolbar Dn click Parameters mouseX mouseY shiftD own ctrIDown gt If text of field input 55 Display alert The valued entered is not corect Display Alert Endit Displa
166. before continuing to the next page Any fields on layers lower than the object with the focus will not be searched until after ToolBook searches the rest of the book 88 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Moving Objects Between Layers Changing Layer Order When you change an object s layer number ToolBook assigns new layer numbers to all other objects affected by the change For example on a five layer page moving the layer 3 object to layer 4 puts the layer 4 object on layer 3 You can change an object s layer order by typing a different layer number in the Properties dialog box for the object The total number of layers for the current page or background is shown beside the Layer box in an object s Properties dialog box You can also choose one of the four layer commands from the Draw menu to change an object s layer number gt To move an object to the next higher or lower layer 1 Select the object 2 Fromthe Draw menu point to Layer and then choose Bring Closer or Send Farther Bring Closer moves the object one layer up or forward in the layer order Send Farther moves the object one layer down or back in the layer order Select an object a and then choose ToolBook Bring Closer to move a the object up one layer Figure 6 Changing layer order gt To move an object from its current layer to the back layer 1 Select the object 2 From the Draw menu point
167. bited Working with Record Fields Using Record Fields for Reader Level Data Entry You can use record fields to create a form into which your users enter data at Reader level For example you might set up a product catalog to index all the software products used at your company where each data entry field is actually a record field Record fields are a good choice for creating data entry applications because ToolBook can print reports or sort pages using record fields Importing Pages with Record Fields You can import pages that contain record fields from another book into the current book using the Paste command on the Edit menu or using the OpenScript import command When you import pages ToolBook inserts the pages into the destination book after the current or specified page Note If you paste record fields into your book using the Paste command be sure that you are on the background when you paste otherwise ToolBook will create text fields from them When you import pages and choose not to include the source book s backgrounds ToolBook adds the record field text to the destination book s record field text if the source and destination books record field names or ID numbers match If the source and destination books record field names or ID numbers do not match the source record field text is added to the destination record field using layer order The source book s first record field is mapped to the destination book s first re
168. bject even further The Properties dialog box is quite versatile because the available settings change dynamically according to the currently selected object You can leave the Properties dialog box open select various objects in your book using your mouse and the settings in the Properties dialog box will change to reflect the available settings for the selected object For example if you select a text field you will see the Properties for Text Field options in the Properties dialog box If you select a button you will see the Properties for Button options in the Properties dialog box Settings made in the Properties dialog box take place immediately without closing the dialog box gt To display the Properties dialog box e Do one of the following From the Object menu choose one of the properties options For example if a button is selected choose Properties for Button Click the Properties button np on the ToolBook toolbar m Right click an object and then click the Properties button Ey on the right click menu Press SHIFT F6 In the Properties dialog box common properties are organized by tab The following table describes some of the property pages that are common to many objects Examples of property pages common to many objects Click this tab To do this Draw Set the properties that control the way the object is drawn such as fill color line style color palette or border style Bou
169. box define the variables you plan to use and then click OK For more information about defining variables see Using Variables later in this chapter 2 Optional If you are adding an action to an existing action sequence select the action after which you want to insert the new action Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 203 Using the Actions Editor 3 From the Insert menu point to Actions Conditions or Loops and then choose the action you want to insert Or you can drag one of the actions available in the actions palette to the action sequence 4 Optional Open the Properties dialog box if it is not already open and select or enter the properties for the action 5 If necessary use the Move Up K and Move Down 2 buttons on the Actions Editor toolbar to reposition the action in the action sequence Actions Actions add behavior to your application Some actions are visible to users For example you may choose to play media display a document or set an object property in response to an event these all affect how the application appears to the user Other actions are not immediately visible to the user and are actions that you can use to control how ToolBook functions Setting a variable and executing a shared action sequence are examples of this type of action Properties for Set Property Action General Select the object for which to set the property Prope
170. c cndaieteei niin aA ei A ETAS 110 Navigating i TOXU soss O ie ntenn veered ees 110 Select ng TEXT Pasians iann aaa aaa RNa ENEA EE A AEE erent evade eter 111 Cutting Copying and Pasting Text cccceccceseseeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeseaaeseeaeeseeeeeseaeeseaaesseneessaees 111 Deling Tol ascsneni ar a TE E E A O 112 Formatting Text Felga E O 112 Applying COlOk tO Fexri senvsves dang des aie aaia aae Aaa Aeaaahaeevdoceees eee 113 Formatting Paragraph Styles iisccc cctettesssnd aaa a aeaa aaae AAE aaa 114 inserting Inline GraphiG Sissa aana aaa aaa aaa eee 114 Inserting Special CMAaracters isinai iana aaa aiaiai 115 FINGING and Replacing Toki ssossupssi svsnseeeseussteneasteenevautitivee teeceesmetanesngiees se tiene cies 116 Working with Record Fielda ccccssecccas scenes adeseseeandeneeseaneeteeadensena seudetar eitieeveuieianadendeeevavdvie nes 117 Using Record Fields to Display Information e cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaaes 118 Using Record Fields for Reader Level Data Entry ec eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaes 119 Importing Pages with Record Fields eeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseneeeeeseneeeeeseneeeeseeeeaeees 119 Sorting Pages by Record Field cccccccceeesseceececeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeceaeessaaesseaeeseaeeeseaeeeeaaeseeneessaees 119 USING Graphit S es aaan ESE AE EAE E ESE aa ER 123 MroduUCHOM esner a E O tree ereerertr eee eerrer rere re 123 PAD OUE GAP MICS oe oes
171. c until you have inserted all time markers 3 Click OK Tip To set several time markers at once play the media file and while it is playing click Add time marker as the player reaches the positions of interest in the media file Once you have set the time markers you can go back to insert comments or edit the individual time markers Creating Actions for Time Markers For each media file you play you can set multiple time markers each of which sends the same media timing event You can use the Actions Editor to create a single action sequence that runs in response to any media timing event or you can create an action sequence that responds with different behavior depending on which time marker generated the media timing event For more information about the Actions Editor visual programming tool see Chapter 17 Using the Actions Editor gt Tocreate an action sequence to respond to media timing events 1 Select the Universal Media Player object and then click the Actions button on the toolbar The Actions Editor appears In the Event list select On media timing event In the Actions Editor create an action or series of actions to respond to media timing events In the Actions Editor from the File menu choose Update Actions amp Close 180 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Using the Universal Media Player You can also create an action sequence that responds with differen
172. ccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeees 59 Setting Properties for BOOKS ssoi aniani a ER a E E eaaa E 60 Protecting Books with Passwords essareronaiena e E 60 Navigating Through a BOOK erseisrcaccrec ennn E EEE E E 60 Using Built in NaViQatlon sessen E TEE 61 Using Navigation Objects e niia a A ee tte 61 Skipping Pages when Navigating inniinn a a Aaa A A T ai a 61 Setting Up Transition Effects between Pages cccccecceeseeceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeteaeeseeeseeneess 62 Adding Navigation Behavior to an Object sisnscicisiiani anaa e aaia 62 Enhancing a Book s Performance cic vcs sien tities chen abate cen EEEE EAE 63 Working With th Catalog siiiciseicssssiescssieibsssesescauscesncsesssuedieteareesunesesesuerstoueusielin 65 NTO CU CTION osni E EA EAEE 65 ADOUT The Catalog irsana a a a a E a aT aA EEE E ERE 66 Authoring with the Catalogi a aa e e e aaa aaa teed 67 Browsing Through the Catalog vecessaccntsstecctss evdsnss teense iana egaa a iaaa 67 Using Drag and Drop AUtNOnING rorsman eee adult E REEERE 67 Finding the Right OD OCh iurien aaaea cutest eaaa e a aaa E E dived 67 Viewing ODJECTS asirsnniuisuini lanes hiacee Death aa a A EAE ANAA Ae eE a AAEE aa aada 68 Exploring Types of Catalog OBjECtSisroguineui iaria aa onea aaaea aaa ae aaa 68 Acion THOJO N rosorna eE E T S TOS idan A E 68 SCORING and TrackManii aena AEEA REN AENA E AEA aa a Eaa aA 68 PlacenolderS poeeroeeii inei inet isiinina enia inaani E AAEE SeN E EEEE
173. ce secede ots sax d ca dace cava N Ea a a a aa NE 123 Using Graphics on the Internet sisirin iaae ae E a aTa E a EaR 123 Adding Graphics to Your BOOK sscan a aa E aiak 124 Pasting Graphics from the Clipb0ard ccccecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeaeseeeeeseeeeeseaeesenaeeseeneess 124 importing GRADING Sesasi niea cus desvueevag ievgsddeaveeea tues vee denmenena tact dete ar E EA 124 Assigning a Graphic Resource to an ODjeCt ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 125 Storing Graphic Files in TOOIBOOK ccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeeeeseeeescaeeseeeseeees 125 Modifying Graphics iiuct ist ected icon aiid Oa eA ie idee de ee des 125 Changing the Line Style of an Imported Graphic 0 ccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeeeseaees 125 Converting Picture or Paint Objects to Image Objects eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeenees 125 Adding Interactive Features to your APPliCatiOn 1 cccsssecccseeseneeensesnertnseesens 127 INTFOGUCTION vies stetestatietivesiee tia E T EE E TN 127 AbDOUt BUTLONS ccrcinesorisinnnoiene nni a E EE A EEEE EN 127 Defining How Buttons LOOK ow iviciecescedesetinnetasnnneds in EA EAEE TAEA 128 Using and Modifying BUNONS sssssonpussriris oniinn nii EA S EAE EE 129 Adding a Button trom the Catalogisssss irea aaa aa aei G 129 Creating a Button Using the Tool Palette isusiionuitusninnakinni ninaa aian 130 Creating a Button Using OpeNnScrip
174. click OK Click the check mark button to accept the changes or click the X button to reject the changes Some properties are for your reference only You will not be able to edit these properties Tip You can also double click the entry in the Value column to edit the property The User tab of the Property Browser displays some properties that are built into ToolBook You can add a new property for an object by specifying a user property in the Property Browser gt To add a user property in the Property Browser 1 From the View menu point to Browser and then choose Property The Property Browser appears 2 Select an object on your page or choose the object whose properties you want to edit from the drop down list at the top of the Property Browser Click the User tab In the Name column double click Add New In the Add User Property dialog box type a property name and property value and then click OK ToolBook adds the property to the property list Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 101 Chapters 8 Working with Text Introduction You can add text to your book using field objects such as text and record fields Field objects on the pages and backgrounds of your book can be used to convey information and instructions You can also add inline graphics to field objects to create visual interest within text This chapter describes how to create format and use t
175. close the Media Paths dialog box and then click Close to close the Clip Manager Using OpenScript 190 To add a path to the HDMediaPath or CDMediaPath book property use the push command push c media onto HDMediaPath of this book or push lt BookPath gt onto HDMediaPath of this book To remove a path from the HDMediaPath or CDMediaPath book property use the clear command clear item 2 of HDMediaPath of this book Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Chapter16 16 Adding a Voice Recording Introduction You can create voice recordings in your book using a built in voice recorder in ToolBook This chapter describes how to use the Voice Recording feature to add voice recordings to pages in your book About the Voice Recording Feature ToolBook has a Voice Recording feature that enables you to record an audio file typically a voice recording for any page in your book using a microphone on your computer The recording plays as the page loads In addition to recording audio for a given page you can choose to use a recording from another page in your book However if you have an existing sound file a myfile mp3 or myfile wav etc we recommend using the Universal Media Player to play it You can control the playback of a voice recording by using the Play Pause and Stop buttons from the Catalog or the Play Media Stop Media and Pause Media commands within the Actions E
176. cord field If the source book contains more record fields than the destination book the extra record field text is not mapped to a destination record field Sorting Pages by Record Field Sorting is the process of putting pages in order according to the contents of one or more record fields Generally you sort pages to put them in the order in which you expect them to be used For example you might sort a library catalog alphabetically by author or title Use the Sort Pages command on the Tools menu to sort pages using the text of any record field according to the sort type you specify Because sorting is based on record fields only the set of pages that share the same background can be sorted however within that set you can specify a range of pages to sort If your application is designed so that a user can add entries you can provide sorting at Reader level using the Sort dialog box or you can design your own sorting option using the OpenScript sort command The sort command is much more flexible and can sort across books using any page based comparison For details about using the sort command refer to its entry in the OpenScript reference in Help gt To sort pages by record field Using the interface 1 From the Tools menu choose Sort Pages or press SHIFT F9 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 119 Working with Text The Sort dialog box appears Select the record field
177. cs You can paste or import graphics created in other programs into your ToolBook application When you paste a graphic on a page or import an image ToolBook adds the graphic file to the book s resource system and displays it on the page within an Image object Cut 4a Copy A Paste 42 Duplicate X Delete Rename y Property Browser Image Properties Figure 1 Right click menu for an imported graphic Using Graphics on the Internet When you publish your application to the Web ToolBook exports all graphic resources to Internet compatible file formats of GIF J PEG or PNG For graphics used in Image objects you can specify an image format or go with the default Default option to let the Publish code decide the best format Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 123 Using Graphics Adding Graphics to Your Book Graphics that you copied pasted or inserted into your book get added as resources Resources can be used multiple times in your ToolBook book Buttons and the Image object from the Catalog can display graphics which are stored as resources You can incorporate graphics into your ToolBook application in several ways You can e Use the Graphic command on the Insert menu to import a graphic e Use the Clipboard to copy and paste a graphic e Use the Properties dialog box to assign a graphic to a button as a resource Pasting G
178. d Background if you are working on the background Tip By default ToolBook displays the status bar only at Author level You can display the status bar at Reader level by pressing F12 At Reader level the status bar does not include the page selection indicator i Page selection indicator Navigation Caption area controls Page 1 a en T a se Mouse position Deployment mode Page number indicator indicator indicator Figure 2 The status bar at author level In Native mode if you create viewers which are additional windows each viewer can have its own status bar You can hide and show each status bar individually including the one for the main window 34 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working at Author Level gt To hide or show the status bar Using the interface e From the View menu choose Status Bar Alternatively press F12 Using OpenScript You can write and execute OpenScript code using the script editor or Command window For more information about using the OpenScript programming language refer to the Programming in OpenScript electronic book e To show or hide the status bar for the current window use the show or hide command To specify that a window should show or hide the status bar by default set its quthorStatusBar or readerStatusBar property Displays status bar in current window show statusBar Removes status bar from current window hide
179. d Removing Backdrops You can use a backdrop to make your backgrounds more interesting A backdrop is a bitmap that appears on a background You can specify how the bitmap will appear by choosing a style such as tiled stretched or centered for the backdrop Bitmaps used as backdrops are automatically added to your book as resources If you delete a backdrop from a page the resource used by the backdrop might remain in the book See Chapter 19 Using Resources for more information about resources To change a backdrop e Open the Properties for Background dialog box You can add and remove backdrops on the Draw tab of the Properties for Background dialog box To add a backdrop click Choose Backdrop select or import the bitmap you want to use and specify the style To remove a backdrop click Clear Backdrop You can create transparent areas in a bitmap by selecting the Use chromakey option and specifying a color value 58 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Setting the Page Size Setting the Page Size You can specify the size of both the book and the background using either the Properties dialog box or OpenScript A background s page size takes precedence over the book s page size The Page tab in the Properties for Book dialog box displays the default page size setting when you change the book size the change is reflected in any background s page size that hasn t been explicitly s
180. d behave For instance you can select a Smart Style specifically designed for the iPhone or a Smart Style designed for desktop viewing ToolBook uses this input to build a book based on your specifications ToolBook offers two wizards to help you build a new book e Book Wizard Builds a book that reflects your input about page styles and outline for page organization You can design a sophisticated outline of pages that can serve as the basis for any online course e Lesson Design Wizard Builds a book that reflects your input about instructional goals page styles and learning topics You can include prepared text and graphics files as well as preprogrammed question objects gt To start a new book using one of the Book Wizards 1 Do one of the following f ToolBook is not running start ToolBook The ToolBook Startup dialog box appears f ToolBook is already running from the File menu choose New The New Book dialog box appears 2 Click Using a Book Wizard select a wizard and then click Start Wizard 3 Follow the instructions in the Book Wizard Starting a New Blank Book If you choose not to use a template you can start with a blank book with no preprogrammed objects or graphic theme gt To start a new blank book 1 Do one of the following f ToolBook is not running start ToolBook The ToolBook Startup dialog box appears f ToolBook is already running from the File menu choose New The New Book dialog bo
181. d of any size and export an unlimited number of data records from a book When exporting to either fixed field or delimited field file formats ToolBook exports data from all record fields on all pages that share the background of the page displayed when you choose the Export command ToolBook exports data from each page in the layer order of the record fields containing the data starting with the record field on the lowest layer see Figure 3 In the text file ToolBook adds a carriage return linefeed after each ToolBook page If you choose to export data in delimited field format ToolBook also adds quotation marks around the contents exported from each record field Exported data in delimited field format 1788 980 98 7 05 55 Layer order of record fields on page Figure 3 Data exported from a page 258 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Importing and Exporting Text Note Windows uses the ANSI character set for displaying characters If you open an exported file with another application you may need to retype some special characters For details about special characters see Inserting special characters in Chapter 8 Working with text Exporting to Fixed Field Files Figure 4 shows data from record fields exported to a fixed field file The first data record in the file contains data from the record fields on page 1 the next data record contains data from the r
182. d review the instructions If they do match you have successfully completed the final example Troubleshooting Action Sequences If your action sequences arent producing the expected behavior review them for the following common errors e Typing a name in the Build Expression dialog box that doesn t exactly match the name of the object to which it refers For example did you type about varailbes instead of about variables A typo is often difficult to pinpoint as the source of a faulty action sequence You can avoid making typing mistakes by selecting object names and variables in the lists in the Build Expression dialog box e Selecting the wrong event in the Event list By default when you open the Actions Editor it opens to the most common event in its list of supported events usually On click To create an action sequence for any other event you must select that event in the Event list e Providing insufficient information Certain dialog boxes including those for Display Confirmation and Display Query have two tabs on which you need to select options Your action sequence will not run properly if you do not enter all necessary information Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 239 Chapter 19 Using Resources Introduction Resources are files that can be reused in your ToolBook application Some resources are used to create a cohesive interface for your application cu
183. d time spent working on the page You specify options for a log file in the Properties for Lesson dialog box which is available from the Object menu You can also have ToolBook report the score to a learning management system which can maintain the student s score in a database for administrators to examine later At its simplest scoring is a tally of the questions the student has answered correctly For more flexibility you can assign different point values to different questions You can also assign a weight to each correct answer by specifying a correctness factor within any question object You can subtract points from the student s score for incorrect answers and you can limit the number of times a user attempts to answer the question gt To enable scoring 1 Select the question object Click the Extended Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar In the Properties for Question dialog box click the Scoring tab Select the Score this question check box ao fF ON If necessary change the default values in the Lowest possible score and Highest possible score boxes 6 Under Possible answers select each response and verify that the weight assigned to the answer by the Properties dialog box is correct 7 Click OK You display a student s score in your application using the Show Score Score Page and Score Quiz buttons available from the Scoring and Tracking category in the Catalog These buttons are preprogrammed to calculate t
184. d to group and then click OK The group s bounding box expands to encompass the new object That object occupies the uppermost layer of the group 92 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Grouping Objects Note When dropping objects onto a group be certain that the mouse pointer is paused over an object in the group If you attempt to drop onto a space between objects in the group ToolBook will place the object on the page rather than in the group After a group is formed you can delete an object gt To delete an object from a group 1 Double click the object to select it 2 Press DELETE The bounding box resizes to reflect the newly defined group Note You cannot have fewer than two objects in a group If you try to delete one of the last two remaining objects ToolBook ignores the Delete command Setting Group Properties Each group has its own ID number name layer script or action sequence and drag and drop properties In addition each member of the group also keeps its own ID number You can change properties for the group or for individual members of the group Group properties are set in the same manner as other object properties For details see Chapter 7 Setting Object Properties Note Selecting the Visible option on the Draw tab of the Properties for Group dialog box does not affect the Visible option of individual objects in the group Properties for Group m N
185. defined behaviors that may meet your needs You can also use OpenScript to create and refine behavior for objects if you do not plan to Publish your book to DHTML Using Action Sequences in Place of Catalog Objects Many Catalog objects have predefined behaviors To add simple behavior to your application a Catalog object is often the best choice However for these more complex interactive behaviors you will find the Actions Editor is a more versatile tool e Creating looping and conditional behavior Using the Actions Editor you can execute a series of actions repetitively or in response to specific conditions e Handling certain events An action sequence can be programmed to handle many events that are not handled by Catalog objects with predefined behaviors For example when a mouse is positioned over an object or when the property of an object changes You can create an action sequence that handles a generic User event that you send Using Action Sequences in Place of OpenScript Although you can use OpenScript to accomplish the same behavior that you create using action sequences OpenScript programs do not function on the Web when you Publish your application to DHTML format By contrast most action sequences that are Published to DHTML will perform ina Web browser just as they do in the ToolBook authoring environment For details about the performance of specific actions in Web browsers see the electronic document named DHTML Expor
186. ditor in the Media category Using the Voice Recording Feature There are two ways to access the built in mini voice recorder that creates the voice recording Voice Recording Instructions You can create a recording by speaking into a microphone attached to this computer STEP Start a new recording m STEP2 End the recording SIEP 3 Review your recording Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 191 Adding a Voice Recording From the Voice Recording tab on the Properties for Page dialog box Properties for Page General SmartStyle Behavior Voice Recording Notes V Enable voice recording playback for this page Recording Options Use a microphone to create a Voice Recording o New __ EnbeAl Pla Disable All n eae pee View Summary Voice recordings from other pages e From the Voice Recording option on the Insert Menu If a voice recording is already associated to a given page a checkmark will appear next to the Voice Recording option on the Insert Menu Creating a Voice Recording You can record audio for a given page from its page properties or by directly opening the Voice Recording dialog box from the Insert menu Once you have created the voice recording you can play it back to check how it sounds before you associate it to the page gt To record audio from the Properties for Page 1 gt N ONOA
187. dler Explicit Reference A reference to an object that explicitly identifies its parent object Explicit references are used to refer to objects that are not on the current page For example the following statement explicitly references the button Next get caption of button Next of background lessons of book Tutorial See also parent object Compare implicit reference Export To transfer data from one file format to another you can export text to ASCII format See also import Expression A combination of values that yields a result such as the name of a field variable property or an expression with operators and operands For example 7 3 is an expression yielding the result 10 See also field operand operator properties Compare container Extended Character A non English character or symbol in the ANSI character set Extended characters have ANSI values of 128 to 255 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 315 Glossary Extended Properties Properties that specify the extended capabilities of such objects as question objects and action triggers Compare properties External Media Any media file or device referred to but not stored within an application such as a videodisc Feedback A feature of online learning used to provide responses or replies to users according to how they answer a question Field An object that holds text ToolBook uses text fields and record fields
188. e Step 1 Step 2 i AE oa Vy T a Step 3 amp Step 4 A A Click Submit to J o 1 2 Click Suhmi to check your answer then click Next to continue B Figure 1 Examples of question objects Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 151 Creating a Quiz using Question Objects Working with Question Objects You can browse through the descriptions of questions in the Catalog and then select a specific type of question to use gt To add a question object to a page 1 If the Catalog is not already open from the View menu choose Catalog 2 Select the Questions category 3 Drag the question object you want from the object pane and then drop it onto your page Setting the Properties of a Question Object After you add a question object to a page you can specify its appearance and behavior in the Properties for Question dialog box Properties for Multiple Choice Question General Answers Scoring Immediate Feedback Delayed Feedback Question name Mutiple Choice r Limits on Interaction Limit time Maximum time secs I Limit tries Maximum tries A try is counted every time delayed feedback or a score is provided This option is ignored if Cannot change responses is checked Automatically reset question Never Question Text Figure 2 The Properties for Question dialog box The Proper
189. e main window However you can reshape the tool palette and move it to a new location to suit your work style Select Magnify Push Button Label Button Radio Button Checkbox Field Recordfield Borderless Field Single Select Listbox Combobox Line Are Angled Line Curve Rectangle Rounded Rectangle Ellipse Polygon Irregular Polygon Pie Stage Image Figure 2 ToolBook tool palette Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 75 Working with Objects gt To draw an object 1 Choose a tool from the tool palette by clicking the tool s button 2 Point where you want to start the new object 3 Hold down the left mouse button while you drag and then release when the object is the size you want Tip To automatically select the object you ve just drawn press the SPACEBAR ToolBook selects the object and displays the select tool You use a slightly different method to draw polygons angled lines irregular polygons and curves gt To draw regular polygons 1 Choose the polygon tool a from the tool palette and from the View menu point to Palettes and then choose Polygon 2 From the polygon palette choose one of the polygon shapes or type a number in the box to specify the number of sides for the polygon 3 Hold down the left mouse button where you want the center of the polygon and then drag from the center and release when the shape is the size you want gt To draw angled li
190. e you add your own custom content You can fully customize templates by adding or deleting pages changing page order or replacing graphics Using templates can help you save time and provide a consistent look and feature set for each new application You can choose a template from the New Book dialog box choose New from the File menu or from the ToolBook Startup dialog box that appears when you open ToolBook ToolBook provides a variety of templates that you can select in these dialog boxes and you can create your own custom templates that can appear here as well When you choose to open a template ToolBook opens a copy of the template that you name and save Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 49 Creating Books and Pages Creating and Saving Templates In addition to using the variety of templates that ToolBook provides you can create your own custom templates by saving any book as a template Books that you create from scratch books that you create using one of the ToolBook templates and books that you create using one of the Book Wizards can all be saved as templates When you save a book as a template you ll want to save it in the Template directory of the ToolBook program directory That way when you start ToolBook or choose New from the File menu the custom template you ve created will appear within the list of Templates shown in the Startup dialog box and the New Book dialog box
191. e DPI settings of the computer you publish on b Inthe Page width field specify the page width by typing it or using the scrolling arrows to select the width Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 267 Importing and Exporting Data 10 11 12 c Inthe Page height field specify the page height by typing it or using the scrolling arrows to select the height Select the Use slideshow aspect ratio checkbox if you want to preserve the original PowerPoint slideshow aspect ratio which determines the space the slide occupies Select the Add navigation panel checkbox if you want a navigation panel to appear in the background of the published book Select the Copy linked audio files to same folder as book checkbox if you want all linked audio files in PowerPoint to be copied to the target directory i e the location you have specified for publishing your ToolBook book Select the Open in ToolBook when finished checkbox if you want the new file to be opened automatically in ToolBook upon completion of the publishing process Click the Publish button to open a Save as ToolBook file dialog box Select one of the following file formats to save to in the Save as dialog box m ToolBook files saves as a standard ToolBook book with the extension tbk ToolBook XML files saves as a compressed ToolBook XML file with the extension tbkx Specify a name and location for the ne
192. e appearance and behavior of controls in the software being simulated Simulations can be delivered in three different modes practice demonstration and assessment A practice simulation is interactive and allows people to experiment with buttons menus text entry fields or other objects in a simulated user interface A demonstration shows the learner how to complete an online task and requires no input or interaction An assessment is a test that gives the learner a single chance to complete each step in a simulated task You can develop a simulation once and show it in any of these three simulation modes ToolBook provides a flexible environment for creating software simulations An unlimited number of steps may be included in a simulation and a simulation can span multiple pages You can define where and when the instructional text and feedback will appear In addition to the standard functionality provided by the Simulation Editor you can also integrate any type of behavior that can be programmed in the Actions Editor Simulations that you build in ToolBook can be Published as DHTML applications for Web delivery and can be delivered as native ToolBook applications The results from a learner s interaction with a simulation can be tracked ina learning management system that conforms to SCORM or AICC standards Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 275 Building Software Simulations Planning a So
193. e are overlapping Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 167 Hiding Showing and Animating Objects 4 Select one of the action triggers and then click the Extended Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar 5 Inthe Properties for Action Trigger dialog box under Objects to trigger click Add In the Add an Object dialog box do the following Inthe Select object list select the ellipse Under Perform what action choose Hide Click OK 6 In the Properties for Action Trigger dialog box under Trigger on what event do the following Select the When clicked check box and clear the When entering page check box Select the Button is visible at reader check box and clear the Loop continuously check box Click OK 7 Select the second action trigger and then click the Extended Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar 8 Inthe Properties for Action Trigger dialog box under Objects to trigger click Add In the Add an Object dialog box do the following Inthe Select object list select the ellipse Under Perform what action choose Show Click OK 9 Inthe Properties for Action Trigger dialog box under Trigger on what event do the following Select the When clicked check box and clear the When entering page check box Select the Button is visible at reader check box and clear the Loop continuously check box Click OK 10 Switch to Read
194. e grid spacing to any width you want gt Tochange grid settings 1 From the View menu choose Grid 2 Inthe Grid dialog box do one or more of the following To show or hide the grid select or clear the Show grid check box To change the default space between grid dots enter an increment in the Page units Pixels or Inches Centimeters box To specify whether objects align with or move independently of the grid select or clear the Snap to grid check box To specify the units of measure select Metric or English 3 Click OK Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 43 Learning the ToolBook Interface Working with Right Click Menus If you pause the pointer over an object on the page and click the right mouse button right click ToolBook displays the object s right click menu The right click menu provides an easy way to set the object s properties and provides information about the object s name and related objects By default the right click menu does not display the following advanced options Action methods Debugger and Property Browser However these can be displayed by selecting the Show advanced items in right click menus option in the ToolBook Options dialog box accessed by selecting Options on the View menu Each object s right click menu is slightly different but all display the type of information illustrated below Button Action
195. e its fill color button graphic and caption Many of the objects in the Catalog have additional properties that set more sophisticated Capabilities These properties are called extended properties A Universal Media player for example has extended properties that control the player s interactive functionality such as which media file will play and how ToolBook will play the file at Reader level iu Extended Properties Dialog Box 5 Name Universal Media Player Properties for Universal Media Player ees Draw Bounds Font Behavior Web General Advanced Time Markers Line style Player Name Universal Media Player Drawing options __ Cof__ Media source BI Media AVI Clock avi g IV Draw transparent aaa re IT Show speaker icon only cars z Display video region End 2 z 4 IV Display media controls Curent state _ r Pa Options Visible M Auto start i J Hide at reader level Figure 1 The Properties and Extended Properties dialog boxes for a Universal Media Player Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 95 Setting Object Properties Using the Properties Dialog Box The Properties dialog box is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to view and edit an object s properties It features a toolbar that provides easy access to other dialog boxes where you can modify the o
196. e more than one correct trigger event for a step Tip If you include a trigger event that ends a step by selecting an item from a list box or combo box the trigger event will determine if the proper object was selected To find out if the correct item in the list was selected by the learner add an evaluation object to the simulation step to identify the correct item in the list The evaluation object determines if the correct or incorrect item is selected from a list box or combo box During a simulation when a learner activates the correct trigger event for a step then the next step in the simulation appears by default If the user activates an incorrect trigger event feedback text may display and the user is allowed to make another attempt to choose the correct trigger in practice mode as long as the maximum number of tries to complete the step has not been reached If no trigger event is specified for a step the Continue button will be automatically enabled to allow the learner to move to the next step in the simulation Using Evaluation Objects An object that can have a changed state is known as an evaluation object in the Simulation Editor Evaluation objects include check boxes editable text fields combo boxes radio button groups and list boxes If an evaluation object is part of a step in a simulation the change made to the object will be evaluated after the user makes an attempt to complete the step The learner has to make the ch
197. e multimedia text graphics video and sound information Documents called Web pages that are stored on computers around the world make up the content of the World Wide Web WWW See World Wide Web Zoom To magnify the view of a page using the magnify tool from the tool palette 328 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited
198. e object on the same page bypassing the Clipboard Most objects can be duplicated For example you can duplicate an entire text field or record field The exception is text You cannot duplicate selected text within a text or record field You can cut or copy and paste objects as described in the following table Objects that can be cut copied and pasted This object Can be pasted Object On a page or background Page with background After the current page Page without background After the current page Text In a text field or record field Text in Rich Text Format In a text field or record field gt To cut or copy an object 1 Select the object you want to cut or copy 2 From the Edit menu choose Cut or Copy To remove the object from its current position choose Cut To keep the object in its original position and place a copy elsewhere choose Copy ToolBook places the cut or copied object on the Clipboard Tip With an object selected you can also use the standard Windows shortcut keys CTRL X CTRL C and CTRL V to cut copy and paste After you cut or copy an object you can paste it on the same page or anywhere else in the current book or in another book gt To paste an object 1 Goto the location where you want to paste the object 2 From the Edit menu choose Paste ToolBook pastes the object on the current page in the same position the object held on the original page If you ch
199. e object will be simultaneously selected on the page gt To open the Book Explorer e From the View menu select Book Explorer For more information about changing the properties of a simulation see Working in the Simulation Editor earlier in this chapter Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 291 ee ee Distributing Applications on the Internet Introduction ToolBook makes it easy to distribute your online learning applications over the Internet by allowing you to Publish your book as a series of Web pages that utilize DHTML technology This chapter discusses the this distribution method for delivering your course on the Internet and outlines the steps you can take to prepare your application for use with a learning management system Understanding DHTML HTML is a markup language that allows you to format documents for the Web An HTML document combines your content with HTML markup codes called tags that specify how your content will be formatted When you view an HTML document in a browser you do not see the tags you see only the formatting that the tags represent Dynamic HTML DHTML extends HTML by adding the ability to create interactive features such as buttons that respond to a click scrolling text animations and more The preprogrammed objects in the Catalog have these features built in You can use the Publish to Web feature to convert your application to Web pag
200. e option Specify the feedback that occurs at the time a user responds to a question 7 Click the Delayed Feedback tab and then specify the feedback that occurs at a later delayed time 8 Click OK Question Objects in Action The Catalog contains a rich variety of question objects that help you evaluate interactive learning in your application Several of these are introduced on the pages that follow Arrange the following pieces to form a solid square EL Figure 3 A question created using an arrange objects object Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 153 Creating a Quiz using Question Objects An arrange objects object allows you to specify the proper positions of objects on a page and test the student s knowledge of the positions When the book runs the objects are scrambled on the page and the student attempts to drag them back into the arrangement you defined A student s score is based on the number of objects that are positioned correctly Oy Ss YP Lense ikon Foe cr YP Control Dial DN Ag Flash Mount Ag Shutter Button Figure 4 A question created using a drag objects question A drag objects question allows you to define objects as potential answers and test the student s ability to identify the correct answer The student chooses an answer by dragging objects to one of the potential answers that you have defined In t
201. e that uses a new background display the page after which you want to add the new page and then send the newBackground message send newBackground ToolBook inserts the new page after the current page the page displayed in the ToolBook main window and gives it the next sequential page number Importing Pages from Another Book You can import pages from another book called the source book into the current book called the target book Importing pages into a target book does not affect the source book You can import all of the pages from a source book or only specific pages ToolBook attempts to merge text information into the correct location and adds the resources on the imported pages to the resources of the target book More information about resources is available in Chapter 19 Using Resources Tip Importing pages is especially useful when you want to include a range of pages from another book If you want to add a single page from another book you can use a simple copy and paste operation gt To import pages Using the interface 1 Open the target book and then display the page after which you want to import the source book s pages 2 From the Insert menu choose Pages ToolBook displays the Import dialog box Verify the Import type list displays ToolBook files bk Select the source book or type in the source book s name including its path if the book isin another directory 5 To specify a range of pages
202. e to modify objects Changing the Line Style of an Imported Graphic After you have imported a graphic it is created in ToolBook as a resource contained within an Image object You can apply a border line style to its border in the Properties dialog box gt To change the border line style of an Image object Using the interface 1 Select the Image object and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar 2 Inthe Properties dialog box click the Draw tab 3 Inthe Border Line Style list select the desired style 4 Optional Close the Properties dialog box Converting Picture or Paint Objects to Image Objects In some cases you might want to convert a picture or paint object to an Image object Tip This conversion cannot be reversed Make a backup copy of the picture or paint object before you convert it to an Image object gt Toconvert a picture or paint object to an Image object Using the interface 1 Select the picture or paint object and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 125 Using Graphics 2 Inthe Properties dialog box click the Draw tab and then click Convert to Image Object ToolBook displays a warning that the conversion you are about to perform cannot be undone Click OK to convert the object or click Cancel to cancel the conversion Optional Close the Properties dialog box 126 Copy
203. e way text wraps within a field using the options in the Field type list in the Properties dialog box Field type options Option OpenScript Value Result when applied Wordwrap wordWrap Text wraps to the next line No wordwrap noWrap Text does not wrap to the next line text longer than the width of the field truncates at the field s border Pressing the ENTER key however creates a carriage return linefeed CRLF that is it starts a new line Single line singleLineWrap Limits text to a single line text won t wrap and a CRLF isn t recognized Single select singleSelect Limits user to selecting only one list box item at a time from the text options in a list box Multi select multiSelect Allows user to select multiple list box items in a list box Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 107 Working with Text Modifying the Behavior of a Field You can set the properties of a field that define its behavior at Reader level For example a field can be either editable or activated When a field is editable the field allows typing a user can enter text in the field at Reader level When a field is activated the field locks the text and activates mouse events a user cannot edit the text Instead the field responds to a mouse click the same way a button would It performs a defined action For example if a user clicks a hotword containing a defined
204. eaaeeseeeesaeeseaaeeseneesnaeee 146 Determining List Box or Combo Box Selections Using an Action Sequence 008 147 Determining List Box Selection Using OpenScript eccceeeeeceee cesses ceeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeneeeeeeeeees 148 Determining Combo Box Selection Using OpenS cript c cccceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 149 Creating a QUIZ USING QUESTION ODjeCHS 2 1eccccccccscceessenneneeeessssensssennenenenens 151 MOGUCOM weeeeererere ermee a rere rr ceetrt reer irre creer rer rier meer eter 151 ADOUL QUESTION OD OCIS sesiis iaeano aeda catsageeteteaad dyads seeaeelantedysecensaes 151 Working with Question Objects rsispas eeina aaiae adnaga iaaii iak 152 Setting the Properties of a Question Object 0 00 cece eceeeeceeeceeeee cee eeeaaeeceeeeeseaeeesaaeeseeeeseaees 152 Question Objects iM ACtON s i inei ainaani aaia asa a Naaa a Ka Eaa 153 SCOMMG QUeESt ON Saoed a aa utes E a E A e Rea NSE 156 Assigning Weight to an AnSWer wacecsctt css aveenstitn cies detee i en EEE EAE E EERE 157 Specifying FECADACK iinissrurid usaia eed aa a a E ae 157 Types of Feedback sseccoticonererossiian i E E E E EEEE 158 Choosing Immediate or Delayed Feedback cccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeseaees 159 Specifying Feedback for a QUESTION Objet ec ceeecceeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeceeeseaeeesaeeeeaaeenenees 159 Quiz SUMMA rae ee el ecient eect ana 161 Adding a Certificate to a BOOK sicinacisssicasi
205. eate self contained objects that can be copied into applications without having to change the scripts See also handler Object All of the visual elements of your pages including buttons fields graphics viewers pages and backgrounds Any object can have a script or action sequence that defines its behavior and all objects have properties Object Hierarchy The order in which messages are passed from object to object For example a message sent to a graphic object that the graphic object s script does not handle is passed to the page then to the background then to the book then to any system book then to ToolBook See also message Object Linking and Embedding OLE A Windows technology that enables you to create an object in one application and then incorporate it into another application An object that is used this way is called an OLE object See also client application OLE container object server application Object Oriented Programming A programming method in which programs are constructed out of self contained collections of data and routines referred to as objects Offscreen Image An image that ToolBook first draws in memory and then displays on the screen Compare draw direct OLE Container Object An object that contains a reference to a linked object or a copy of an embedded object See also client application object linking and embedding server application OpenScript The ToolBook object oriented programming language
206. eceaeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeeeseaaeeeeneeseaees 285 Developing Stepson nueiaiaei ia aiaa aaa aa aa ai a aata aaaeaii Aet 286 Setting Trigger Events cccccceeescececeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeseeaeeseaeeeeaaeseeaaesgeeeeseaeeseaaeseeaeeseaneesaaes 288 Using Evaluation ODjeCts c ccccceeccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeseaeeseeeeesaeeesaaeeseeeeseeessaeeseeeseneeess 288 Evaluating Text ENY essa ceicescs cep eiteee cpt iy ce Enne Eaa AANEEN EEN ANEK ioe E deny EKAS E ENA EAAS 289 Displaying FEC ODAC kesra ES 289 SCOMMNG ASU UATI OM ced ca edaedtecapedeeesiareece cetauncedastdecaspececensget aesndd vee sense EEEa NE N 290 Programming Behavior for Simulation Events ccccecsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeneeeeeeeeees 290 Locating Objects on a Simulation Page serisinin iinan iiaii ini i aiaa 291 Distributing Applications on the INtCriNet 1 eeecceeessseeeesennneeeeeesssenenneneees 293 alitele ble 0 q eereeeernerrrecee merece A treet rer irre errr er ererr reer r ererr rrr 293 Understanding DTM gs cccctecsstececaasatcnchd astexctesalicin esaadaued calduntdcadetatevebaun bovadeaueessiuanpnseveiioess vanes 293 Tips for Optimizing a Book Designed for DHT ML ecccececeeeeseceeeeeceeeeeeaaeseeeeeseeeeseaeeseaeeseaes 294 Publishing Your Book as Web Pages cs ccccesscceceeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeneeceeeeaeeeeeeneeaeenteeaeeesnneaeeneneaaes 295 Using ToolBook Courses with a Learning Management System cccceeeeces
207. ecord fields on page 2 and so on In Figure 4 you ll notice that the first exported field in the first data record is truncated When you export to fixed field files you must specify the number of characters in each field If a field is larger than the specified size text is truncated on the right side Product Sundial stand Net Sales 44K Cost of Goods Gross Profit Sundial sta 14K 2K 12K Product Sundial Sundial 27 OK 36K 234K Net Sales 276K Cost of Goods Gross Profit Figure 4 Exporting data to a fixed field file gt To export data to a fixed field text file Using the interface 1 Open the book from which you want to export data 2 If the book uses more than one background go to a page with the record fields containing the data you want to export 3 From the Tools menu point to Export and then choose Record Fields The Export dialog box appears 4 Inthe Export dialog box specify a path under Directories and type a file name in the File name box If you don t type a file extension ToolBook adds the txt extension Click Format to display the Text Format dialog box Choose Text Fixed fields from the File format options In the Field lengths box type the number of characters in each data field separated by commas Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 259 Importing and Exporting Data For example type 3 5 8 12 if you want the data records
208. ect event The On select event is generated when a user selects a different item from the list Figure 4 shows the Action Editor with an example of an action sequence that carries out specific actions based on a user s list box selection The selecteditemText property of list boxes and combo boxes allows you to determine the text of a selected item You can set this property to select the item in a list box which matches the text you specify For a combo box assigning text to the selecteditemText property causes this text to display in the combo box Actions Editor ComboBox Cities File Edit View Insert Action Tools Help 2 O xK amp t x General On select Parameters selectedltemT ext Condition Expression Object D gt If selecteditemT ext Portland Prompts Display alert Yes we have a branch office in that city Action EN Display Alert J gt Else Display Confirmation Display alert w e do not have a branch office there 2 Endi Navigation Scoring and Tracking Media Control Figure 4 Using an action sequence to determine the user selection Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 147 Working with List Boxes and Combo Boxes Determining List Box Selection Using OpenScript The selectedTextlines property of the field contains the number of the selected text line so you can determine the text that has been highlighted in the list box Use the follo
209. ed in the Enter a price field as parameters The shared action sequence uses these parameters to calculate and return a value to the action sequence that called it The value returned by the shared action sequence is stored in a local variable named Tax Finally ToolBook displays the value of the local variable the results of the calculation to the user Actions Editor Field Cities File Edit View Help X agem xE T 2 les G On select Parameters selectedltemT ext If selected temT ext Seattle OX Set Variable a Execute Shared Actions CalculateT ax store return value in tax 4 Execute Shared Actions D gt Else if selectedltemT ext Atlanta Yv Execute Shared Actions CalculateT ax discard return value Insert Action Tools eee gt Ele sae zo a Execute Shared Actions CalculateT ax discard return value End i Scoring and Tracking Media Control Display alert The sales tax due on the amount you entered amp tax Actions Editor Shared Actions CalculateTax File Edit Insert Action Tools Help eala MXE 2 x Shared actions CalculateT ax Parameters Price Rate Returns returnValue General Oe Set Variable A JE Set Product to round Price Rate Execute Shared Actions v JE Set retumValue to Product 100 Object J Prompts lt Navigation 1 Scoring and Tracking Media Control Figure 4
210. edia Path dialog box simply tells ToolBook where to look for the file This dialog is intended for advanced developers The first option will ensure the media file will be available with your course content On the Properties for Universal Media Player General tab select the Auto Start checkbox Select the Hide at Reader level checkbox Click OK Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 195 Using the Actions Editor Introduction The Actions Editor is a visual programming tool in ToolBook It features familiar interface elements such as menus and a toolbar that you can use to add sophisticated interactive behavior to objects in your ToolBook applications The action sequences that you create in the Actions Editor will convert to DHTML format when you Publish to Web This chapter describes how to use the Actions Editor to add interactive behavior to your applications Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 197 Using the Actions Editor About Action Sequences Action sequences add behavior to your ToolBook application Every action sequence consists of one or more behaviors that ToolBook carries out in the order you specify You can create action sequences that prompt users for input change an object s properties play media and much more You can also repeat actions or specify the conditions under which actions are executed by adding a loop or
211. ee Chapter 17 Using the Actions Editor and Chapter 18 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples Using OpenScript to Hide and Show Objects Using the Command window or the script editor you can write scripts to show and hide objects For more information about using the OpenScript programming language refer to the Programming in OpenScript electronic book e You can show and hide a series of objects in a stack each of which is a slight variation of the same image to handle buttonClick step ctr from 1 to 6 if ctr lt 6 then show ellips ellipse amp ctr 1 end if hid llips ellipse amp ctr pause 20 end step show ellipse ellipsel end Animating ToolBook Objects You can animate any object with the exception of pages backgrounds and books Animation can add visual impact to your learning application and illustrate how things move or change over time You can create two types of animations with the ToolBook Animation Editor e Path based animation This type of animation allows you to define the path an object will follow as it moves in an animation You can use a path animation to simulate or show movement and action such as a banner that flies across the page e Cel based animation This type of animation allows you to define individual views of an object called cels that are shown in rapid succession You can use cel based animation to simulate motion such as a globe that spins
212. ee the electronic book Advanced Features After you have removed all references to a resource you can remove the resource from a book gt To remove a resource from a book 1 From the Object menu choose Resources The Resource Manager dialog box appears 2 Inthe Available resources list select the type of resource you want to remove 3 Inthe graphical list select the resource you want to remove 4 Click Remove and then close the Resource Manager dialog box Using OpenScript e Use the remove resource command to remove a resource from a book remove resource cursor ID 100 remove resource palette gray tones of book blk wht tbk The resource no longer appears in the Resource Manager dialog box for that book e Use the resourceUsecBy function to locate all objects using a particular resource For example request resourceUsedBy bitmap Next this book Note If you delete an object that has a resource assigned as a property for example a button with a graphic resource assigned to a particular state you cannot immediately remove the resource from the Resource Manager dialog box Because ToolBook saves a copy of the deleted object in memory to allow you to undo your action you must first perform another action such as clicking on another object before you can delete the resource from the Resource Manager dialog box Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 251 Chapter20
213. eedback field Display in a popup window Continue button Use the following button to continue Button Continue J The continue button moves to the next step when the maximum number of tries have been reached or when the simulation is in Figure 3 Options for displaying instructions and feedback text Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 281 Building Software Simulations Objects in a simulation may include e Text fields for instructions and feedback e A navigation button for moving to the next simulation step known as a continue button e Catalog objects that provide interaction such as buttons e Objects that add to the design of the page such as a title or graphic logo Catalog objects that can have a changed state such as check boxes and text entry fields are known as evaluation objects in the Simulation Editor An interaction that a learner makes with an evaluation object can be analyzed at the end of a simulation step For further information see Using evaluation objects later in this chapter After you assemble the necessary objects for the first step in a simulation on a page you can begin to develop the behavior for the simulation in the Simulation Editor Developing steps in a simulation is described later in this chapter in the section titled Working in the Simulation Editor Preparing Screen Images Before capturing screen images for a simulation
214. eeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeees 296 Adding Score Tracking to a TOOIBOOK COUuIrSe c ccscceeececeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeesnaeeeeaeeseeeeeeaas 297 Managing ToolBook Courses with TotalLMS sssini 297 Preparing Native ToolBook Applications for Rel ase ss1cccceeseerseesenens 299 INTFOCUCTION ATARE E N Nac T connie eines nace OG needs tees Gaited T 299 Organizing and Checking Your AppliCation ccccccceeeeeceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeseeeseaes 299 Creating a Central Book Directory Structure cecccccececeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeseeeeeeeees 300 CHECKING Spelling sssaaa nnna eves say Ee aN detbw age aeaa aE EENE EENAA 300 Checking for Unused RESOUICES cceccceeececeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeneeseaeeesaeseenaeesnees 301 Checking for Unused Extensions isuriaren anona anei naeia aiiai 301 CGompressing your BOOK ejects ccwwcees snvcysetaandanat ana au arean aE E EENEN ANN aiaa 302 Resting your BOOK assanis aaan E ldiaaebededsdadiemawedlcuad 302 Preparing your Application based on a Distribution Method ssssssssesssssssnnnnensssennnnnnsnserrnnnnn 302 Preparing Files Tor the IMtermet oisuosniisA 303 Preparing Files for a Local Area Network ssssisossninisssio a 303 Preparing Files for CD ROMi wssccess cccetetcccenssscndeeneedteceaasecunsaresandcuendewyattanec tense dea ueee naieexetened 303 Using the Auto Packager sieisen sencdcesseot cunnea cde siectacessiedecas lence cnsareevetvleeldcn
215. eeeseaeeesaeeeeeesenneess 51 Starting a New Blank BOOK 0 cccsccccccssececeesneeeeeeaeeeeecaeeeesceaeeeeessaeeeesesaeeeesesaeeeseeaaeeeeseaaes 51 Creating Backup Copies ccccccccceceeeceeceeeeeeeceeeeecaeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeseaaeseneeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeseees 52 Creating Pages and Backgrounds ccsccceceeeteceeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeecaaeeeeaeeseeeeesaaeeesaaeeseeeessaeeeeeeeeenees 53 Adding Pages and Backgrounds to a BOOK ccceeeeseeceeeenneeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 53 Importing Pages from Another BOok ccccceeeeeeeeeeeneee erence eeeaeeeeesaeeeeeeeaeeeeesiaeeeeeenaeeeene 54 Organizing Pages and BackgroOund6s ccccecceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeceaeeeseaaeeeceeeseeeescaeessaaeeseeeeeeaees 55 Wsing the IBOOK Explore essensu N tee vuaeveerasbevemnsnceaed eases 55 Renumbering Pages Ma BOOK weve sicceves doeevees seen scasideevenss cet cess done vennccenevadentccasdoeevensaueeeessageevieand 56 Removing Pages and Backgrounds cccceecccceeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeessaaeenseeeaeenseeeaeeneees 5 Working with BACK QrOUNOS ennenen N N 58 Applying Color and a Pattern to a Background cccccececeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceeeesaeeeeneeessaees 58 Adding and Removing Backdrops sre nenraai a 58 DENG The PAGE Si ZC irs sesesseovedescacuiedvesaaecdectengeencceduae cna a a duncauvat eva jaleezesapedveresuet eigveeerees 59 Scaling the Window Size to the Page SiZe ececce
216. eeneeseaeeesaaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeessaeeseneeseaees 172 Playing an Animation at Reader Level ceeceeecneeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeseenaeeeeneaaes 173 Using an Action Trigger to Play an Animation ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseeaeeeeeeaaes 173 Using the Actions Editor to Play an Animation seseesesssseesssirsssrrssrirrnsrrssrirnssrinnnsrennnnnt 174 Using OpenScript to Play an Animation 0 ccccccceececeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeesenaeeneeeeee 174 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited v Table of Contents Modifying an Animation in the Animation Editor eccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeseaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeneaa 175 selecting an Animato Masar ani wiih edie aati ee ede a de ees 175 Setting Animation Options iii cic dvetatiite atid Ghee Ain aay Gin ee nie eee ene tacos 176 Adding Audio and Video Fil S ccccccccccnccscncnnnnnnncnnnnnsnsnnnnsssnasnansssssnenaneseees 177 MMO CUGTOMN syisa EEA AOIS EE AEE 177 About Digtal Modia ossis E E ASES 177 Ghoosing a Media Player isasi napne suen eea Eae aea aE a RAAE A EEVEE EAEE 177 Using the Universal Media Player iciciceciccitceccscscecccuntecevedheiteesvsnnt a EESE 178 Choosing a Media File asrandi an ana aE iene santana KEENAN EAN EAEE 179 Using Times Mako oposi oa E E AE E S 179 Creating Actions for Time Market ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeceeeeeesaaeeee
217. ement System You can deliver courses created in ToolBook over the Internet and use any learning management system that conforms to SCORM or AICC standards to record the score from student responses to questions By adding evaluation buttons from the Catalog to your book you allow results to be sent to a database that is controlled by the learning management system 296 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Using ToolBook Courses with a Learning Management System Adding Score Tracking to a ToolIBook Course When you prepare your book for delivery by using the Publish to Web command add SCORM or AICC support by selecting the appropriate options when Publishing to Web This allows scoring information such as quiz results to be tracked and stored in a database By including one or more buttons from the Scoring and Tracking category of the Catalog in your course individual test scores can be sent to the learning management system in use After a student opens a course through the learning management system and answers the questions in the course the final score is available through a progress report generated by the learning management system A ToolBook course can be stopped before completion and resumed at a later time without disrupting the overall score You need to include a Suspend Lesson button from the Scoring and Tracking category of the Catalog in your course to allow a student to save the cu
218. en pressing TAB If your pages are crowded consider simplifying them and adding new ones You may also exclude an object from the tab order e To exclude a button from the tab order clear the Include button in tab order option on the Behavior tab of the Properties for Button dialog box e To exclude a field or record field from the tab order select the Lock the text and activate mouse events if the field is enabled option on the Behavior tab of the Properties dialog box 90 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Grouping Objects Grouping Objects You can create a group of objects that you work with as a single unit This allows you to move and format the objects together For example you can combine different types of objects such as a polygon and field into a group and then set properties for the group When you create a group ToolBook places it on the lowest layer occupied by an object in the group For example if you draw three objects on layers 1 2 and 3 and then group them the group is on layer 1 The next object you add will be on layer 2 gt Tocreate a group e SHIFT click to select each object you want in the group and then simultaneously press CTRL SHIFT G or choose Group from the Object menu After you group the objects one set of handles surrounds the group Two objects not grouped Two objects grouped Editing Groups You can work with a group as a whole
219. ensions that are not used in your book before you package the book for distribution gt To remove unused extensions from a book 1 From the File menu choose Extensions The Extensions dialog box appears In the Added Extensions list select the unused extension Confirm that the extension is unused by looking at the number next to References If the number is 0 zero the extension is not used in the book lt lt Click the Remove button lt to remove the unused extension from the Added Extensions list Repeat steps 2 3 and 4 until you have removed all unused extensions Click OK If you are prompted to add a selected extension to the Added Extensions list click NO to avoid adding any additional extensions to your book Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 301 Preparing Native ToolBook Applications for Release Compressing your Book While you are developing an application the file size grows as you make changes and add content to your book You can reduce the size of your file by saving it under a new file name To ensure that ToolBook compresses your book to its most efficient size save it under a new file name and then save it again under its original name We recommend that you save your file under a new name periodically while you are developing your application One easy way to do this is to save a backup copy of your book under a slightly different file name
220. ent COMVENTONS 22s diced sicesess cendeseasteesnevasiesedeecadectetared ieenleyerd deve cne E EN a 19 BASIC CONCCDIS PP AA E E E 21 INTFOGUCTION orri E E T E E N 21 About the ToolBook Product iszcc0 cdeciviscscns deetaviaeee ie cere ineanits deeb E E E 21 About TOOIBOOK vis cccccs scctsace accecis idea R a TE settee aviaete nd daar econ tenets ees 22 Exploring the Kinds of Applications You Can Create with TOOIBOOK ccccceeseeeeseteees 23 Planning your projet bessern E EEE EE E EEE EE EE 23 Creating an Organized Directory Structure cccccccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeseeeeess 24 Deciding How You Will Deliver Your COUurS cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeeaeeseneeeseaeeesuaeeseneeeeaes 24 Prepare Your Project for Release Based on a Method of Distribution ceeeeeeeeeee 25 Building an AppliCation scsiccteccictie conse o tees cev debe ds ui hieceevintieev ERE EEEE E 25 Author Level and Reader Level ccceecccceeeeccceeenseceeeeeeeeeeeeneceeeeaeceeeenaeeeeeeneaaeeeeneeaeenennnaes 26 B k Sand Pagasi y tt asatecuet cheeks EEEE EEE 27 Objects and Properties iaviese scares hcersesaaeaeds eia a aE A A aa e E dave a AEE AREENA 27 Using te ACHONS EOL morni oiire EE T AEE AE ean ss 28 Using OPEN SCHL nasman e aa unae a Aae S ENE NEENA E EAA NEEE EELEE 28 Extending ToolBook using Windows Technologies sssseesssssssrnesssrnssesnnesssnnennnnnesnnnnsnnnnena 29 Extending OpenScri
221. equence for each event supported by an object For example a button might have one action sequence to handle a click and a different action sequence to handle a right click You specify the event for which you want to create an action sequence by selecting it from the Event list in the Actions Editor Actions Editor Button Continue File Edit View Insert Action Tools Help of BOM x et L lx l isev shiftDown ctriDown On load page 2 On mouse over o vl Y Figure 4 Opening the event list gt To display the Event list for an object 1 Select an object in the main ToolBook window 2 Click the Actions button on the ToolBook toolbar to open the Actions Editor 3 Click the name of the event in the first line of the action sequence The Event list opens The list of available events depends on the object and includes only events appropriate for the object For example since editable fields do not respond to mouse events the On click and On double click events are not available Common Event list options Select this Event list item To create an action sequence that handles On click A user clicking the object On User event A generic event you initiate with the Send User Event action On double click A user quickly clicking the object twice On load page A user entering a page On mouse off A user moving the pointer off the object On mouse over A
222. er level press F3 to test your hide and show sequence Using the Actions Editor to Hide and Show Objects Using the Actions Editor visual programming tool you can program an object to hide or show in response to an event gt To hide or show an object using the Actions Editor 1 Select an object for example a button or graphic 2 From the Object menu choose Actions The Actions Editor appears 3 Inthe Event list select an event that activates the action sequence for example On click or On load page 4 From the Insert menu in the Actions Editor point to Action point to Object and then choose Set Property 5 Inthe Properties for Action dialog box do the following In the Select the object for which to set the property list select the object you want to hide or show or drag the Choose object button over the object to select it Inthe Select the property to set list select Visible 168 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Animating ToolBook Objects Under Property value check Specify the new value for the property as a literal value Inthe Select logical value list select false to hide the object or true to show the object 6 Click OK 7 From the File menu in the Actions Editor choose Update Actions amp Close 8 Switch to Reader level press F3 to test your sequence For more information about using the Actions Editor to create action sequences s
223. er the next two conditions the value of Rate When actions are very similar you will save time by copying pasting and editing the first action you create gt Tocopy paste and edit an action 1 Select the action you inserted in the steps above 2 From the Edit menu choose Copy 3 Select the second condition in the Action sequence Else if selecteditemText of self Atlanta From the Edit menu choose Paste While the action you pasted is selected click the Properties button on the Actions Editor toolbar In the Properties for Action dialog box select the parameter value next to Rate and type 6 Repeat the steps above to insert the same action under the third condition in the action sequence Else select the value next to Rate and then type 8 25 Inserting the Display Alert Action So far the actions you have inserted into the action sequence determine which item the user selects in the list box and call a shared action to perform a calculation from the information it supplies Now you need to give feedback to the user displaying the dollar amount due in tax You can use the Display alert action to show users a message in a dialog box gt To display an alert 1 Inthe Actions Editor select End if 2 From the Insert menu point to Action point to Prompts and choose Display Alert The Properties for Action dialog box appears Select Enter an expression In the Specify the text to display box click the Build expre
224. er the pages in your book using either the Properties for Page dialog box or the Book Explorer the ID numbers do not change Removing Pages and Backgrounds You can remove a page and its background from a book However a background that is shared by more than one page in the book remains in the book as long as one page that uses that background remains in the book To remove a background completely from a book you must remove every page that shares that background When you remove the last page that uses a background ToolBook removes the background as well gt To remove a page and background from a book Using the interface 1 Goto the page you want to remove 2 Choose Select Page from the Edit menu or click the page selection indicator on the status bar 3 Do one of the following From the Edit menu choose Cut From the Edit menu choose Delete Page m Press DELETE The Cut command removes the page from the book and puts it on the Clipboard the Delete Page command and the DELETE key remove the page entirely Using OpenScript e Use the select command and the cut or clear message to remove a page from a book select this page send clear Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 57 Creating Books and Pages Working with Backgrounds Using backgrounds to group like pages together can save you time and reduce the size of your file You can specify the color pattern or b
225. erties Click this To do this tabt Draw Set drawing options border style field type color and visibility state options Bounds Set the field s position and size Font Set the font style size effects and formatting options Paragraph Set text alignment indentation spacing and tabs 106 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Setting Field Properties Behavior Specify the field s behavior at run time Drag amp Drop Specify the appearance and behavior of the field when it is dragged or dropped at Reader level 3 Optional Close the Properties dialog box You can also use the Actions Editor visual programming tool to create action sequences that set certain field properties while the application is running For more information about the Actions Editor see Chapter 17 Using the Actions Editor and Chapter 18 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples Modifying Border Style and Field Type You can modify the basic appearance and function of a field by changing your selections in the Border style and Field type lists both appear on the Draw tab of the Properties for Text Field or Properties for Record Field dialog box For example you can apply a number of different border styles to a field as shown in Figure 3 None Rectangle Scrolling a Shadowed Raised Inset Figure 3 Field border styles You can change th
226. erties button on the Actions Editor toolbar Click the Build expression button at the end of the Condition box to open the Build Expression dialog box In the Build Expression dialog box do the following a Inthe Select the type of item to insert list select Object properties b Inthe Select an object list select Button New user Or drag the Choose object button over the New user radio button to select it c Inthe Select a property list select checked d Click Insert into Expression Optional Click Check Syntax to check the syntax of your expression Click OK to close the Build Expression dialog box and then click OK again to close the Properties dialog box ToolBook inserts the expression you created and an End if statement to indicate the end of the conditional structure Using the skills learned above create a second conditional expression directly below the first Else if checked of Button Advanced user From the Insert menu point to Condition and choose Else Note The Else condition covers any other possible condition In this example the only possible other condition is that neither radio button is checked Once you have determined which radio button the user selected you need to send the user to the appropriate page of the book You can use the Go to page action to send a user to a particular page gt To insert the Go to page action 1 Select the first conditional expression in the action seque
227. erties dialog qT Open Paragraph tab of Properties box dialog box Group or ungroup objects Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 33 Learning the ToolBook Interface Default Toolbar button Toolbar button when CTRL is pressed Th Bring to front Li Bring object closer aa Send to back Ly Move object farther dh Flip horizontally Flip vertically A Rotate left Eh Rotate right Working with the Status Bar The status bar which displays information about ToolBook and the current page has several parts e Caption area Displays Help text for menu commands the Help text for toolbar or tool palette buttons or the name of an object depending on the position of the pointer ToolBook also displays progress messages in the caption area when a process is under way e Mouse position indicator Displays the coordinates of the pointer in page units e Page selection indicator Shows that you are working on the foreground You can click here to select the entire page e Navigation control buttons Move you to the next or previous page when clicked e Deployment mode indicator Indicates the current deployment mode native or DHTML of the book In addition to the icon indicating the mode of deployment on mouseover a tooltip description of the current mode appears e Status box Displays the current page number and total number of pages or the wor
228. erty BrOwWS O congspiopiossnnii sonrai A OTA ESA 100 Working with TEX saci 103 agaralt ai a i A E E AE E N A E A A A N A T 103 e atda e E T E E E AEA AA A A E A A A T annie 103 Working witi Fields ssc sccrtea iecerides eee ehcrerteh idee ce a Enean EENAA EEN EASE ENEA E ENEE 104 Creating Fields eierens niian aa aiian anaa aa aiaa eA oiana andai aaa NAAA Eao naa 104 Adding a Field from the Catalog cccccccseeeeeceeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeseaeeeeaaeseceeeseaeeesaaeeeeaeeseeeeeeeas 104 Creating a Field Using the Tool Palette 0 cecccecceeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseneeeseaeeesaeeeeeeessaees 105 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited iii Table of Contents Creating a Field Using OpenScript enrian ee hae aa AA 105 setting Field Properties saisies Hi ek ai Ae ne A ee ee 106 Modifying Border Style and Field Type cc sccsecceceeeeeeeeeeseneeceeeeeeeaeseeaeeseeeeeseaeeseaaeeneneeee 107 Modifying the Behavior of a Field 22 c cccccecceecieedeeesceneeesseceeeensenite sete dene eesiicvensecnneennncnes 108 Adding Text to Fields is tccscdn cete eas ee n tides Abie cd eee dock aed te de en we TE 109 TYPING TOX ncrs ts inde aerate ce eines te id anette inn aia 109 IMPOMING Tor scecisdtedbeeesesc ce pielie shea sched viteced shud weed EE E 109 Copying and Pasting Text from an RTF DOCUMENK cc ccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseaeeeeeeenenees 110 Selecting and Editing Textisic
229. es that utilize DHTML automatically Publishing to DHTML from ToolBook creates Web pages that are customized for whichever browser option you specify When you Publish to Web most objects and features will appear and behave as they do in ToolBook The following table describes the functionality you should expect when Publishing your application to DHTML Functionality to expect when Publishing your book to DHTML Object or feature type DHTML Action sequences In general objects programmed using the Actions Editor will behave as they do in ToolBook Buttons Button captions will not appear transparent unless the caption is centered Access keys on button captions will not function Hyperlinks Transition effects between hyperlinks will appear in Microsoft Internet Explorer Menu bars and viewers These features will not function in an Published application OpenScript Objects whose functionality has been extended using OpenScript will not function as scripted after Published Use the Actions Editor to program behavior that will Publish to Web Question objects In general question objects will behave as they do in ToolBook Text fields Single select list boxes multi select list boxes and editable fields will lose their character formatting and will not appear transparent Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 293 Distributing Applications on the Interne
230. esence of any number of statements Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 19 Bese ee Basic Concepts Introduction This chapter provides an overview of ToolBook and explains important concepts you should understand in order to use ToolBook successfully About the ToolBook Product Designed for the flexible creation of content rich learning applications ToolBook includes the ability to fully customize your application using the Actions Editor visual programming tool and the OpenScript programming language You can customize objects using these tools and then save them in the Catalog for use For more information about ToolBook visit our Web site at www toolbook com Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 21 Basic Concepts About ToolBook ToolBook is a courseware authoring program that allows course developers and instructional designers to create customize and deliver online learning applications With ToolBook you can create dynamic interactive courses that engage the learner using sound animation video graphics and other special effects Although ToolBook provides sophisticated tools for experienced programmers you don t need to know how to program to use ToolBook You can use convenient prebuilt templates and preprogrammed objects from the Catalog a Commonly Used Objects a sa Sa Auto Sizing Text Image
231. esources are considered properties of an object You can assign a resource to an object using the Properties dialog box Working with Resources The steps you take to assign a resource as an object property differ depending on the type of object and the type of resource This section describes how to assign various resources to different objects Adding a Graphic to a Button You can assign as many as four different graphics to a button one for the button s normal state one for its inverted state when the button is clicked one for its disabled state when the button cannot be clicked and one for its checked state when an option is chosen Note You can also assign a rollover graphic to a button that will display when the mouse pointer pauses over the button On the Graphics tab in the Properties for Button dialog box select the option labeled Use checked graphic as rollover graphic gt To adda graphic to a button 1 Select the button to which you want to add the graphic and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar In the Properties for Button dialog box click the Graphics tab Under Button graphics choose a button state Normal Invert Disabled or Checked and then click Choose Graphic The Choose Graphic dialog box appears 4 Select the type of resource you want bitmap cursor or icon in the Available resources list Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohib
232. ess to a full version of ToolBook can run your application A run time version of ToolBook allows users to run books at Reader level only Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 305 Preparing Native ToolBook Applications for Release Using ToolBook on a Network You can store your ToolBook application on a network to allow multiple users to access and work in the application ToolBook ensures that under normal circumstances books on network file servers are not corrupted by multiuser access There are two ways to a maintain network version of an ToolBook application You can e Provide a read only version of a book that can be opened and used by anyone Users can open and copy a read only book even if it is already open on the network but they cannot delete the book change its file attributes rename it or save changes Other applications including DOS utilities and Windows applications can open the file and access information but they cannot change its file attributes rename the file or save changes Provide a standard read write version of a book that can be opened by only one user at a time Users cannot open a read write book copy it delete it or change its file attributes until the first user has closed it By default users have read write access to ToolBook files To allow read only access to a ToolBook book Right click the ToolBook file in Windows Explorer From the right c
233. ession box insert the cursor between the parentheses after round Inthe Select the type of item to insert list select Variables and parameters in the Select a variable or parameter list select Price click Insert into Expression Inthe Select the type of item to insert list select Operators and functions in the Select a category list select Math operators and functions in the Select an operator or function list select the multiplier symbol click Insert into Expression 234 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Example 4 Using Shared Action Sequences Inthe Select the type of item to insert list select Variables and parameters in the Select the variable or parameter list select Rate click Insert into Expression 4 Click OK to close the Build Expression dialog box and then click OK to close the Properties dialog box To return the value calculated in the shared action sequence you use the Set Return Value action You can change the form of the result to display as a dollar amount limited to two decimals by setting the variable returnValue to the value of Product divided by 100 gt To set the return value 1 From the Insert menu point to Action point to General and then choose Set Return Value The Properties for Action dialog box appears 2 Click the Build expression button to open the Build Expression dialog box and then do the following Inthe Select t
234. essseenesneeees 139 INTFOQUCTION ercran a ides ached TEE adaata E tings 139 About List Boxes and Combo BOXES cc cccececeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeceenaeceaeeeseaaeseeaeeseeeeesaeeseaaeeseneeeaas 139 Creating List BOXES corr vsace scteceeceaetienth asaece aae a aina a epee cuhulcke inareeangdeiines pageae advan de da eet sweats 140 Adding a List Box fromthe Catalog ssccccz covet snacchnes sev dari aa aa iaaa 140 Creating a List Box Using the Tool Palettes smrsisiiin anasinin iinne nsina 140 Creating a List Box USing OpeNScript erisera ianiai iiaa Nanai NANEN 141 Setting List Box Propertie Siss tuione aE aaa EA aE aa aa aeaaea devel Gilets 141 Moditying Field Type susor anri S TE AE EAE 142 Adding Taxi to a List Box oispa TE EE E A 142 Creating Combo BOXES ievesce ceccedscesideeeccaceth sive sb ea pbecasacey deel a eE aE aA aE aE a AENA 143 Adding a Combo Box from the Catalog sissioni ainiaan iaaa 143 Creating a Combo Box Using the Tool Palette cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeseaees 144 Creating a Combo Box Using OpenScript ccccceceeceeeceeeeeceeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeneeeeeeees 144 setting Combo Box Properties sii ceuiesserdscteeruhend nied cievuet avant a aa ad aaa aaa N a aE 144 Adding Text to COMBO BOXES cccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeceeeeeseaeeesaaeseeeeeseaeeeeaaeeeeaeeseeeescaeeseaeeseeeeeeaas 146 Determining User Selection cccccceceecceeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeaeeseeeeceaess
235. et and in all new backgrounds that you create Note When you Publish your book to DHTML format the ToolBook will size the browser window according to the size of the largest background You can change a book s page size and orientation at any time even after you add objects to the pages However ToolBook does not rearrange objects to fit the new page size or orientation To fit the objects into a smaller page size or different orientation move them to their new locations before you reduce or reorient the page If necessary you can return to the original page size to see the objects in their original positions gt To seta page size 1 From the Object menu do one of the following m To set a default page size for the entire book choose Properties for Book The Properties for Book dialog box appears To set a custom page size for a background choose Properties for Background The Properties for Background dialog box appears 2 Click the Page tab and then enter the size you want in pixels 3 Optional Close the Properties dialog box Using OpenScript The book s size property sets a default page size for the book The background s size property can be set for individual backgrounds This size affects only the pages that share that background e To set a default page size for the book or a background set the size property Page size is specified in ToolBook page units 1 1440 of an inch size of this book 10000 15000 size of t
236. ete depending on your level of experience with ToolBook and your knowledge of basic programming conventions When you finish an example you can view the results immediately gt To open the Actions Editor Walkthrough book 1 Start ToolBook 2 Navigate to the location where you have installed ToolBook and go to the Samples folder Typically the location would be C Program Files ToolBook ToolBook 11 5 Samples Actions Editor Walkthrough Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 219 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples 3 Select Walkthrough tbk and then click OK ToolBook opens the book Example 1 Using Conditions There are situations in which you will want different types of users to view or have access to different information This example uses conditions in an action sequence to send new users to a page containing introductory text while sending advanced users directly to a page with a table of contents Open the second page of the Actions Editor Walkthrough book Note that there are three interactive objects two radio buttons labeled New user and Advanced user and a pushbutton labeled Continue You will create an action sequence for the Continue button that sends users to different pages of the book depending on their radio button selection T ToolBook Walkthrough tbk File Edit View Go Insert Object Text Draw Tools Help Suc SUC M ufse so aes SS SS A walkt
237. eturning Student ey a Ele WV 2 Display Query lt 4 Display alert Please choose an option e Display Popup Text l 3 End if _ Navigation Scoring and Tracking N Media eo Control fa P D Field id 1 of Page Blank l 8370 298 B Ar Figure 1 Action sequence for an object You can also create shared action sequences A shared action sequence is not linked to a specific event and does not belong to any individual object Instead you can use a shared action sequence to assign the same behavior to multiple objects A shared action sequence is stored under a unique name that you assign and is available to be executed as part of any other action sequence For more information see Creating and using shared action sequences later in this chapter Note You can create action sequences to program the behavior of ActiveX controls For more information about creating action sequences for ActiveX controls see the online book Advanced Features for Native ToolBook Applications 198 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Choosing When to Create Action Sequences Choosing When to Create Action Sequences Action sequences that you build in the Actions Editor work in both native ToolBook applications and Published DHTML applications In ToolBook there are other tools you can use to create interactive behavior as well For example many Catalog objects have pre
238. evel Using the interface 1 From the View menu choose Options 2 Onthe Interface tab select the Show right click menus at Reader level check box To disable right click menus at Reader level click to clear this check box Using OpenScript e Use the following statements to enable right click menus at Reader level At Reader level sysReaderRightClick true send readerRightClick If enabled will disable Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 45 Learning the ToolBook Interface Working at Reader Level You switch to Reader level from Author level to run or test an application When you do ToolBook removes the tools you use for developing an application Tip Press F3 to switch between Author level and Reader level These changes occur when you switch from Author to Reader level e The menu bar changes to a Reader level menu bar that does not contain Author level commands e The toolbar Catalog Coach palettes rulers dialog boxes and grid disappear e The status bar and right click menus disappear unless you have chosen to make them available gt To switch between Author level and Reader level e Choose Author or Reader from the View menu or press F3 gt QD Welcome to Learning Solutions About CCI CCI s Leaders The chart below shows the key leaders of CCI Click any of the buttons below to learn more about them Peter Johnson drives strategy
239. ewers can be used to create dialog boxes tool palettes status bars pop up windows and application startup screens See also client area client window frame window pop up window Visual Media Clip Clips created from animation video photo CDs or still images See also clip Voice Recording Audio that can be recorded for any page in your book using a microphone on your computer The recording plays as the page loads Wave Audio Sound recorded in a digital format and stored as a file with the file extension wav Web Document An HTML file on a Web server A Web document becomes a Web page when it is viewed through a browser See also Web page Web Page A document that can be viewed and interacted with over the Internet Web pages can contain text graphics and links to other Web pages Web pages make up the content of the World Wide Web See also home page Web document World Wide Web Wildcard A question mark used to represent a single character or an asterisk used to indicate multiple characters in a file name or search text Window The fundamental interface object of Microsoft Windows Compare instance Wizard An interactive utility that guides a user through a process step by step Wordwrap An option that automatically places text on the next line when you type past the right margin in a field Text does not wrap in button captions See also field World Wide Web WWW A part of the Internet with the capacity to handl
240. ext in fields and record fields About Fields Fields are objects that hold text Before you can add text to your book you must add a field to contain that text ToolBook offers two basic types of fields text fields and record fields A text field can be placed on a page or on a background If you place a text field on the background the field and the text it contains appear identically on every page that shares that background A record field must be placed on a background unlike a text field placed on the background a record field can display different text on every page that shares that background Consider the following guidelines when adding fields to your book e To display different text in the same position and in the same style on every page that shares a particular background use a record field placed on the background e To display identical text in the same position and in the same style on every page that shares a particular background use a text field placed on the background e To display text that appears on one particular page use a text field placed on the page the foreground The Catalog provides a wide variety of text fields and record fields that you can use to present information on the screen To add text to your page you can drag the type of field you want from the Catalog to your page Then you can replace its placeholder text with your own text Catalog x Text Fields Text Text Text Text Text
241. ext line HOME To the end of the text line END To the beginning of the text CTRL HOME To the end of the text CTRL END Within a large text block PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN 110 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Adding Text to Fields Selecting Text Before you can change the appearance of text you must select it Selecting highlights j ust the text with which you want to work Selecting text To Do this Show the insertion point Double click the field Select a character Click and drag over the character Select a word Double click the word Extend a selection Hold down the SHIFT key and press a navigation key Select all the text Press CTRL A Cutting Copying and Pasting Text You can cut or copy an entire field or any selected text in a field You can cut copy and paste text from one field to another Tip You can also cut copy and paste fields or selected text using the right click menu or using the standard Windows shortcut keys CTRL X CTRL C and CTRL V gt To cut or copy text Using the interface 1 Select the text you want to cut or copy 2 From the Edit menu choose Cut or Copy ToolBook places the selected text on the Clipboard Using OpenScript e To copy the text fonts and styles of one field to another set the richText property of the field you want to receive the formats to the richText of the field containing the desired
242. f Because ToolBook sends the playStep message to the object for each step of the animation you can write a handler to modify the animation as it is running Be sure to forward the playStep message if you want the object to continue on its path Starts the object s path animation when the object is clicked to handle buttonClick system halfway Establishes variable used in playStep handler 174 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Modifying an Animation in the Animation Editor system soundAlreadyPlayed Flag indicating if sound clip played soundAlreadyPlayed false mmOpen Clip chimes halfway anim Duration of self 1000 2 send playAnimation 1 to self end Monitors the animation at each step When the animation is half completed plays a wav file to handle playStep system halfway Variable set earlier when animation began system soundAlreadyPlayed if anim_elapsedTime of target gt halfway then if soundAlreadyPlayed false then mmPlay clip chimes soundAlreadyPlayed true end end forward end e To stop an animation send the stopAnimation message send stopAnimation to ellipse Moon Modifying an Animation in the Animation Editor After you create an animation and play it at Reader level to see how it works you can modify it using the Animation Editor For example you can e Move an entire path or move one segment of a path using
243. f HTML pages Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP A standardized procedure for transferring information via the World Wide Web One of several information transfer protocols used on the Internet Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 317 Glossary beam An shaped cursor that appears over locations where text can be edited See also cursor Icon A graphic that represents an application Icon Resource An icon that can be imported and shared as a resource in one or more ToolBook applications See also resources ID Number A unique identification number that ToolBook assigns each object when it is created Each copy of an object has an ID number that is unique for the page on which it is located When an object is cut and pasted it is assigned a new ID number See also unique identifier Image Buffer An area of memory in which ToolBook maintains an image of the current page or background of a viewer in order to display it quickly when required Implicit Reference A reference to an object that identifies it without stating its explicit location the object is assumed to be on the current page For example the following statement refers to a button on the current page get caption of button Next Compare explicit reference Import The process of bringing data such as text graphics and objects created in another application into ToolBook See also export Indent The space between the left
244. formats richText of field rats richText of field mice e To copy the text of one field to another without copying the formatting set the text property of one field to the text property of the other text of field rats text of field mice e To copy the RTF codes separately from the text set the text property of one field to the richText property of another text of field rats richText of field mice gt To paste text Using the interface 1 Copy the text you want to the Clipboard 2 Double click the field into which you want to paste text An insertion point appears in the upper left corner From the Edit menu choose Paste To end text editing mode click outside the field or press the ESC key Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 111 Working with Text Using OpenScript e You can use the send paste statement to paste the contents of the Clipboard into a new field Deleting Text You can remove text from a field If you delete text by mistake immediately choose Undo from the Edit menu to restore it otherwise your text will be lost gt To delete text 1 Select the text you want to delete 2 Press DELETE press BACKSPACE or choose Delete Selected Text from the Edit menu Formatting Text in Fields You can apply character formatting such as font style color and size and paragraph formatting such as alignment line spacing indents and tab settings
245. ftware Simulation Before developing a simulation you ll need to define the purpose or goal of providing a simulation to your audience Ask yourself the following questions e What is the primary learning objective for the simulation e What level of mastery will the learner be expected to attain e How much time should it take for the learner to view or complete the simulation e Considering the learning objective early in the planning process will help you decide how much interaction and responsive feedback text the simulation will include The learning objective will determine if a simulation will be presented as a test to assess the learner s performance When you are planning a simulation e Define the learning objective e Identify the actions in the task that will be simulated e Design the page layout e Choose the type of simulation practice demonstration or assessment or a combination of these types Identifying the action or process that will be taught in a simulation begins with a review of the task Open the software program that will be simulated and practice the tasks that you want to simulate Think of the simulation as a series of steps If you are planning to build an interactive simulation write instructions that explain how to complete each step in the task You can use these written instructions as text that will appear on the simulation page If the simulation will be built or modified with the Simulation Editor
246. g the Properties for Button dialog box Buttons that you draw using the tool palette or OpenScript as well as the general use buttons available in the Catalog do not have predefined behaviors These buttons can be hyperlinked to other locations or programmed in the Actions Editor to perform a variety of tasks Alternatively you can use OpenScript to define any aspect of a button s behavior and appearance Adding a Button from the Catalog The Catalog contains a wide variety of basic button objects for general use as well as buttons with extended properties designed for specific purposes such as media players navigation panels and question objects To add a button to your book drag it from the Catalog to a page or background and then define its properties in the Properties for Button dialog box gt To create a button and set its properties 1 Click the Catalog button ed on the ToolBook toolbar to open the Catalog 2 Inthe Catalog explore the categories that contain buttons For example general use buttons are available from the Buttons category Buttons with built in functionality are available from these and a few other categories Action Objects Scoring and Tracking Objects Navigation Objects and Media Players Drag the button you want from the object pane and then drop it onto your page Select the button and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar In the Properties for Button dialog box select or enter
247. ges category of the Catalog e The New Page command from the Insert menu e Choosing a page from the Catalog Any of the page types shown in the Pages category of the Catalog will automatically match the existing style of your book when added ToolBook supplies the graphics that match the style you chose when starting a book from a template or Book Wizard The Insert menu has the New Page command and the New Background command While both commands allow you to add a page to your book they each give you different options about the type of page or background you add Choosing New Page from the Insert menu allows you to add an empty page using the current background duplicate a page from your book or add a page from a template After choosing one of these options you can specify that the page introduce a new background so that changes made to this new background will not affect the background you duplicated Choosing New Background from the Insert menu allows you to add a page that uses a new background You can add a new page with an empty background duplicate a background from your book or add a background from a template gt To add anew page from the Catalog 1 If the Catalog is not currently open click the View menu and choose Catalog 2 Open the Pages category 3 Double click the type of page you want to add The new page is inserted after the page you were viewing gt To add anew page from the current template or book 1 G
248. gned to the question object Question Text Field A field object that will display the text designated as the Question Text for the question Result Field A field object that will reveal whether the question was answered correctly or not Student Answer Field A field object that will display the user s answer to the question Review Field A field object that will provide a link that the end user can click on to navigate directly to the page containing the question object Other Available Objects The objects mentioned in the preceding sections are just a few of the multitude of objects that are available in the Catalog Perhaps the best way to learn what is available in the Catalog is to explore them as you work Soon you will become an expert at locating the objects you need when you need them 70 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Customizing the Catalog Customizing the Catalog You can change many aspects of the Catalog to fit your personal preferences For example you can modify the display of the categories in the Catalog so that you see only the categories that you plan to use in your current book In addition you can add new categories to the Catalog and reorder the existing categories You can add your own customized objects to the Catalog and import customized Catalog objects created by other ToolBook authors gt To access the Customize Catalog options 1
249. grounds See also client area Client side image map An image map for which the map information is specified in the HTML file that contains the image Clicks are processed by the Web browser without interaction with a server Clip A reference to a segment of any media source or file including sound files audio CD digital video files animation or videotape Only the reference is stored in ToolBook ToolBook supports file based clips including sound files digital video files and animation files Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 311 Glossary Clip Library A file extension cpf that contains a collection of clips references to media files that can be used in one or more applications and that can refer to different types of media See also clip media file Clip Text A printing option to cut off text at a field s margin or at the boundary of a column or row when printing a report Clipboard A temporary storage location where Windows places the item most recently cut or copied The Clipboard can be used to move text and graphics between ToolBook books and other Windows applications Coach A quick reference tool that provides context sensitive information about pages and objects You can open the Coach from the ToolBook Help menu Color A combination of hue lightness and saturation HLS or red green and blue values RGB Objects created in ToolBook can have a stroke color and
250. gure 5 The ToolBook Coach 38 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working at Author Level Working with Properties and Extended Properties Dialog Boxes After you add an object to the page you set its properties to customize its appearance and behavior in your application You set an object s properties by first selecting the object and then opening the object s Properties or Extended Properties dialog box These dialog boxes allow you to set an object s color specify a graphic displayed on a button identify the correct answers in a question object control when a video plays and much more Working with the Properties Dialog Box Using the Properties dialog box you simply enter or select the values you want to set As a convenience you can leave the Properties dialog box open as you work the Properties dialog box shows you the properties of the currently selected object This feature allows you to set the properties of different objects on your page without having to close and reopen the dialog box several times Properties for Button Draw Graphics Bounds Font Behavior Drag amp Drop Style Caption position Auto Border style Push button x Curent state V Visible M Inverted Checked Figure 6 The Properties dialog box The toolbar in the Properties dialog box includes buttons to give you quick access to commands other object properties and He
251. has finished answering the question e Want to display different feedback for each of the following outcomes All correct All incorrect or Partially correct You can sometimes combine immediate and delayed feedback in the same question A multiple choice multiple correct question can have several active answers By using immediate feedback you can have the question object provide feedback for each possible answer as soon as the student selects it whether the question takes a single answer or multiple answers When the student is finished with a multiple choice multiple correct question object you can use delayed feedback to provide feedback for the whole question For example you might provide one type of feedback if the student answered the question partially correctly and a different type of feedback if the student answered incorrectly You can define both types of feedback for any question object except an order text object for which you can define only delayed feedback Specifying Feedback for a Question Object You specify feedback for a question object using the Properties for Question dialog box which has separate tabs for immediate and delayed feedback gt To specify immediate feedback for a question object 1 Select the question object and then click the Extended Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar Click the Immediate Feedback tab Select the Enable feedback at time of response check box Under Possible answers
252. hat can be set in the Simulation Editor Depending on the line selected in the top panel of the Simulation Editor the properties shown in the property grid will vary X Simulation Editor File Edit View Insert Help we S BO E Step 1 Click FILE E Objects the user must change in this step E le Events that trigger an attempt Click on button trigger_file no modifier x Click on any object no modifier eT Lit ye i gr Properties for Simulation Simulation E Actions On complete simulation none On play state change none On reset simulation none none E Controls Continue button none Continue button state Enable and disable Instructions field none Object level feedback In feedback field Keyboard speed 0 normal speed Mouse animation speed 0 normal speed Figure 5 The Simulation Editor gt To view or edit the properties for an entire simulation 1 Inthe Simulation Editor select the line that displays the name of the simulation 2 Do one of the following m Click the Properties button on the toolbar of the Simulation Editor Select a line in the property grid Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 285 Building Software Simulations The properties available for the entire simulation are not the same as the properties for a selected step in the simulation The items shown in the property grid correspond to the selected line in the uppe
253. havior or insert loops that execute the same actions repeatedly The behavior that you create using the Actions Editor will be converted into Web format when using Publish to Web For details about using the Actions Editor to add interactive behavior to your applications see Chapter 17 Using the Actions Editor and Chapter 18 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples Adding a Graphic to a Button Graphics can help convey the purpose and availability of a button to the user For example you might use a graphic to indicate that a button is disabled You can use graphics in combination with a caption or leave the caption off altogether You can assign a graphic to a button state using the Properties for Button dialog box Alternatively you can add a graphic to a button by dragging a graphic object from the Catalog to the button You can also use OpenScript to define this property You can assign as many as four different graphics to a button one for each of the four button states Graphics for each button state Dialog box OpenScript Description option Property Normal normalGraphic Displayed when button is in its normal state Invert invertGraphic Displayed when button is being pressed Disabled disabledGraphic Displayed when button is disabled Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 133 Adding Interactive Features to your Application Dialog box
254. hbutton Button Command commandbutton Rectangle rectangle Rounded rounded Shadowed shadowed T Button Check Box 3D checkBox3D Button Radio Button 3D radioButton3D Button Label Button label Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 131 Adding Interactive Features to your Application Formatting Caption Text You can specify various character settings for a button s caption in the Properties for Button dialog box gt To format a button s caption Select the button and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar Click the Font tab in the Properties for Button dialog box Choose the font style size effects and other options you want Po NM Optional Close the Properties for Button dialog box Tip Because text doesn t wrap in a button caption you might need to resize a button to encompass its caption For multiple lines of text use a field instead of a button You can also specify an access key for a button which appears as an underlined character in the button s caption An access key allows a user to achieve a button click via the keyboard The user can either click the button with the mouse or press the ALT key in combination with the underlined character in the caption To set the access key type an ampersand amp before the letter you want to use as the access key For example to create the caption Style where e is the access key type S
255. he View menu click Options In the ToolBook Options box click the Backup tab Select the Always create backup copy checkbox PY KN Specify the number of backups required in the Number of unique backup files 1 9 field Opening a backup file From the Windows Start menu launch ToolBook From the Startup screen choose Select a File from the Open Book section From the Files Of Type selector choose All Files Specify the location of the backup file you want to open Click Open o Po PM gt y Creating Backups Manually It is important to back up your book manually at intervals by using the Save As option because it will often compress and optimize the file This results in a smaller overall file size without any other impact on your book gt Tocreate backups manually 1 From the File Menu click Save As Click OK in the reset book prompt In the Save As box enter a name for the book Select a folder in which to save the book Click Save ao PY nN 52 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating Pages and Backgrounds Creating Pages and Backgrounds Pages and backgrounds are ToolBook objects that you can create and modify In a ToolBook book you can e Add and remove new pages and backgrounds e Import pages and backgrounds from a different book Adding Pages and Backgrounds to a Book You can add a new page by choosing e Any page shown in the Pa
256. he example above a student drags text labels to identify parts Drag each prime number into the box 17 4 33 11 r 61 Figure 5 A question created using a drop target object A drop target object allows you to define objects as potential answers and test the student s ability to identify the correct answers The student chooses an answer by dragging an answer object to the drop target object The drop target object itself is typically a picture of a container or target Use this question object when the correct answer allows the student to drag multiple objects to a single target Jades are green because of a high content of Figure 6 A question created using a fill in the blank object 154 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Question Objects in Action A fill in the blank object allows you to define a word or phrase as the correct response to a question The student attempts to answer the question by typing a response in the object s response area o Figure 7 A question created using a match items object A match items object allows you to define pairs of matching items as correct answers and test the student s ability to identify the pairs correctly The student attempts to match the items correctly by dragging an arrow from each response object to its match Most Cars Will Eventually Be Electric Fossil Fuels P
257. he following media search paths are invalid lt CDROM gt Media lt BookPath gt Media Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 189 Adding Audio and Video Files Refining Media Search Paths A new book s hard disk media search path HDMediaPath is set to lt BookPath gt so ToolBook automatically finds media source files located in the same directory as the book the TBK file You can refine media search paths by adding or removing search paths for both the hard disk and CD ROM gt To add or remove media search paths Using the interface 1 2 3 4 5 From the Object menu choose Clips to open the Clip Manager Click the Media Paths button to open the Media Paths dialog box Under Path to edit choose either Hard disk or CD ROM Do one or more of the following To adda path click Add Path select a new path and then click OK To add the current book s path click Add Book Path ToolBook adds lt BookPath gt to the search path which is automatically interpreted as the path of the current book the TBK file To add the current CD ROM path click Add CD ROM Path ToolBook adds lt CDROM gt to the search path To remove a path select a path from the Directories on hard disk media path list and then click Remove Path If a clip s media source file isin the path you removed ToolBook will not be able to find the file or play the clip Click OK to
258. he programmer adds to a script that does not cause ToolBook to take any action Comments start with two hyphens For example Sets the object s fontFace fontFace of field This Field Times New Roman Compiled Path A property of an animated object containing the coordinates for the object at each step of the animation ToolBook plays the animation by using the next set of coordinates four coordinates per step from the compiled path and setting the object s bounds to them The number of steps in the compiled path is based on the duration and steps per second specified when you saved the animation in the ToolBook Animation Editor A compiled path with 30 steps including the start and end points will have 120 items in its compiled path Concatenation Operators The symbols in OpenScript amp and amp amp that instruct the application to join two strings of characters into a single longer string The double ampersand operator amp amp adds a space between the joined strings For example vMessage Hello amp amp world 312 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Uninstalling an Application Condition A special type of action that when inserted into an action sequence creates a junction at which ToolBook follows one of two or more distinct paths as it executes the action sequence See also action action sequence loop Constant A value that cannot change including l
259. he score for an individual question object or for several question objects You can use a scoring button in combination with a score field to display the score to the user Score fields are also available in the Evaluation category of the Catalog 156 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Specifying Feedback Assigning Weight to an Answer With most types of question objects you can assign a weight to every answer The weight is a percentage of the possible points available for the question For example with a fill in the blank question you might assign different weights to various possible answers You can also let the Properties for Question dialog box assign the weights depending on the type of question and the number of answers By default the weight of a correct answer is 100 percent if the question has a single answer and a fraction of 100 percent if there are several answers The weight is automatically updated as you mark answers correct or incorrect You can modify the weights in the Properties for Question dialog box You can assign a negative weight to an incorrect answer making the incorrect answer penalize the score for the question until it is either zero or the minimum score for the question whichever is lower For example with a multiple choice multiple correct question incorrect answers may have a negative weight that cancels correct answers The Automatic check box on the
260. he specified URL Pop up another page Opens a new instance of the Web browser before jumping to the specified URL gt To create a hyperlink 1 Select the object that you want to hyperlink 2 From the Object menu choose Hyperlink The Hyperlink dialog box appears In the Type of link list select the kind of link you want to use Under Link to select the type of link you want To link to another page select the page option you want To link to a URL enter a URL in the URL box 5 Optional Specify a transition effect for the hyperlink Transition effects are available only when you choose Go to another page as the type of link you want to use 6 Optional Under Pop up style select a window style in the list Pop up style is available only when you choose Pop up another page as the type of link you want to use 7 Click OK For more information about hyperlinks refer to Help Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 79 Working with Objects Cutting Copying Pasting and Deleting Objects You can share an object among pages by cutting copying pasting and duplicating it Cutting removes an object from a page and places it on the Clipboard so that you can paste it either in the current book or in another book When you copy an object ToolBook places a copy on the Clipboard so you can then paste it When you duplicate an object you create an exact copy of th
261. he type of item to insert list select Variables and Parameters in the Select a variable or parameter list select Product click Insert into Expression Inthe Select the type of item to insert list select Operators and functions in the Select a category list select Math operators and functions in the Select an operator or function list select the division symbol click Insert into Expression Inthe expression box insert your cursor after the division symbol and type 100 3 Click OK to close the Build Expression dialog box and then click OK to close the Properties dialog box Saving and Naming the Shared Action Sequence Once you have built a shared action sequence you need to save it under a unique name then you can call it from any other action sequence gt To save a shared action sequence 1 Inthe Actions Editor from File menu choose Update Actions amp Close 2 Inthe Shared Actions dialog box in the Name box select NewSharedAction and then type CalculateTax 3 Click Close Building the Action Sequence for the List Box The shared action sequence you just created runs only when called by another action sequence Now you will create an action sequence for the list box object named Cities The action sequence includes an action that calls CalculateTax and supplies it with the two parameters it needs to complete its operation Price and Rate Building this action sequence shows you how to e Select an even
262. her of these formats gt To import text 1 Double click the field into which you want to import text 2 From the Insert menu choose Text The Import Text dialog box appears 3 Inthe List files of type list select an RTF file with an rtf file extension or an ASCII text file with a txt file extension and then click OK 4 If your field already contains text ToolBook notifies you that the current contents of your field will be replaced 5 Click OK to continue or click Cancel to preserve your existing content Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 109 Working with Text Note When you import text ToolBook replaces the entire contents of the field To avoid losing existing text you can always import the text into an empty field and copy and paste the text to the location you want Copying and Pasting Text from an RTF Document When you copy and paste text into ToolBook from other programs that support RTF the text will retain most of its formatting Paragraph formatting applied to the first paragraph is applied to subsequent paragraphs in the selection Note When using RTF text you may see paragraph formatting in the source application that does not appear in ToolBook Although some formatting may be lost no text data is lost gt To paste RTF text into ToolBook 1 Inthe source application select the text you want and then copy it to the Clipboard 2 In ToolBook d
263. hese activities in one operation Important Be sure to write down your password If you forget your password you will not be able to perform password protected activities gt To define a password 1 From the Object menu choose Properties for Book 2 On the General tab click Set Passwords The Passwords dialog box appears 3 Click one of the following buttons to open the Set Passwords dialog box Author Specifies the password required for switching to Author level Open Specifies the password required for opening the book Save Specifies the password required for saving the book Set All Specifies the password required for switching to Author level opening a book and saving a book 4 Inthe Set Passwords dialog box in the Password box type the password required for the particular user activity based on the button you clicked in step 3 Retype the password in the Confirm password box and then click OK In the Passwords dialog box click OK Optional Close the Properties for Book dialog box Note You can remove a password by clicking Clear Password or by deleting a password in the Set Passwords dialog box You can use the passwordTypes OpenScript function to return a list of the types of passwords that are active in the specified book The passwordTypes function takes a lt oookPath gt parameter This parameter must be a valid book path For example CurrentPasswords passwordTypes c instruct WebBook tbk
264. his background 10000 15000 e To view the page size of the book or the background use one of the following commands put size of this book put size of this background request size of this book ToolBook displays two numbers representing the width and height of the page in page units Scaling the Window Size to the Page Size The page size does not control the size of the window A window can be scaled larger than a page ToolBook displays a mat beyond the page s edge or smaller than a page ToolBook displays scroll bars To scale the window to match the page size use the Size to Page command on the View menu or send the OpenScript sizeToPage message ToolBook expands or contracts the window to fit the current page or to the maximum window size whichever is smaller Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 59 Creating Books and Pages Setting Properties for Books You can set properties for a book just as you can set properties for all objects in ToolBook For example the book s title description and passwords are all book properties To set a book s properties from the Object menu choose Properties for Book In the Properties for Book dialog box make your selections Protecting Books with Passwords To protect and control access to a book you can assign separate passwords to allow access for opening modifying and saving the book You can also assign the same password to all of t
265. hrough Welcome to the ToolBook Actions Editor walkthrough Please check the button that best describes you New user Advanced user m 3 a B Ea PN N co 5 101103885 B d 207 pl 220 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Example 1 Using Conditions Note To work with an object in the Actions Editor you must assign the object a name Figure 1 shows the action sequence applied to the Continue button for Example 1 ToolBook executes the action sequence as follows First ToolBook evaluates which one of two radio buttons a user selected Depending on the radio button selection ToolBook sends the user to a specific page If the user did not select a radio button ToolBook prompts the user to check a button and try again Actions Editor Button Continue File Edit View Insert Action Tools Help Xaaa AXE L x Parameters mouse mouse shiftD own ctriD own Comment If checked of button New user XX Set Variable Go to the next page D Else if checked of button Advanced user Racks 2 Go to page Contents Navigation gt Else a ee Display alert Please select an action and try again Medi Endif Control 4 m Figure 1 Full action sequence for Example 1 Tip As you work through the following procedures you can refer back to Figure 1 for an example of how the action sequence should look Building the Action Sequence
266. hs enter the width in page units of the outer bevel border and inner bevel 3 Optional Close the Properties for Stage dialog box Setting the Size and Position of Clips in a Stage By default clips have a predefined size and are centered in a stage If you want to play clips of different sizes in the same stage you can scale or crop clips so that they fit in the stage This feature will not Publish to Web gt To set the size and position of clips in a stage 1 Select the stage and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar The Properties for Stage dialog box appears Click the Draw tab In the Sizing list choose how clips appear in the stage If you are playing clips of different sizes select an anchor option from the Anchor list Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 183 Adding Audio and Video Files 5 Optional Close the Properties for Stage dialog box You can also use OpenScript to set the appearance of a stage For details refer to the Programming in OpenScript electronic book Setting Transition Effects To introduce a visual media clip and to move smoothly from one clip to another you can add a transition effect before and after a clip plays For example you can select a transition effect that simulates a page turning or blinds opening gt To seta stage transition effect 1 Select the stage and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook
267. ht 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Using the AutoPackager Allow you to specify a name for your application Allow you to specify a default installation directory m Check for required media files and extension files Update all media paths Give you the option to include ToolBook run time files with your application Allow you to specify which of your application s files are copied to the user s computer Give you the option to create Windows shortcuts for your application Create a setup program that learners can use to install your application Copy your application to a specified location During packaging the AutoPackager records the actions it performs and any error or warning conditions it encounters in a log file this file named Packager log is located in the Package directory Gathering Files The AutoPackager gathers the media files associated with your application and updates the path information referenced in the media links of your book or books You can choose whether the package includes the current open book or all of the files in the current book s directory and its subdirectories For example if you package an application that consists of several books and these books are located within the central book directory structure each book is searched for references to media files When the AutoPackager encounters a media file located outside of the central book
268. ialog box you can specify properties that determine how the combo box appears and behaves at Reader level gt To set the properties of a combo box Using the interface 1 Select the combo box and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar 144 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Setting Combo Box Properties The Properties for Combo Box dialog box appears Properties for Combo Box O Cu S a m BT F BEN B B Name Lee E Jt Draw Bounds Font Behavior Drag amp Drop Border sye Drop down items Colors Use Windows colors e Use custom colors Fill color C Stroke color E Drawing options l Draw transparent 2 To specify the behavior of the combo box at Reader level click the Behavior tab and then select one or more of the following options a Enable the combo box Specifies whether the combo box can receive the focus and mouse event messages at Reader level Combo boxes are enabled by default Make the combo box editable Allows a user to edit the combo box at Reader level Give the drop down list a scroll bar if necessary Adds a scroll bar to the drop down list if there are more items than will fit Sort the drop down list alphabetically Sorts items alphabetically at Reader level 3 Click one or more of the other tabs and select or enter the options you want to set 4 Optional Close the Properties for Combo Box dia
269. ical e There is a default choice e You want users to be able to type in their own choices Creating List Boxes There are three ways to create a list box You can drag a list box from the Catalog to your page Alternatively you can create a list box using the list box tool on the ToolBook tool palette Finally you can use OpenScript to create a list box By default list boxes that you draw using the tool palette are single select list boxes in which the user can select only one item at a time If you want the user to be able to select more than one item at a time you can change the list box to a multi select list box using either OpenScript or the Properties for Text Field dialog box For details see Setting list box properties later in this chapter Adding a List Box from the Catalog The Catalog offers several list boxes that you can drag from the object pane and drop onto your page gt To add alist box from the Catalog 1 Click the Catalog button on the ToolBook toolbar to open the Catalog 2 Inthe Catalog select the Text Fields category 3 Drag alist box object onto your page Creating a List Box Using the Tool Palette You draw a list box on your page using the list box tool gt To create a list box using the tool palette 1 From the tool palette choose the single select list box tool 2 Click in the main window and hold down the mouse button while you drag to draw the list box 140 Copyright 2012 Sum
270. ical spacing of text in a field or record field See also field record field Book A collection of ToolBook pages stored together as a single file A book can be an entire application or one part of an application Book Palette In 256 color systems a predefined list of colors assigned to a book If a book has a palette all imported graphics displayed in the book use the book palette which overrides the palettes of the individual paint objects Assigning a book palette eliminates palette flash which occurs when you navigate to a page containing an imported graphic that has a palette different from the one currently in use Book Properties Attributes of a book that define its appearance and behavior Book Wizards The wizards that ToolBook provides to guide you through the process of creating a new book ToolBook includes two Book Wizards the Lesson Design Wizard and the Book Wizard Both are available from the Startup dialog box Boolean Refers to properties and variables whose values can only be true or false Referred to as logical in OpenScript Border 1 The boundary of a field record field or button or the line enclosing a graphic 2 A line that ToolBook adds around each page when the page is printed See also border style Border Style A property of a button graphic field or record field that determines the style of the object s border Bounding Box The rectangle around a paint or picture object that indicates its dimensio
271. ication These navigation objects feature graphics and hyperlinks that will jump to the next previous first or last page in your application The simplest use of these objects is to place one on the background of a book The navigation object will appear on each page that shares that background You can also create your own navigation buttons using the tool palette and set hyperlinks to move to another page Skipping Pages when Navigating If your book contains pages that you do not want the user to see you can prevent navigation to those pages at Reader level using the Properties for Page dialog box or OpenScript This feature is especially useful if you re displaying pages of a book in a popup and want to limit the user s access through the book gt To prevent navigation to a page at Reader level Using the interface 1 Go to the page to which you do not want the user to navigate 2 From the Object menu choose Properties for Page 3 On the Behavior tab select Skip this page when navigating 4 Optional Close the Properties for Page dialog box Using OpenScript e Set the skipNavigation property for the page to true skipNavigation of page ID 25 true Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 61 Creating Books and Pages Setting Up Transition Effects between Pages You can set up transition effects when the user moves between pages For example you can create the effect that o
272. ice recording is copied to the page Using the UMP to Play Pre recorded Voice Recordings In addition to using the voice narration feature to create audio for each page you can also incorporate any audio file in wav format prerecorded by a voice professional into your book You can use the Universal Media Player to associate the required audio file onto a page and have it play as the page loads You can use the Hide at Reader level feature of the UMP so that the UMP is hidden in the deployed course gt To play pre recorded voice recordings 1 2 Navigate to the page on which you want to associate the audio file Open the Catalog and drag the Universal Media Player from the Media Players Category to your page In the Properties for Universal Media Player dialog box in the Media source field click the Browse button Browse to the folder that contains the media file It is suggested that this be placed either in the same folder as the book or in a subfolder beneath the folder where the book is located Select the file you want to add and click Open then click OK If the file is not located within the same directory as your course files the Resolve Media Path dialog box appears If the Resolve Media Path dialog box appears keep the first option selected and click OK Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Using the UMP to Play Pre recorded Voice Recordings The Resolve M
273. iew information 3 Inthe graphical list of resources select the resource Information about the selected resource appears under Resource properties 248 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Replacing Resources The information ToolBook displays varies depending on the resource type as the following table shows For all resource types the first item of information that ToolBook displays is the reference count which is the number of times the resource is referenced within the book The reference count also appears in the Resource Manager dialog box Tip The reference count is not updated for references to a resource in a script or in user properties Therefore it is possible for a resource to have a reference count of zero but still be used in a book Getting resource information with the resource nfo property Resource type Information Bitmap Reference count bitmap width in pixels bitmap height in pixels color depth as 1 4 8 16 or 24 bit bitmap size in bytes Cursor Reference count icon width in pixels icon height in pixels color depth as 1 bit the hotspot x and y position in pixels which is the area that needs to be over an object when the mouse is clicked Icon Reference count icon width in pixels icon height in pixels color depth as 1 or 4 bit Menu bar Reference count Palette Reference count number of colors in the palette up to 256
274. ify whether you want the action trigger to be visible at Reader level At Reader level the animation will either play automatically when entering the page or interactively when the user clicks the action trigger depending on what you have specified gt To play an animation using an action trigger 1 Open the Catalog and drag an action trigger onto the same page as the animation you ve just created Select the trigger and then click the Extended Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar In the Properties for Action Trigger dialog box under Objects to trigger click Add In the Add an Object dialog box do the following Inthe Select object list select the object for which you created the animation m Under Perform what action choose Animate Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 173 Hiding Showing and Animating Objects a Click OK 4 Inthe Properties for Action Trigger dialog box under Trigger on what event do the following Select the When clicked check box and clear the When entering page check box Select the Button is visible at reader check box and clear the Loop continuously check box Click OK 5 Switch to Reader level press F3 to test your animation Using the Actions Editor to Play an Animation If you use the Actions Editor to play an object s cel or path animation you can include the animation as part of a sequence of actions use a loop to pla
275. ighest layer 3 Select all of the objects by holding down the SHIFT key while you click each object with your mouse From the Object menu choose Group to group the objects Position the objects For example in a spinning globe animation the objects are placed on top of each other so that only the top one is visible To select and move a single item in the group double click it 6 Click the Properties button on the toolbar and in the Properties for Group dialog box assign a name to the group If you do not assign a unique name to the group you will not be able to trigger your animation from the Properties for Action Trigger dialog box or from the ToolBook Actions Editor Select the group and then choose Path Animation from the Object menu Optional Move the grouped objects along a path by creating a path animation as described in the preceding section Creating a path animation 9 Click the Animation Settings button to open the Animation Settings dialog box Under Cel animation select On and then click Close 10 Click Done in the Animation Editor to save the animation gt To test an animation e Click the Run button gt in the Animation Editor Alternatively use the slide bar at the bottom of the Animation Editor to step through an animation sequence 172 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Playing an Animation at Reader Level Playing an Animation at Reader Leve
276. ight 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 23 Basic Concepts Creating an Organized Directory Structure Whether you plan to build just one online learning application or several you ll find it helpful to organize your files In addition when you prepare your application for release you ll want to keep track of any ancillary files that need to be distributed along with your application As we ll discuss later in this chapter applications created in ToolBook are composed of one or more files called books These books should reside in one central book directory with one or more subdirectories for the media files sound graphics video and animation that accompany those books Let s say your application has just one book introduction to French We suggest the following directory structure FRENCH IntroFrench tbk the ToolBook book FRENCH MEDIA EiffelTower avi a video file Now let s say your application is more complex You have one main book about Romance languages and several related books about French Spanish etc You could organize the files using several book subdirectories under a central directory as shown in this example ROMANCE Romance tbk FRENCH IntroFrench tbk AdvFrench tbk FRENCH MEDIA EiffelTower avi SPANISH IntroSpan tbk AdvSpan tbk SPANISH MEDIA PradaMuseum avi etC Deciding How You Will Deliver Your Course Perhaps the most important deci
277. ike a single object within the outer or parent group When you ungroup the child group remains intact You might want to make child groups when you are creating a complex drawing when part of the drawing is finished group it so that you will not accidentally change or move it 94 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Gia ee Setting Object Properties Introduction ToolBook provides a rich variety of objects that you can use to create interactive applications quickly and easily You can set properties for these objects that determine appearance behavior and interactive capabilities This chapter describes how to set object properties using the Properties dialog box the Extended Properties dialog box the right click menu and the Property Browser You can also affect the behavior and interactive capabilities of objects using the Actions Editor visual programming tool or the OpenScript programming language For information see Chapter 17 Using the Actions Editor or refer to the Programming in OpenScript electronic book Understanding Properties and Extended Properties All ToolBook objects pages backgrounds fields draw objects buttons hotwords and so forth have basic properties that define their appearance and behavior While ToolBook sets a few properties such as an object s ID number most are set by you The properties you set for a button for example might includ
278. ile gt To import a fixed field file 1 Start a new book or navigate to the page in an existing book after which you want to insert the pages with imported text 2 From the Text menu choose Character The Character dialog box appears 3 Inthe Character dialog box select the font and point size for the imported text Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 255 Importing and Exporting Data Click OK From the Insert menu choose Pages a The Import dialog box appears In the Import type list select Text files txt Click Format to display the Text Format dialog box Choose Text Fixed fields from the File format options oon In the Field lengths box type the number of characters in each data field separating them with commas You can type any number of field lengths For example type 3 5 8 12 if the first data record in the source file contains four data fields with 3 5 8 and 12 characters respectively If the field lengths specified don t match those in the data file the imported text won t be divided properly among record fields 10 Click OK to return to the Import dialog box 11 Navigate to and select the file you want to import and then click OK ToolBook imports the file creating a new record field for each data field Using OpenScript You can write and execute OpenScript code using the script editor or Command window For more information about us
279. ile A text file divided into data fields of any length that are separated by a delimiter character such as a comma or a tab All the data fields in one line make up a data record Compare fixed field file Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 313 Glossary Delimiter A character such as a comma or tab that separates one data field from another in a delimited field file See also delimited field file Destination Object In a drag and drop operation the object that accepts a drop from an object that is dragged the source object See also drag and drop Destination Page The target page of a hyperlink See also hyperlink Device Channel The hardware path by which data is passed to the output device that plays it For example a sound card contains a device channel for sending audio information to speakers Device Driver A program that allows Windows to communicate with a specific piece of multimedia hardware Device drivers are installed through the Windows Control Panel See also Media Control Interface Device independent Bitmap A bitmap that appears exactly the same way regardless of the device used to display it These files have a dib file extension See also bitmap DHTML See Dynamic Hypertext Markup Language Digital A means of describing information pictures sound video or any other type of information using a series of numbers For example a photograph can be described digital
280. ilt in message User Event A generic event that you can send using the Send User Event action in the Actions Editor When you send a User event you can send data a literal value variable or expression in a single parameter See also event Value A piece of data such as text a number or a logical value For example in the following statements J oe 3456 and true are all values text of field name Joe Text value svQuantity 3456 Numerical value visible of selection true Logical value See also container Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 327 Glossary Variable A named container that holds data in action sequences and OpenScript programs See also global variable local variable and system variable Variables Window The window that displays the current values for local variables and system variables when you work in the Debugger See also Debugger local variable system variable Vector Graphics See draw type graphic Vertex Vertices The points defining the beginning and end of a segment in a path animation When you draw a path animation you click to position a vertex and ToolBook draws a segment between the vertex at the end of the path and the new vertex Video Overlay See overlay video Viewer A window that you can create in ToolBook that displays pages from any book Viewers are composed of a frame window a client area and a client window Vi
281. in events have parameters that supply additional information about the event For example the parameter ctriDown defines whether the CTRL key was pressed when an event such as a button click occurred The parameters available for a given event are listed in parentheses after the event name in the Actions Editor When you create a shared action sequence you can define parameters that the shared action sequence uses to complete any operations it performs For more information see Creating and using shared action sequences later in this chapter 208 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating Action Sequences Using the Actions Editor Object Properties You can use an object property in an expression anywhere you can use a literal value or variable In the Build Expression dialog box you can select the page and background in which you are working all named objects on the page self and target Target refers to the object that first received the message that generated the event Self refers to the object to which the action sequence belongs The options available in the Property list change depending on the object you select Special Values Special values are variables with system defined values that are available in different contexts For example the special value pi represents the mathematical constant pi approximately 3 14159 Using Variables Variables are named containers that
282. in an Image object 124 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Modifying Graphics Assigning a Graphic Resource to an Object A resource can be used multiple times in your ToolBook application For example to make your interface more graphical and consistent with other Windows applications you can apply bitmaps to various button states normal checked and so forth using the Properties for Button dialog box These bitmaps are stored as resources in a common library making them available to all other objects in the book that can use that type of resource All graphics that you use in ToolBook will be stored as resources For more information about managing graphics as resources see Chapter 19 Using Resources Storing Graphic Files in ToolBook All graphic objects are stored in a ToolBook proprietary format with persistent properties such as size and border style Modifying Graphics Like other objects graphics have properties that you can set to modify their appearance or behavior You can modify an imported graphic in several ways depending on the type of object For example you can e Change the border line style of the border of an imported graphic object that is displayed as an Image object e Convert legacy picture and paint objects to Image objects e Create transparent areas in the graphic within an Image object The following sections describe the techniques you us
283. ine its properties you must first select the object When you select an object ToolBook displays handles around the object You use the handles to align and size objects If you select multiple objects your next command or mouse action affects all of the selected objects For example you can drag them change their properties and cut or copy them as if you had selected a single object Selecting objects To Do this Select a single object Click the object Select multiple objects SHIFT click each object you want to select or drag the pointer to select the objects you want Select all the objects Go to a page or background and choose on the page or Select All from the Edit menu or press the background CTRL A Cancel a selection Click anywhere on the page away from the object Add or remove objects SHIFT click the object you want to add from a selection or remove Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 77 Working with Objects Creating Hyperlinks Hyperlinks allow the users of your application to move from one page to another A user can display a page out of sequence or even display a page in a different application All objects you can put on a page have built in hyperlink capabilities that let you connect ideas information or topics Hyperlink Button Pushbutton Trigger event Button Click Type of link Go to another page
284. ing media files to a ToolBook application It supports most standard media types is programmable using the Actions Editor and retains all functionality when Published to DHTML The Catalog also includes several other media objects with more specific functionality Among the objects you ll find are e Correct and Incorrect Feedback Objects Pop up Flash Players configured to display a Flash file for correct or incorrect feedback e Flash Media Player A player that can play Flash streaming media files with the SWF file extension e Video Player available in Native mode only A simple stage or a stage with controls that plays visual media Navigation Navigation objects are buttons and fields that enable students to move through your application and that can also display the current location Some examples include e Automatic Menu An object that automatically creates a menu that includes hotwords that jump to each named page in your book e Navigation Panel A grouped object consisting of buttons for general navigation e Hotspot Graphic An object that produces an image with areas that can be clicked You can define hyperlinks for the hotspots in the graphic which will cause navigation to a different page in a Web browser Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 69 Working with the Catalog Questions Question objects allow you to create questions that test your users on their u
285. ing the OpenScript programming language refer to the Programming in OpenScript electronic book e To import a fixed field text file use the import command with the fixed keyword and a list of field lengths Imports a fixed field text file that contains four fields import c data customer txt as fixed using 3 5 8 12 Importing Delimited Field Files In delimited field files data fields can be any length and are separated by a delimiter A delimiter isa single character such as a comma or a tab that separates data fields in a data record Data records are separated by a CRLF For example a mailing list with names and addresses that vary in length is a delimited field file John Q Franklin 124 N E 8th Street Bath WA 98842 555 160294q Sam R Jones 154 Ridge Road Bath WA 98799 412 789 64 Sally F Smith 23569 S E 91st Place Lyme WA 98679 362 5555q Figure 2 Mailing list in delimited field format 256 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Importing and Exporting Text ToolBook creates a record field for each data field in the source file s first data record the first line of the file If any data record contains more data fields than the first data record ToolBook discards the extra data If any data record contains fewer data fields than the first data record ToolBook leaves the remaining record fields blank on that page ToolBook inserts the data into record fields of
286. ings in the Properties for Question dialog box Quiz Summary ToolBook now has a new Quiz Summary feature that provides a summary of questions answered in the book There is a new category called the Quiz Summary category that contains a Quiz summary object and other objects that are likely to be used along with this quiz summary object The Quiz summary object allows you to designate which questions will be summarized based ona page range specified By default the Quiz Summary object is configured to display some general information about your questions Other information can be added or removed as needed using the various Quiz Summary components found in the Quiz Summary catalog category For details on the new Quiz Summary feature refer to the topic Using the Quiz Summary Feature in Help Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 161 a ee re Adding a Certificate to a Book Introduction You can add a certificate to your book that can be displayed when a learner completes a course This chapter describes how to add a certificate to your book The Certificate Feature The catalog category called Certificates contains a Certificate page that can be displayed when a learner completes a course The certificate page contains details such as the name of the learner and the date of completion and can be customized by the course author When used in a course that has an assessment or a qui
287. int to its name e Navigate to the page or background you select e Reorder pages using drag and drop e Select an object to make it selected in the main window e Move an object to a different layer on the page using drag and drop e Display the shortcut menu for an object with a right click e Move an object into a group using drag and drop Book Explorer x f Pages z Interaction Multiple Choice Interaction True False Certificate Backgrounds it Standard Certificate Figure 1 The Book Explorer You can select one or more objects in the Book Explorer Use CTRL click or SHIFT click to select more than one object gt To open the Book Explorer e From the View menu choose Book Explorer Adding Objects from the Catalog You can quickly add objects to a page or background At Author level you simply drag the object you want from the Catalog to your page This creates a new instance or copy of the object on your page gt To create an object on a page or background 1 Navigate to the page or background to which you want to add an object 74 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating Objects Using the Tool Palette If the Catalog is not already open click the Catalog button on the ToolBook toolbar Select a category Drag the object you want from the object pane and then drop it onto your page or background ToolBook draws an instance co
288. interactive behavior The Simulation Editor provides the tools to develop the relationship between the objects in a simulation Graphic images form the visual basis for a software simulation A captured screen graphic shows the initial appearance of the screen before an event occurs and another graphic shows the screen after an event occurs in the software program being simulated Screen images can be placed one on top of another on the page Usually one screen image is shown at a time Hiding and showing individual screen images is handled by setting the Visible property for a particular graphic or by changing the layer order to bring an object to the front In the Simulation Editor the initial visibility for a graphic is set on the Objects tab of the simulation properties dialog box An interactive simulation includes responsive objects from the ToolBook Catalog such as a buttons These objects are placed on a graphic image that shows the screen and are set to look and behave like the real object You can assign a graphic to a button that matches the appearance of a button in a screen image for example and then place the matching button on top of the screen image as shown below T ToolBook Simulating Outlook tbk File Edit view Go Insert Object Text Draw Tools Help i ll 2 9 aM nmga ala A button from the Catalog Inbox Microsoft Outlook i File Edit View Go Tools Actions Help eis assigned a graphic from a iNew d
289. interface e Chapters 4 to 9 include concepts and techniques to help you construct and customize your online learning courses e Chapters 10 to 16 describe how to use built in ToolBook features that add interactivity to your application and help you engage your learners e Chapters 17 and 18 describe the Actions Editor visual programming tool and provide tutorial style examples that demonstrate how to use it to add interactive behavior to your courses e Chapters 19 and 20 describe how to use the resource system to manage graphical elements Also included is a description of powerful features that you can use to import and export text graphics and other data e Chapter 21 presents tools that enable you to construct software simulations It also describes how to use the Sim AutoBuilder to capture activity in a software application and generate a simulation file e Chapters 22 and 23 describe how to prepare and package a course for distribution and how to distribute your course on the Internet A glossary is included at the end of this book Finding OpenScript Instruction OpenScript is the ToolBook programming language Although you can use OpenScript to extend and enhance your courses you do not need to know OpenScript to use ToolBook ToolBook has a sophisticated array of tools including the Actions Editor visual programming tool This book provides some OpenScript code examples that you can execute using the script editor or the C
290. into a Text Field You can import data from any application that creates text files and saves them in either the ASCII format or RTF a word processing program for example The ASCII format also called the text only format allows for only text characters to be contained in a file RTF files include characters and some formatting such as font and font style Text pasted from the Windows Clipboard is generally formatted as RTF For information about copying and pasting text using the Clipboard see Chapter 8 Working with Text gt To import text into a text field 1 Click a text field once to select it 2 From the Insert menu choose Text The Import Text dialog box appears 3 Inthe Import Text dialog box navigate to and select the text file you want to import and then click OK The text from the source file appears in the field and overwrites anything that was already in the field there is a warning given Exporting Text from a Text Field You can export text from a text field using the Export command on the Tools menu gt To export text from a text field 1 Select the text field from which you want to export text 2 From the Tools menu point to Export and then choose Field Text The Export Text dialog box appears 3 Inthe Export Text dialog box do the following Inthe File name box type a name for the text file Inthe List files of type list choose whether the file will be saved in ASCII format with a txt
291. ion and then incorporate it into another application the client application Because OLE objects retain information about where they were created you can double click an OLE object and edit it without leaving the client application using a hybrid user interface that includes elements of the server application For example you can create a worksheet in Microsoft Excel the server and bring it into ToolBook the client using OLE You can then double click the OLE object in ToolBook and edit the worksheet in place Using OLE you can create applications that integrate the capabilities of many different Windows programs OLE objects are different from Activex controls in that an OLE object has a server application that provides its functionality For more information about using OLE in your applications see the electronic book included with ToolBook named Advanced Features Automation extends ToolBook s functionality enabling you to access and manipulate the objects properties and methods of other Windows applications Automation allows a client application ToolBook to connect to a server application for example Microsoft Word by creating an instance of that application as an object After you have created the application object you can work with it using OpenScript in the same way you would work with any other object You can set and retrieve the object s properties and apply its methods To see an example of how Automation can be used w
292. ion or series of actions repetitively A step loop runs the same action or actions a specified number of times A conditional loop runs the same action or actions until a condition is met For example if you want to keep prompting users for input until they provide the correct answer you can use a conditional loop Properties for Step Loop Loop Step loop Choose a variable to use in the step loop Start variable at this value Properties for Conditional Loop Loop 0 al General Increment it by this amount 1 E Loop while the condition below is true Until t reaches this value i Condition Figure 7 The Properties for Step Loop and Properties for Conditional Loop dialog boxes Setting Properties for Actions For each action there is a Properties dialog box where you can set options and refine behavior The options displayed in this dialog box vary depending on the behavior you have chosen to insert gt To open the Properties dialog box for an action e Inthe Actions Editor do one of the following Select the action and then click the Action Properties button Ej on the Actions Editor toolbar m Click the name of the event on the first line of an action sequence Select the action and then choose Properties from the Action menu 206 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating Action Sequences Using the Actions Editor Creating Valid Actions An action wi
293. ion prohibited 229 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples Select the object labeled About variables and click the Properties button on the toolbar On the Graphics tab note that there are two graphics assigned to the button one for its normal state and one for its checked state You will create an action sequence for this object that determines whether the page About variables has been visited and if it has changes the state of the button to checked Figure 3 shows the action sequence for Example 3 ToolBook executes the action sequence as follows First ToolBook checks the visited property of page About variables If this property is equal to true the user has visited the page ToolBook then changes the state of the About variables button to checked by setting its checked property to true If the page has not been visited ToolBook does not change the state of the button Actions Editor Button About variables File Edit View Insert Action Tools Help W B a X E T Lvs Parameters mouse mousey shiftD own ctriD own Comment If visited of page About variables true J Set Variable 3 Set checked of Self to true gt Else a Set checked of Self to false Endif Prompts Navigation Scoring and Tracking Control Figure 3 Full action sequence for Example 3 Building the Action Sequence Building this action sequence shows you how to e Select an event e Define conditions for behavior e Change the v
294. ire ToolBook system System Variable A variable that maintains its value for the duration of an ToolBook instance or session Any handler that declares the system variable can access and change its value during a session See also handler local variable global variable Tab 1 A character in text that ToolBook uses to align text in fields Tabs are set using the Paragraph dialog box To type a tab character in a field press CTRL TAB See also field 2 The TAB key Pressing TAB moves the focus between buttons editable fields and combo boxes See also tab order Tab Order The order in which ToolBook moves the focus between buttons and editable fields when a user presses the TAB key The tab order can be modified by changing the layer order of objects See also focus layer tab Target A system property that specifies which object received the current message You cannot set this property See also system properties Target Book The book into which pages are imported from another book Target Window The viewer in which ToolBook executes commands and searches for objects The commands can affect any page background or object displayed in the viewer or the viewer itself See also viewer Template A prebuilt book that you customize by adding content Text Field A ToolBook object that holds text A text field has properties that determine its appearance and behavior Textline One data element out of a text string separated by carriage
295. is 0 ToolBook runs the Display Popup text action that follows Finally the Set variable action increases the value of g_HintCounter by 1 Actions Editor Button Hint File Edit View Insert Action Tools Be Blo o xK amp t 2 x Ger l l On cll Pamete mousex mousey shiftD own ctriD own D gt If q_HintCounter 0 2 Set Variable E Display popup text This is your first hint D Else if g_HintCounter 1 Help Execute Shared Actions Object E Display popup text This is your second hint Prompts Else Navigation E Display popup text Sorry no more hints Scoring and Tracking Endif Media JE Set g_HintCounter to g_HintCounter 1 Control Variables Local Variables Global Variables Available global variables Variable name Initial Value q_HintCounter 0 al Initialize variable as an amay Save variable s value to LMS between sessions Initial value fo Figure 2 Full action sequence for Example 2 Tip To make it easier to distinguish global variables from local variables the names of global variables are often prefixed with an identifier such as g_ Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 225 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples Building the Action Sequence Building this action sequence shows you how to e Select an event e Define a variable and change its value e Define
296. ited 245 Using Resources The resources listed in the Choose Graphic dialog box include all the resources of the selected type that have been imported into the current book Any new resources you import are added to the book s resource list 5 Do one of the following To use an existing resource select the graphic you want in the graphical list of resources To import anew resource click Import In the Import Graphic or Import Resource dialog box locate the graphic file you want and click OK then select the resource in the graphical list of resources Click OK to close the Choose Graphic dialog box Optional Under Graphic options do one or more of the following f you want the bitmap to fill the button select Stretch the graphic to fit the button You cannot stretch icons or cursors because they have a fixed size f you want the button to size itself to the graphic select Size the button to fit the graphic f you want to use the Checked graphic as the rollover graphic the graphic you see when the pointer is paused over a button select Use checked graphic as rollover graphic 8 Repeat steps 3 7 to assign graphic resources for the other button states 9 Optional Close the Properties for Button dialog box You might need to resize the button to see the graphic Using OpenScript e To apply a graphic to a button set the normalGraphic invertGraphic disabledGraphic or checkedGraphic property of a butt
297. iteral numbers and strings For example in the expression x 2 2 is a constant See also literal value string Compare variable and container Constrain The action of limiting the proportions angles or movement of an object when you create or move it on a page or background Container Anything that can be set to a value using OpenScript Variables and properties are containers Constants such as the string constant blue and expressions such as 1 2 are not containers because their values cannot be set See also constant properties variable Control Character A nonprinting character such as a tab or a carriage return linefeed which affects the appearance of text See also carriage return linefeed tab Control Structure A block of statements in a script that is run under particular circumstances such as in a loop or as a condition Control structures are defined by sets of OpenScript keywords such as if then else end do until and condition when end See also script statement Controller Card A board installed in a computer that provides a hardware link between the central processing unit and devices such as disks monitors or speakers CRLF See carriage return line feed Crop To mask or hide part of a paint object When you drag the handle of a paint object to make it smaller the paint object does not resize instead the area is cropped When you resize a picture object or draw object the entire object is resized and
298. ith ToolBook explore the Profiler Samples OLE Profiler exe Profiler is a sample application that demonstrates one use of Automation using Automation to access and manipulate programmable features in Word For more information about Profiler and Automation refer to the Profiler sample book Samples OLE Profiler pdf ADO is a high level mechanism that allows you to access the data in databases from ToolBook using OpenScript To see an example of how ADO can be used with ToolBook explore the ToolBook Quiz Builder Samples ADO Quizbldr tbk The Quiz Builder is a sample application that demonstrates one use of ADO technology using ADO to send data to and retrieve data from a Microsoft Access database For more information about the Quiz Builder and ADO refer to the Quiz Builder sample Samples ADO Quizbldr pdf Dynamic Data Exchange DDE is a Windows communication protocol two programs that support DDE can exchange data and issue commands to each other For example Microsoft Excel has a built in utility for creating charts and graphs but you can create a more flexible friendly interface in ToolBook You can maintain data in an Excel spreadsheet and send DDE commands from your ToolBook application to produce charts and graphs in Excel For more information about DDE refer to Chapter 12 Using Dynamic Data Exchange in the Programming in OpenScript electronic book Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplicatio
299. ject s color will be determined by the user s system color settings Choosing this command does not change the fill and stroke colors that you have set for the object it just overrides those settings If you clear the Use Windows Colors command ToolBook will revert to using the object s fill and stroke colors gt To use the Windows system colors for an object 1 Select the object or display a page that shares the background that will use the Windows colors 2 From the Draw menu choose Use Windows Colors Tip ToolBook can also draw a background using the dialog box color that is part of an operating system s color scheme To draw a background using a dialog box color on the Draw tab of the Properties for Background dialog box choose Use standard Windows colors and then select Use dialog box color 86 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Modifying the Appearance of Objects Making Objects Transparent You can create transparent objects or make existing objects transparent When an object is transparent objects on layers below it show through A transparent object s stroke and fill colors are also transparent For example if the transparent object is blue and an object on a lower layer is green any overlapping areas will appear as a third color that Windows blends You can use transparent objects to overlay text on objects such as titles without a box around them gt To make a
300. k Explorer for many different tasks Click an object in the Book Explorer to select this object in the main window Use drag and drop to move any object to a different layer or add an object to a group Display the properties for any object with a right click Pointing to a page in the Book Explorer will display a small preview image of the page in a pop up window Selecting a page in the Book Explorer causes navigation to that page in the main window Multiple obj ects can be selected in the Book Explorer if they have the same parent Use CTRL click or SHIFT click to select more than one object Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 41 Learning the ToolBook Interface Working with the Property and Handler Browsers ToolBook includes browsers that allow you to set or edit values gt To open one of the browsers e From the View menu point to Browsers and choose one The Property Browser The Property Browser displays and allows editing of all available properties for an object In the Property Browser an object s properties display using the OpenScript property name You should be familiar with OpenScript before using the Property Browser to edit an object s properties ke Property Browser Figure 9 The Property Browser The Handler Browser The Handler Browser displays and allows editing of handlers in the message passing hierarchy for the current object You can use the Handler Br
301. k provides several types of feedback that you can specify for question objects For example you can e Play a sound or media file e Display text e Navigate to another page in the same book or in another book e Navigate to a URL a Web address You can combine these methods and use more than one type of feedback in response to the user s choice For example you can both play a sound file and display text in a pop up window when the user selects the correct choice in a multiple choice question If you specify more than one feedback option they are executed in the order in which they appear in the bullet list above In the example given the student would hear the sound and then see the text in the pop up window By default text feedback and video feedback appear in pop up windows To designate a specific location on the page for the feedback to appear use a feedback field a universal media player or in native books a video player or a stage from the Catalog If a feedback field is on the page ToolBook will display feedback text in the feedback field by default If a video player or stage is on the page ToolBook can display video feedback in the video player or stage if you select the player or stage in the Choose Media Clip dialog box available when you click the Select media clip button on the Immediate Feedback or Delayed Feedback tab of the Properties for Question dialog box 158 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All righ
302. l 4 Figure 12 Executing a shared action sequence 214 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Managing Action Sequences Using Parameters When you create a shared action sequence you can define parameters that the shared action sequence uses to complete any operations it performs When you call the shared action sequence from another action sequence you can supply values for those parameters These may be literal values variables object properties or expressions The parameter list is only enabled if the shared action sequence accepts parameters Specify a variable to store the retum value Figure 13 Sending parameters to a shared action sequence Managing Action Sequences ToolBook provides tools you can use to validate actions to view action sequences in a text file and to test your action sequences as you build your application You can also import or export an action sequence to reuse it in another book Validating Actions Only valid actions will run at Reader level When you finish authoring you can check the validity of all the actions you ve created for a group of objects a page a background or the entire book gt To validate actions 1 From the Tools menu point to Actions and then choose Validate Actions You can also access this command from the Tools menu in the Actions Editor In the Validate actions for list select the object s to check Opti
303. l After you create an animation for an object you can use action buttons to play and reset animations Use an action trigger to trigger an object s animation and a reset trigger to reset the object s animation You can also use the Actions Editor to create an action sequence that triggers or resets an object s path or cel animation One advantage of this method is that you can set the animation to occur as part of a longer sequence of actions all activated by the same event You can also create conditional expressions and loops that determine when and how many times an animation plays Alternatively you can use OpenScript to play and stop a path animation Using an Action Trigger to Play an Animation You set the properties of an action button to define the trigger event and the action that will occur For example after you add an action trigger to a page you can add the object whose animation you want to trigger to the Objects to trigger list in the Properties for Action Trigger dialog box Then you can define the event that triggers the action and the action that will occur in this case animation of the object To choose the action that will occur for an object you can click the button under the Objects to trigger list Properties for Action Trigger A Button Company Logo A Animate Trigger on what event M When entering page M When clicked Figure 4 The Properties for Action Trigger dialog box You can also spec
304. l Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating Fields Creating a Field Using the Tool Palette There are three tools on the tool palette that you can use to draw ToolBook field objects e Field tool Use the field tool to draw a field You can draw a field on the page foreground or background e Borderless field tool Use the borderless field tool to draw a field without a border You can draw a borderless field on the page or background e Record field tool Use the record field tool to draw a record field on a background This tool is disabled when you are working on the page and becomes available when you switch to the background gt To create a field using the tool palette 1 From the View menu point to Palettes and choose Tool 2 Choose one of the field tools 3 On your page hold down the mouse button as you drag to draw a field Creating a Field Using OpenScript You can write and execute OpenScript code using the script editor or Command window For more information about using the OpenScript programming language refer to the Programming in OpenScript electronic book e Use the draw command to draw a field or record field Fields are measured in page units For example draw field from 1000 500 to 2000 3000 draw recordField from 1000 500 to 2000 3000 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 105 Working with Text Setting Field Properties
305. l Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 177 Adding Audio and Video Files Video players AVI files digital video Allow you more control over the appearance of the object on the page in ToolBook runtime To play certain types of media files users must load the proper software drivers on their computers Allow limited programming with the Actions Editor visual programming tool Inline clip players Specific audio digital video and still image files as listed in the Catalog description Can be inserted in a text field so that button scrolls with text similar to a hotword To play certain types of media files users must install the proper software drivers on their computers Allow limited programming with the Actions Editor visual programming tool Will play other file formats if you install proper MCI software drivers Using the Universal Media Player The Universal Media Player is the easiest to use and most versatile of all of the media player objects available in the Catalog It supports a wide variety of digital video audio and streaming media file formats including content created by Adobe Captivate You simply choose the file to display and ToolBook automatically presents the appropriate player at Reader level For example if you select a Microsoft Streaming Media file ToolBook uses the Windows Media Player ActiveX control to play the file Media types
306. lbar 3 Click the Stroke Color button Z 4 Choose the colors you want for the selected text Using OpenScript e The strokeColor property defines the default color of text in a field or record field The fillColor property defines the color of the area within the field You can specify a color by its OpenScript keyword such as yellow or green or you can use RGB red green blue or HLS hue lightness saturation values For example strokeColor of selectedText blu fillColor of field address yellow rgbStroke of selection 0 255 0 Sets text color to green Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 113 Working with Text Formatting Paragraph Styles By changing a field s paragraph settings you can change the appearance of the field and the text it contains Paragraph style always applies to an entire field unlike character style which can be used to format specific characters You can change e Text alignment e Spacing between lines of text e Tab settings for left aligned or decimal aligned text e Left right and first line indents starting at the edge of the field Note Paragraph style applies to every instance of a record field if you center text in a record field on one page the text in that record field is centered on every page gt To format paragraph style Using the interface 1 Select the field and then click the Properties button on the ToolB
307. lick menu choose Properties On the General tab select Read only Click OK PY PM SY Installing and Testing your Application If you are distributing your application via the Internet or an intranet test your application for any unforeseen configuration issues by using the versions of Web browsers your users are likely to use Particular points to check include e Media Make sure that the application runs in a Web browser and that your media clips play correctly e Hyperlinks Make sure that the hyperlinks to the pages within your application and the hyperlinks to URLs work Be sure to test image maps and the jumps on your map or contents pages e Page navigation Make sure that the navigation buttons in your application work To avoid losing your users in hyperspace make sure that page navigation is clear and that you have provided ways for users to return to the pages they were viewing If you have created distribution CDs or a network directory containing setup files install and test your application Test on a system that does not have any other version of ToolBook installed to ensure that the application installs correctly and that all media files play gt To test your application s installation program 1 Insert the CD ROM into your computer 2 From the Start menu choose Run 3 Inthe Run dialog box type d Setup exe The drive letter may differ use the appropriate letter for your CD ROM drive 4 Click OK and
308. lick the Catalog button on the ToolBook toolbar In the Scoring and Tracking category select the Show Delayed Feedback object Drag the Show Delayed Feedback object from the object pane and then drop it onto your page With the object selected click the Extended Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar The Properties for Play Feedback dialog box appears Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Specifying Feedback 5 Inthe Object to score list select the name of the question object for which you want to display delayed feedback 6 Click OK Using the Actions Editor to Specify Feedback You can use the Actions Editor to specify immediate and delayed feedback for a question Two question events are available in the Actions Editor On question answered and On question scored The On question answered event corresponds to immediate feedback and the On question scored event corresponds to delayed feedback These events allow you to define feedback behavior that can be more complex than the behavior available on the Feedback tabs in the Properties for Question dialog box For example you could implement an action sequence that stores the number of attempts a student makes before choosing the correct answer to a question and then display text to the student that shows the number of attempts made Action sequences that you create to respond to question events will work in conjunction with the sett
309. licks the Hint button you need to track the number of times the user clicks this button Since the value of the variable g HintCounter corresponds with the number of clicks you need to determine the value of g_HintCounter before displaying a hint You can insert a condition to create a conditional expression that tests the value of g_HintCounter gt To insert a condition 1 From the Insert menu point to Condition and then choose If 226 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Example 2 Using Variables 2 If the Properties for Condition dialog box does not open automatically click the Properties button on the Actions Editor toolbar 3 You can type g HintCounter 0 or you can use the lists in the Build Expression dialog box to create the same expression Click the Build expression button to open the Build Expression dialog box in the Select the type of item to insert list select Variables and parameters in the Select a variable or parameter list select g HintCounter click Insert into Expression Position the insertion point after g HintCounter in the expression box and then type 0 Click OK Click OK to close the Properties for Condition dialog box Using the skills learned above insert two more conditions Else if g HintCounter 1 Else To display a hint to a user you need to show text on the page This action sequence uses popup text to display a hint to a
310. ll function at Reader level only if it is valid that is if you have provided all the information necessary for the action to run ToolBook provides immediate feedback if the actions you create are invalid As you create an action sequence ToolBook displays a small warning symbol beside an invalid action and describes why the action is invalid in the status bar Actions Editor Page Loop File Edit View Insert Action Tools Help 2B XK Bt X a On load page No parameters If w End if 4 mT Action invalid There is no conditional expression defined Figure 8 Invalid action with status bar message You can also check the validity of all actions in the book at once using the Validate Actions command on the Tools menu point to Actions and then choose Validate Actions For more information about valid actions see Validating actions later in this chapter Building Expressions When you create an action you can use an expression in place of a literal value such as a number or word In an expression you can combine values variables object properties and literal values using operators and functions to produce a result There are three broad types of expressions e Arithmetic Expressions These are expressions that use arithmetic operators and functions to combine numbers or variables and object properties whose values are numbers and produce a numerical result The following are examples of arithmetic expressi
311. ll make the object perform a task or return information about the object You can define the parameters that the action method uses to complete any operation it performs See also action sequence parameter shared action sequence Action Sequence One or more behaviors that you create in the Actions Editor that ToolBook carries out in the order you specify Unlike an OpenScript program an action sequence will Publish to Web an Internet technology that runs in a Web browser See also Actions Editor DHTML Publish to Web Actions Editor ToolBook s visual programming tool In the Actions Editor you use familiar interface elements such as menus to add behavior to your ToolBook application and this behavior will Publish to Web See also action action sequence DHTML shared action sequence Publish to Web Activated A property of a field or record field that enables the field to perform an action when a user clicks it When a field is activated a user cannot enter text in it See also field record field ActiveX Control A software component that you can include in your ToolBook application to add custom functionality You can respond to an ActiveX event or manipulate its properties and methods in an action sequence or an OpenScript program ActiveX Data Objects ADO A high level mechanism that allows you to access the data in databases from ToolBook using OpenScript See also Automation AICC See Aviation Industry Computer Based Training Commi
312. ll tab through objects on a page by setting tab order in the Set Tab Order dialog box and by changing the layer number of objects in the Properties dialog box gt To set the tab order using the Set Tab Order dialog box 1 Select all the objects for which you want to define the tab order 2 From the Draw menu point to Layer and then choose Set Tab Order 3 Inthe Set Tab Order dialog box specify the starting layer and whether the order will follow from left to right or top to bottom 4 Click OK You can also define a tab order by specifying the layer for each object in the Properties dialog box gt To set the tab order by changing layer numbers in the Properties dialog box 1 Select the object that is to receive the focus first and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar 2 Inthe Layer box type a number that is smaller than the layer number of any other fields or buttons to which users will tab 3 Repeat this procedure for the remaining objects in the order you want tabbing to occur giving each object an incrementally higher layer number Then switch to Reader level and test the tab order by pressing TAB and observing where the focus moves Consider the following when you define the tab order e Try to follow a left to right and top to bottom reading pattern to organize fields and other objects on a page e If too many fields and buttons appear on a page a user might have trouble finding the focus wh
313. llow you to specify properties that determine an object s appearance and behavior e The Actions Editor Allows you to add interactive behavior to your ToolBook applications that will be Published as Web pages e Menu bar Allows you to execute commands and access dialog boxes e Toolbar Provides a collection of buttons that you can use as shortcuts for commonly used menu commands e Status bar Shows you the names of objects Help text for menu commands the current mouse position and the current mode of deployment The right side of the bar provides a quick way to select the current page and contains tools that you can use to navigate between pages e Rulers Show you the exact size and position of objects e Grid Displays a matrix of dots that helps you size and position objects precisely e Right click menus Appear when you right click an object providing quick access to common settings and dialog boxes You can hide and show each of these tools and customize their appearance The following sections describe in detail each interface element s function and capabilities Working with the Menu Bar You work with the ToolBook menu bar as you would work with any Windows menu bar Simply click the menu name and choose a command from the menu You can modify how the menu bar appears at Reader level for more information see the electronic book included with ToolBook Advanced Features Working with the Toolbar The toolbar
314. llustration created in a drawing program that maps the shapes you draw on an invisible grid and stores them as a set of instructions Drop Down Menu A menu that descends from the menu bar when clicked For example when a user clicks File in the menu bar the File drop down menu descends Dynamic Data Exchange DDE A communication protocol to exchange data and commands between Windows applications 314 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Uninstalling an Application Dynamic Hypertext Markup Language DHTML A technology that uses tags to specify the properties and behavior of an HTML document DHTML extends functionality available in HTML and enables interactive behavior for such features as buttons animations actions and responses ToolBook can Publish an application to DHTML by using Publish to Web See also Publish to Web Dynamic Link Library DLL A separate function library that a Windows application can call to perform tasks DLLs are used to add capabilities not available directly from ToolBook Editable A property of combo boxes text fields and record fields that specifies whether a user can type text at Reader level See also text field record field Embedded Object An object that has been embedded in another application such as ToolBook using object linking and embedding OLE technology Enabled A property of buttons text fields and record fields that determines whether
315. log box Using OpenScript e You can use the scrollable sortitems editable ineCount and enabled properties to format your combo box scrollable of comboBox Long List true sortItems of comboBox Long List true editable of comboBox Long List false enabled of comboBox Long List true lineCount of comboBox Long List 8 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 145 Working with List Boxes and Combo Boxes Adding Text to Combo Boxes You can add text to a combo box by typing in the field or by using OpenScript gt To enter text in a combo box Using the interface 1 Select the combo box you have added to the page 2 Toenter default text that will appear in the edit box double click inside the edit box to display an insertion point and then type your text 3 Click the pushbutton to display the drop down list ToolBook places the insertion point in the drop down list Type as many items as you want pressing ENTER after each item If you want to change the character formatting of the text in the drop down list select the list choose Character from the Text menu and then enter your changes in the Character dialog box 6 When you have finished click outside the combo box The drop down list box closes Using OpenScript e Use the dropDownltems property to add items to the drop down list If you want default text to appear in the edit box use the text property
316. lp For example if you make a mistake you can click the Undo button to reverse the changes you made You can also use the Properties dialog box to specify behavior that extends beyond individual objects For example you can set properties for a page a background and a book ToolBook also provides Properties for Lesson dialog box where you can set scoring and logging options gt To display the Properties dialog box e Do one of the following From the Object menu choose one of the properties options m Click the Properties button ey on the ToolBook toolbar m Right click an object and then click the Properties button on the right click menu Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 39 Learning the ToolBook Interface m Press SHIFT F6 Working with the Extended Properties Dialog Box Many objects from the Catalog have extended properties that define their behavior In addition to the Properties dialog box these objects have an Extended Properties dialog box where you can specify and refine these extended capabilities gt To display an object s Extended Properties dialog box e Do one of the following With the object selected from the Object menu choose the extended properties command For example if a true false question is selected choose Properties for True False Question With the object selected click the Extended Properties button a on the ToolBook tool
317. ls you need to add and modify objects in ToolBook About Objects All the visual elements of your application buttons fields graphics viewers and even the pages and backgrounds are objects You build your application by creating objects specifying their properties and defining how they will work together ToolBook offers a variety of objects with built in functions for quick and easy authoring But you arent limited to these preprogrammed features You can position group or change the properties of any object to affect its appearance and behavior When an object is created or otherwise added to a book ToolBook gives the object a unique ID number that you can use to distinguish it from other objects You can give a name to an object but you cannot change its ID number Note It is a good idea to assign each object in your book a unique name In the Actions Editor unnamed objects will not appear in lists of available objects A few types of Catalog objects allow you to select from the named objects on a page Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 73 Working with Objects Using the Book Explorer The interactive Book Explorer is a browser that provides a convenient way to work with objects and their properties All of the pages and objects in a book are displayed in outline format in the Book Explorer window In this browser you can e See a small preview image of a page when you po
318. lso called a vector or draw type graphic A graphic imported or pasted from the Clipboard that was created in a draw program Picture objects can be resized in ToolBook Compare draw object paint object Pixel Short for picture element The smallest element that display or print hardware and software can manipulate in creating letters numbers or graphics Pixel size is dependent on the resolution of the display device Screen units are measured in pixels Compare page units Plug In A software program that adds functionality to a Web browser plays sounds or digital video or runs specific types of files over the Internet A plug in is stored on your computer and will open automatically when you request your browser to perform a function enabled by the plug in Point Size A typographical unit of measurement for font size One point is equal to 1 72 inch 322 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Uninstalling an Application Pointer A symbol that shows the location of the cursor onscreen and that changes shape to indicate special locations and processes For example the pointer can be a selection tool the Windows hourglass or an I beam Polygon An enclosed object with equal angles and a varying number of sides of equal length Compare irregular polygon Pop Up Menu A menu that can appear anywhere onscreen within its own window Pop Up Window A window that generally appears in front of it
319. ly by treating it asa series of very small dots and recording the position color and lightness of each dot as a number Using the appropriate process the numbers can be passed to a program that can use them to recreate the dots and thereby recreate the photograph Digital Video Video converted into a digital format and stored as a file Display Device The combination of video card and video driver that determines a system s color capability Dithered Color A color that appears on the screen as a mixture of different solid colors that attempts to approximate the original color DLL See dynamic link library drag and drop The process of clicking an object dragging to another location on the page and releasing the mouse Drag and drop is often used as an intuitive visual interface for such operations as moving or deleting objects Drag Image The image that is displayed during a drag and drop operation when the pointer is over a potential destination object See also destination object drag and drop Draw Direct Drawing an object directly on the screen rather than on an offscreen bitmap that is then transferred to the screen By default new objects are drawn directly Compare offscreen image Draw Object In ToolBook draw objects are the arc angled line curve ellipse regular and irregular polygon line pie rectangle and rounded rectangle Compare paint object picture object Draw Type Graphic Also known as a vector graphic An i
320. me with the hardware and software components necessary for developing or playing media files Depending on how you plan to use media in your courseware you will need some or all of the following items e Speakers or headphones to play audio e Files required to play digital video such as video playback drivers and video codecs software that compresses and decompresses video files e Additional files required to play media or other content on the Internet for example browser plug ins like RealPlayer Note You don t need to be a video technician or graphic artist to create compelling courseware for education and training Many companies now sell images video clips and sounds that you can copy into your ToolBook application Usually the purchase of a company s product that contains media files gives you the right to publish them in your application Sometimes however you must agree to specific licensing requirements Never assume that you have rights to publish media files always read the product s documentation When in doubt consult the product s manufacturer Installing ToolBook To install ToolBook and its associated files use the Setup program which provides options and instructions for each step The Setup program decompresses the files and transfers them to your hard disk To install using the setup program provided to you double click on the installer file and follow the prompts shown on the screen Copyright 2012
321. menu The Edit Object window is displayed which contains a description of the object Using Drag and Drop Authoring To author using the Catalog simply drag the object you want from the Catalog to a page or background This drag and drop operation copies the object into your application Some Catalog objects can be dropped on objects other than a page or background Drop behavior for Catalog objects Dropping this On this Does this Question object Page or background Creates a question object at the pointer position The question s Extended Properties dialog box opens optionally Object with Page or background Creates an object at the pointer position The extended properties object s Extended Properties dialog box opens optionally When an object in the Catalog has extended properties ToolBook automatically opens its Extended Properties dialog box after you drag the object to a page or background You might find this feature convenient when you are first learning to use ToolBook To disable this feature choose Options from the View menu then on the Interface tab in the ToolBook Options dialog box clear the Show extended properties dialog box after adding object to book checkbox and then click OK Finding the Right Object You can identify an object you want in the Catalog by reading a pop up description Point at any object in the Catalog window and a description of the object appears in a pop u
322. mmed Message 1 A communication ToolBook sends to an object to indicate that an event has occurred 2 A warning or other information displayed by Windows or ToolBook that alerts a user to a problem and possible corrections Metafile Sometimes called a vector graphic A file that defines an image as a series of instructions instead of as a collection of pixels as in a bitmap or paint object A metafile is exported from a Windows drawing program and when imported into ToolBook becomes a picture object See also picture object MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface A series of commands sent to a synthesizer or sound card that controls pitch length volume and so on MIDI is not recorded sound rather it is sound that is created digitally Modal A way of displaying a window so the user cannot perform any other action outside the window before closing it For example most dialog boxes are modal until you close the dialog box you cannot return to the program that displayed it Compare nonmodal MP3 A file extension for the MPEG audio level 3 file format MP3 files are small audio files that can be transferred across the Internet easily The Universal Media Player in the Media Players category of the Catalog can play MP3 files Multimedia Information in different formats text graphics sound video and animation that you can use in computer based applications See also animation digital video media file MP3 MIDI wave audi
323. more information about using the AutoPackager see Using the AutoPackager later in this chapter Preparing Files for CD ROM You prepare files for distribution on CD ROM using the ToolBook AutoPackager Before using the AutoPackager you can optimize the performance of your application by saving each book in the most efficient format for use by CD ROM drives When you choose to optimize for CDROM ToolBook saves related data such as a page and its objects graphics and resources in close proximity on the CD ROM to enable faster access Keep in mind that an application can be composed of multiple books To optimize an application for CD ROM you optimize each book separately Optimizing a book for CD ROM takes more time than a normal save up to five times longer In addition if you make changes to the book after optimization you must optimize the book again Therefore make optimizing for CD ROM one of the last steps in preparing your application for the AutoPackager gt To optimize a book for CD ROM 1 Save the book under a new name as described in Compressing your book earlier in this chapter From the File menu choose Save As Enter or navigate to the book s original file name Select Optimize for CD ROM and then click OK Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 303 Preparing Native ToolBook Applications for Release Using a Cache File for a CD ROM Application When yo
324. n a simulation the Simulation Editor includes an option to display instructions for an individual step and this text will be replaced by the instructions for the following step when the learner continues to the next step You can enter the text for an individual step in the Properties for Step dialog box to show the appropriate text for the selected step as shown below under Specify instructions Properties for Step Specify a name for this step Instructions Specify instructions to display for this step when in this mode Note that each step is scored as a separate question V Score this step Maximum score Limit time V Limit attempts practice mode Maximum attempts a An attempt is counted every time feedback is displayed for the step Figure 6 Entering custom instructions for a step in a simulation Each step has a trigger event that ends the step You can include multiple trigger events in a step to handle all types of user interaction Trigger events are described in the next section A step may end in one of these ways e Press a specific button or key an assigned trigger event e Click a button designated as the Continue button indicated on the Controls tab of Simulation Properties dialog box e Set a timed delay to occur before automatic navigation to the next step the number of seconds for the delay is a property of the simulation You may combine the three options listed above in any way For exam
325. n an existing book after which you want to insert the imported book choose Pages from the Insert menu In the Import dialog box select ToolBook files bk in the Import type list Navigate to and select the book file you want to import in the File name box and then click Open ToolBook inserts all pages and backgrounds from the selected book into the current book Using OpenScript e To import a book use the import command and specify a file name with the tbk extension Navigates to page 3 go to page 3 Imports book after current page import book c mybooks template tbk 262 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Importing Books and Pages Importing Pages You can import a page or range of pages from another book into a new or existing book You can import the page with its background or you can import the page onto the current background If you import a page or range of pages into an existing book ToolBook inserts the pages after the current page of the current book ToolBook changes the page numbers of the pages in the current book but does not change page ID numbers or background ID numbers For details see the preceding section Importing books If you import pages that contain record field text but dont import the corresponding backgrounds ToolBook follows these rules in sequence to determine where to place the record field text 1 Matching record field names ToolBook puts
326. n correctly the next step in the simulation displays automatically For an incorrect answer attempt feedback text may display and the learner can make another attempt to complete the step until the limit for the number of answer attempts is reached If the simulation includes a Continue button this button allows the learner to go on to the next step when the maximum number of incorrect answer attempts is reached The score for a learner s interaction with a practice simulation will be calculated if the property Score in practice mode is set to Yes Assessment Mode In assessment mode the learner is only allowed one attempt to complete each step in the simulation When the learner completes the step correctly the simulation will automatically move on to the next step If the learner chooses the wrong interaction for the step feedback for that step may display and the learner may click the Continue button to go on to the next step Alternatively the simulation may include a timed delay for navigation to the next step In assessment mode the simulation is always scored Demonstration Mode A demonstration shows the learner how to complete a software procedure or task There is no input from the learner during a demonstration You can use one or both of the following methods to provide navigation during a demonstration simulation e Set a specified number of seconds for each step in the demonstration to display e Use a Continue button or a
327. n le on the ToolBook toolbar m Press F2 For more information about using Catalog objects to build an application see Chapter 5 Working with the Catalog Working with the ToolBook Coach The ToolBook Coach is a convenient reference tool that provides context sensitive information as you re authoring The Coach displays tips and suggestions about the page you re working on step by step procedures for any object you select and design guidance Leave the Coach open as you work and note how the information in the Coach window changes dynamically according to the object and page you re working with gt To display the Coach e From the Help menu choose Coach ToolBook Coach Multiple choice buttons allow the user to click a button to choose an answer To display a question or statement drag a text field from the Catalog drop it on the page and then enter your text If you want to add an additional answer choice select one answer button and choose Duplicate from the Edit menu Quick Steps 1 On the Answers tab of the Properties dialog box select one button caption and then click the Edit button 2 Enter answer text to be displayed on the button 3 Click the Incorrect or Correct button to switch the setting for this answer 4 Click OK to close the Edit the Answer dialog box 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for the remaining answers 6 Specify any other options you want and then click OK to close the Properties dialog box Fi
328. n object transparent 1 Select the object you want to make transparent 2 From the Draw menu choose Transparent Tips In general to make an object invisible set its Fill and Stroke colors to white and then make it Transparent The white portions become completely see through However if the object is a draw object rectangle ellipse polygon etc the process is slightly different Using the above process will result in a semi transparent milky white fill color The solution for draw objects is to set the Line Style to none and set the Pattern to none If you lose an invisible object on the screen choose Select All from the Edit menu ToolBook displays handles for all objects on the page Filling an Object with a Pattern When you draw enclosed shapes such as rectangles polygons and pie wedges you can give them a look of greater depth by filling them with a pattern Use one of the 128 ToolBook patterns to fill your objects with bricks stripes or other abstract shapes ToolBook draws the pattern using the current stroke color You will achieve a subtle effect if the stroke color is close in hue to the fill color For greater contrast choose a stroke color that is much darker or lighter than the fill color gt To fill an object with a pattern 1 Select the object 2 Click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar 3 On the Draw tab in the Pattern list select a pattern 4 Optional Close the Properties dialog bo
329. n prohibited 29 Basic Concepts Extending OpenScript with Dynamic Link Libraries To extend the capabilities of OpenScript you can call dynamic link libraries DLLs which are libraries of functions available to any Windows program Windows includes a number of DLLs that you Can call to interact directly with Windows for example you can display windows receive Windows messages directly or determine the current state of the system In addition third party vendors often provide DLLs as a way for you to use their products For details about how to call the DLLs supplied with another product refer to the documentation that came with the product For more information about DLLs and how to use them to extend the capabilities of OpenScript see Chapter 13 Using dynamic link libraries in the Programming in OpenScript electronic book Using Resources in Your Application You can customize the appearance of your application s interface by importing resources such as cursors icons graphics fonts menus and color palettes For example you can import e A cursor to display under certain circumstances for instance when the pointer is paused over an object that cannot be clicked e Icons or bitmaps to use as graphics on buttons You can import these resources from other Windows programs For more information about resources and how they can customize your application see Chapter 19 Using Resources 30 Copyright 2012
330. nce Figure 6 shows an action sequence with two conditional structures The expression of the first structure tests whether the value entered in the text field Days is a number from 1 to 7 If this expression is true ToolBook executes the expression of the second conditional structure which tests whether the value entered in the Text field Minutes is a number between 1 and 200 In both structures if the conditional expression evaluates to false ToolBook prompts the user to enter a value that fits within the defined range Actions Editor Button Calculate File Edit View Insert Action Tools Help oS BO XK EAT e Parameters mousex mouse y shiftDown ctriD own a Comment a Q If text of field Days lt 7 and text of field Days gt 1 LX Set Variable gt If text of field Minutes gt 1 and text of field Minutes lt 200 3 Execute Shared Actions TimelnMinutes store return value in Time Display alert In a year you could save amp amp Time amp amp hours gt Else A Display alert Please entere the number of minutes between 1 and 200 Endif gt Else A Display alert Please enter the number of days between 1 and 7 Endif Execute Shared Actions m Figure 6 Using conditions in an action sequence Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 205 Using the Actions Editor Loops You can add a loop to your action sequence to run an act
331. nce If checked of Button New user From the Insert menu point to Action point to Navigation and choose Go to Page In the Properties for Action dialog box do the following a Inthe Select the type of navigation list select J ump to page b Inthe Select the page to navigate to list select Next page c Click OK Select the second conditional expression Else if checked of Button Advanced user From the Insert menu point to Action point to Navigation and then choose Go to Page In the Properties for Action dialog box do the following a Inthe Select the type of navigation list select J ump to page b Inthe Select the page to navigate to list select Specific page 222 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Example 1 Using Conditions c Inthe Select a specific page box click the Choose page button d Inthe Choose Page dialog box select Page Contents and then click OK 6 Inthe Properties for Action dialog box click OK If a user fails to select a radio button before clicking continue you need to prompt the user to select an option There are several options you can choose from to display a message to users This action sequence uses the Display alert action to create a dialog box with a note to the user gt To insert the Display alert action 1 Select the Else condition 2 From the Insert menu point to Action point to Prompts and then choose Display Alert
332. nd record fields see Chapter 8 Working with Text Note Windows uses the ANSI American National Standards Institute character set for displaying characters If you import data from text files into ToolBook you may need to retype some special characters For details about special characters see Inserting special characters in Chapter 8 Working with text Importing Fixed Field Files In fixed field files the number of characters in each data field of the source file determines where one data field ends and another begins Whenever ToolBook finds a record separator such as a Carriage return linefeed CRLF it creates a new page and imports data from subsequent data fields into the record fields on that page until it finds another record separator For example most spreadsheet applications can save data as text in fixed field files Each cell or column in the spreadsheet is a data field with a fixed number of characters and each row is a data record 1 88 6 980 98 187 45 687 98 6 765 55q 2 88 1 260 67 220 67 695 33 6 944 674 3 88 1 438 22 250 98 161 15 1 686 694 4 88 1 799 26 283 40 125 99 1 389 974 Figure 1 Table saved in fixed field format When you import a fixed field file you indicate how many data fields are in a data record by specifying the length of each field ToolBook uses the information about data field sizes as a template so you must determine the precise length of each data field before you import the f
333. nd Modifying Resources The Resource Manager dialog box appears Resource Manager bitmap ID 122 bitmap ID 123 bitmap ID 124 bitmap ID 125 bitmap ID 126 bitmap ID 127 bitmap ID 128 bitmap TBSTYLE 01EB8785E5DE9F3E bitmap TBSTYLE 01EB8785CFB3F7B1 2 Inthe Available resources list choose the type of resource you want to create or modify 3 Do one of the following m If you re creating a new resource click New f you re editing an existing resource select the resource from the list and then click Edit If available a utility appears so you can create or modify the resource Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 243 Using Resources You can also duplicate resources that you have made available to a book For example if you have an existing cursor resource that you want to use ina slightly modified form you can duplicate the existing resource edit the copy and give it a unique name gt To duplicate a resource 1 From the Object menu choose Resources The Resource Manager dialog box appears In the Available resources list select the type of resource you want to duplicate In the graphical list of resources select the resource you want to duplicate Click Duplicate ToolBook duplicates the resource Optional Select the new resource and then click Edit to modify it Click Close to close the Resource Manager dialog box
334. nd reset buttons you can hide and show objects play an animation and create dynamic effects You can trigger an action interactively by setting the effect to occur when the user clicks the action trigger at Reader level Alternatively you can trigger an action automatically by setting the effect to occur when the user enters the page Among the action buttons you ll find are e Action Trigger A button that can show hide animate and trigger another object e Reset Trigger A button that can reset another object e Delay A button that delays the next action for a specified amount of time Scoring and Tracking Evaluation buttons perform common tasks in courseware applications such as submitting a lesson score to a learning management system restarting a lesson checking the learner s response or resetting a page You use these objects for specific purposes on a page in a lesson Examples of scoring buttons include e Score Page A button that displays the score for all of the question objects on the page e Reset Page A button that resets the questions on the current page and clears any score that the student has accumulated for the page Session information is preserved and a log entry is made indicating that the page was reset e Score Quiz A button that displays the final score for a quiz or lesson e Score Field A text field that you can use in conjunction with a question object and a score button to display a score
335. nderstanding of your content You can customize question objects in many ways These objects have built in behavior that provides feedback to your users supplies you with information on how your users interacted with the question and interacts with a learning management system to track the behavior of groups of learners Among the question objects provided with ToolBook are the following e Match items object A button set that allows the user to drag an arrow to define pairs of matching items e Multiple choice object A button set that allows the user to select the correct answer by clicking one of several available choices e __ Fill in the blank object A field that allows the user to enter text for an answer and then evaluates whether the text is correct Quiz Summary The Quiz Summary category contains one Quiz Summary object and a variety of individual text components you can add to your summary object Among the Quiz Summary objects provided with ToolBook are the following e Quiz Summary The Quiz Summary object allows you to display a summary of the questions answered You will find various Field components within the Quiz Summary catalog category which can be added to your Quiz Summary object in order to include additional data about your questions The following objects from the Quiz Summary category can be added as a component of a Quiz Summary object Question Name Field A field object that will display the name assi
336. nds Specify the position and size of the object Font Set character formatting information for text fields record fields and buttons Paragraph Set paragraph alignment tabs and spacing information for fields Behavior Specify the object s behavior at run time such as whether a user can type in a field or whether a button is enabled at run time Drag amp Drop Specify the appearance and behavior of the object when it is dragged or dropped at Reader level To set an object s properties Select the object and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar Click a tab to view the properties page containing the category of property you want to set o N y Choose or enter the properties or settings you want If you type a value in a box you must press ENTER press TAB or click in another field before the changes will take effect 4 Optional Click a button on the toolbar to set other available properties of the selected object such as Extended Properties Hyperlink and Path Animation 5 More information about the buttons on the Properties dialog box toolbar is available in the following section 96 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Using the Properties Dialog Box 6 Optional Close the Properties dialog box Tip After you customize an object by setting its properties you can copy it to the My Objects category of the Catalog and use it again later Co
337. ne page is sliding off to the left while another page slides in from the right Transition effects are specified in the Hyperlink dialog box gt To specify a transition effect 1 Select the object or word that contains the hyperlink to another page for example the Next button in a navigation panel From the Object menu choose Hyperlink In the Type of link list select Go to another page Under Style select a transition effect from the Transition effect list Click Test to see a sample of the selected effect optional 5 Click OK Adding Navigation Behavior to an Object Using the Actions Editor you can program any ToolBook object to send a user to another page book or URL or to exit from a lesson One of the benefits of using an action sequence to navigate is that you can specify a destination based on a specific condition or set of conditions You can use the Actions Editor to define action properties such as destination page and transition effects and then add the action to an object s action sequence For more information about programming in the Actions Editor see Chapter 17 Using the Actions Editor and Chapter 18 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples gt To add a navigation action to an object s action sequence 1 Select the object 2 From the Object menu choose Actions The Actions Editor appears In the Event list select the event that activates the action sequence From the Insert menu point
338. nes and irregular polygons Choose the angled line or irregular polygon 17 tool from the tool palette ok 2 Point where you want the shape to start and then click 3 Continue to point and click to add as many angles as you want Press CTRL if you want to constrain the line to 45 degree angles 4 Toend the shape double click or press ESC If you used the irregular polygon tool ToolBook draws a closed shape filled with the currently selected pattern from the pattern palette Note You can use the angled line tool to draw an object that looks like an enclosed object However avoid having users click these objects because they require clicking precisely on the line If you want an irregularly shaped enclosed object create the shape with the irregular polygon tool gt To draw curves Choose the curve tool Y from the tool palette Point where you want the curve to start and then click Point where you want the curve to begin curving and then click Po N Continue to point and click to add as many curves as you want 5 To end the curve double click or press ESC After you draw a curve you can adjust it precisely by choosing the Reshape Curve command from the Draw menu For details see Changing the size and shape of objects later in this chapter 76 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Selecting Objects Selecting Objects Before you can change an object or def
339. ng the Book Explorer Use the Book Explorer to display the organization of the pages of your book in an outline form Book Explorer x Pages gt 4 Title Introduction L Topic BodyText Image Placeholder M Objectives Our Mission Practice Question 4 Organization Backgrounds 4 Standard Background Figure 2 The Book Explorer Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 55 Creating Books and Pages In the Book Explorer window you can e Reorganize the order of the pages using drag and drop e Navigate to a specific page by clicking the page name gt To open the Book Explorer e Do one of the following From the View menu choose Book Explorer m Press Shift F4 on your keyboard m Click the toolbar icon for the Book Explorer Renumbering Pages in a Book You can reorder pages by using the Book Explorer or cut and paste or the Properties for Page dialog box ToolBook removes the page from its old position in the page order and inserts it at the new position The other pages are renumbered to reflect the change The page keeps its original background wherever you move it in the book gt To change the order of a page in a book 1 Goto the page you want to renumber 2 From the Object menu choose Properties for Page to open the Properties for Page dialog box Properties for Page A F Ate Ar fil M i General
340. no part of it is cropped See also draw object paint object picture object Cursor The image assigned to the pointer select tool insertion point l beam crosshair depending on where the pointer is positioned and whether a tool is selected See also pointer Cursor Resource A cursor image that can be imported and shared as a resource in one or more ToolBook applications See also cursor resources Custom Colors In 256 color systems a list of 64 colors that are available beyond the standard 16 or 32 colors Data Field An individual entry in a data record in an imported or exported fixed field file or delimited field file Often a delimiter character such as a tab or comma separates data fields from each other in data records See also delimited field file delimiter fixed field file Data Typing Assigning a format to a variable in a script that determines what type of data the variable will accept integers floating point numbers character strings logical values and so on See also variable Debugger The window that displays script errors at Author level The Debugger can be used to step through a script one statement at a time to isolate and correct errors See also script statement Default A setting that ToolBook supplies for example the character default is System bold 10 point ToolBook has a default setting for any changeable setting All defaults are system properties See also system properties Delimited field F
341. ns and the area in which it will display The bounding box has a thin border but you can make the border invisible Breakpoint A flag set in a statement while debugging a script that indicates where ToolBook should invoke the Debugger when executing that statement Breakpoints are set and cleared in the Debugger See also Debugger statement Browser A software program that accesses Web pages on the Internet The browser reads the Web document and translates it into the final product onscreen The page appears as the author intended combining text graphics and jumps to other Web pages Built in Message A message built into the ToolBook system that ToolBook sends in response to user activity for example buttonClick Compare user defined message Button An object type that includes pushbuttons command buttons check boxes radio buttons and label buttons Buttons are often used to trigger events or set properties Call A reference ina script to another handler See also handler script Called Handler The handler that executes as the result of sending a message invoking a user defined function in an expression or using the set or get command See also handler user defined function Calling Handler Any handler that makes a call causing the execution of another handler In OpenScript send and forward statements call other handlers See also handler Caption The text that appears in the title bar of a window on a button or in the ti
342. ny script If you remove a clip that is referenced in a script you will get an error message when the script attempts to access the clip To manage clips From the Object menu choose Clips to open the Clip Manager In the Available clips list select the clip you want to work with a N y Do one of the following To edit the clip click Edit The Clip Editor dialog box appears Edit the clip and then click OK To make a copy of the selected clip click Duplicate To replace the selected clip with a clip from a clip library or another book click Replace The Replace Clip dialog box appears Navigate to and select a replacement clip and then click OK To remove the selected clip from your book click Remove To play the selected clip click Play 4 Click Close to close the Clip Manager 186 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating and Managing Clips Using OpenScript Remove a clip using the remove resource command remove resource clip Try this Clip Manager Figure 3 The Clip Manager dialog box Creating a Clip Library A clip library is a file that contains a collection of predefined clips You can create a clip library to organize frequently used clips For more information about creating and using a clip library refer to Help Working with Media Clip Paths When you add a media clip to yo
343. o Name One way of identifying an object An object s name is a property of the object and is used when referring to the object It is a good practice to assign a unique name to each object in your book especially those objects with interactive functionality Only named objects may be referenced in an action sequence Compare ID number No Drop Image The cursor icon or bitmap resource displayed during a drag and drop operation when the pointer is over an object that cannot be the destination object See also destination object drag and drop Nonmodal A way of displaying a window so the user can leave it to activate another window Compare modal Nonpersistent Property A property that does not retain its value between ToolBook sessions or instances For viewers nonpersistent properties exist only when a viewer is open and are not saved when a viewer is closed See also viewer 320 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Uninstalling an Application Notification Message A message sent after ToolBook has finished an action that affects the status of an object For example notification messages are sent after an object is created moved or cleared or when ToolBook is idle Notify Handler A handler that is alerted automatically when a given message reaches the page You can create notify handlers that are called before or after the page handles the message Notify handlers are often used to cr
344. o the page on which you want to delete the voice recording 2 Click Properties for Page on the Object menu 3 Click the Voice Recording tab in the Properties for Page dialog box 4 Inthe Properties for Page click Delete to delete the existing voice recording You can now go ahead and record a new audio file for the page Copying an Existing Voice Recording to a Page You can associate an existing voice recording from other pages in your book to any page by copying it gt Tocopy an existing voice recording from another page 1 Navigate to the page on which you want to copy the voice recording 2 Click Properties for Page on the Object menu 3 Click the Voice Recording tab If there is no recording already associated to the current page select the Enable voice recording playback checkbox Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 193 Adding a Voice Recording 4 5 Notice that all the voice recordings in the current Book are listed in the Voice recordings from other pages area and can be selected for ll Nene bo Je General SmartStyle Behavior Voice Recording Notes V Enable voice recording playback for this page Recording Use a microphone to create a Voice Recording ss Enable Al The recording will play automatically when this page displays Voice recordings from other pages Select the desired Voice Recording Click Copy The selected vo
345. of a resource in your book For example if the same bitmap resource is used as a graphic in a button and as an inline graphic in a field both instances of the bitmap display the transparency Properties for Button A e a FF HPA B tane er E Jers Draw Graphics Bounds Font Behavior Drag amp Drop Button graphics Use chromakey L Choose Graphic Clear Graphic Graphic options IW Stretch the graphic to fit the button Size the button to fit the graphic V Use checked graphic as rollover graphic Figure 2 The Use chromakey option gt To create a transparent area in a bitmap 1 Inthe Properties for Button dialog box click the Graphics tab 2 Under Button graphics select the button state Normal Invert Disabled or Checked containing the bitmap in which you want to create a transparent area For more information about assigning a bitmap to a button state see the preceding section Adding a graphic to a button Select Use chromakey and then click the Color button In the Color dialog box select a color and then click OK Portions of the bitmap resource that match this color value become transparent Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 135 Adding Interactive Features to your Application Displaying the Graphic and Caption You can adjust the layout of a button s caption in relation to the button graphic By default ToolBook displays a capti
346. of multiple books which interact with one another one ToolBook book calls or opens a different book Recording the scores from this type of nested course structure is not supported in TotalLMS After you finish building your course in ToolBook prepare your course for distribution by choosing Publish to Web from the File menu For more information about using TotalLMS consult the online documentation in Learner mode and Administrator mode when using this software Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 297 ns ee Preparing Native ToolBook Applications for Release Introduction You can make your application available in the native ToolBook file format to users via an intranet a local area network or a CD ROM This chapter describes how to use the AutoPackager to prepare a native application for distribution Checking and testing your application is discussed as well as uninstalling an application Organizing and Checking Your Application When you have finished developing your ToolBook application a few additional tasks remain that will improve the performance of your application when it is distributed to users To optimize your application s appearance and behavior you can e Organize the directory structure e Check the spelling e Remove unused resources e Compress the books to their smallest size e Reset the books so that the user can run them Copyright 2012 Sum
347. ohibited Formatting Text in Fields You can format specific characters by selecting them and applying character styles to them You can also change the character style of an entire field or set a default character style so that all of the text you enter has a consistent format Your default character style remains in effect for the current session gt To format specific characters in a field Using the interface 1 Select the text you want to format 2 Click the Character button At on the ToolBook toolbar The Character dialog box appears 3 Choose the font style size and effects you want 4 Click OK Using OpenScript e To change character style of specific characters in a field using OpenScript select the text select textline 1 of text of field status fontSize of selectedText 12 Applying Color to Text ToolBook uses the current stroke and fill colors when you draw a field or enter text in it The stroke color determines the color of the text and the border and the fill color defines the background color You change the color of the text and background the same way you change the color of any object in the Properties dialog box For details about coloring objects see Chapter 6 Working with Objects You can also apply colors to specific characters gt To format selected text with color Using the interface 1 Select the text you want to change 2 Click the Color Tray button Gaa on the ToolBook too
348. ol that you can use to create sophisticated interactive courses without using OpenScript the ToolBook programming language The Actions Editor is designed to give nonprogrammers a programmer s level of control over object behavior and to provide programmers with a tool they can use to create behavior that will Publish to the Web In the Actions Editor you use familiar interface elements to create action sequences that play media display pages or documents prompt users for information and much more In an action sequence you can specify conditions for behavior or create loops to execute actions repetitively An action sequence for an object handles a particular event such as a button click a page loading or the selection of an item from a list For more information about adding behavior to your application using the Actions Editor see Chapter 17 Using the Actions Editor and Chapter 18 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples Using OpenScript OpenScript the ToolBook programming language is easy to use because its syntax is similar to English A script you write in OpenScript defines an object s appearance or behavior For example a script might control what happens when a learner clicks a button enters a page or chooses a selection from a list box Many of these properties can also be controlled using the Actions Editor or Catalog objects with preprogrammed behaviors there is often more than one way to accomplish such a
349. olBook using a ToolBook File menu command Since the XML files are plain text a version control system can be used to detect changes as compared to prior versions Users can enhance their published PowerPoint content in ToolBook by adding questions scoring LMS integration Publishing to the web etc One of the most powerful uses for the SumTotal Publish to ToolBook add in is creating online learning using PowerPoint to storyboard the learning content first You can set up the flow of the presentation using PowerPoint include text graphics and Speaker Notes containing specific instructions for authors on enhancing the published content in ToolBook You can then use the SumTotal Publish to ToolBook add in to publish the PowerPoint content to ToolBook In ToolBook you can put finishing touches to your content If you do not have speaker notes in PowerPoint you can add instructions for authors directly in ToolBook by using the Notes feature for a page accessed through the Notes tab in the Properties for Page dialog box About the Export of Audio to PowerPoint You can export audio files from PowerPoint to ToolBook when publishing a PowerPoint presentation to a ToolBook book Note that this applies to all sounds inserted via PowerPoint s Insert menu excluding sounds associated with Actions When you export a PowerPoint presentation containing audio to ToolBook using the SumTotal Publish to ToolBook Add in by default all embedded sound files
350. ols See also button focus access character tab order Layer The relative order of all the objects on a page or background The most recently created object is on the front layer You can change an object s layer to control the way objects overlap one another and to define the tab order See also tab order 318 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Uninstalling an Application Lesson Design Wizard A book wizard that helps you build a new lesson specially tailored to meet your teaching goals This wizard guides you through the process of building a new ToolBook book Line Spacing The space between individual lines of text in a field Line spacing can be set to single double or one and a half lines A field s line spacing is visible only when its baselines are displayed See also baselines text field Line Style The visual appearance of a line solid dashed dotted determined by choosing a style in the Properties dialog box List A group of one or more elements separated by commas ToolBook uses lists for many data structures such as the coordinates of a cursor or a bounding box and has special OpenScript commands to manipulate them pop push and so on List Box A type of field used to display a list of choices list boxes can be defined as single select or multi select Unlike combo boxes a list box can display more than one option at a time Compare combo box Literal Value A
351. ommand window click the Script Editor button or the Command Window button on the ToolBook toolbar More information about OpenScript can be found in the Help system and in Programming in OpenScript an electronic book Installed with ToolBook 18 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited About this Book Document Conventions This book uses the following visual conventions to help you identify and interpret information Document conventions Example Format Meaning comboBox In a paragraph italic type indicates OpenScript keywords Setup In step by step procedures italic type indicates literal characters to type CTRL ALT DEL Keys separated by a plus sign indicate keys to press in combination button id 12 This font indicates an OpenScript code example A backslash at the end of a line indicates that an OpenScript statement continues on the next line lt isShift gt In a code example or syntax statement angle brackets indicate a parameter that represents a literal value or expression Initialize In a code example two hyphens precede a comment before after In OpenScript syntax vertical bars separate the options from which you can choose end step In OpenScript syntax square brackets indicate optional words and parameters In OpenScript syntax an ellipsis indicates that the parameter can be repeated In code examples ellipses indicate the pr
352. on below the graphic in pushbuttons and command buttons and to the right of the graphic in check boxes and radio buttons Specify the position of the button graphic in relation to the caption on the Draw tab of the Properties for Button dialog box If there is no graphic assigned to a button the position setting has no effect for most button types Top w cen Bottom Auto Figure 3 Caption position is relative to the button graphic About Hotwords Hotwords are special areas of text that you can create within fields You can make a hotword from any group of characters in a field For example a hotword can be a few characters a word a phrase a sentence or all the text in a field Several hotwords can appear in the same sentence but no two hotwords can overlap Inline graphics can also be hotwords Hotwords function much like buttons except that they are part of the text of a field At Reader level a user can click a hotword to navigate or perform some other action The user can easily identify a hotword because the pointer changes to a hand when it is paused over a hotword A hotword generates events and sends messages to other objects Tip You can create hotwords that play media using a special media player object only available in Native mode not DHTML from the Catalog Hotwords are invaluable for building interactive books capable of complex actions Instead of using many buttons on a page for all of the op
353. on to a bitmap cursor or icon resource normalGraphic of button Baseball icon normalBaseball Note To remove a graphic on the Graphics tab of the Button Properties dialog box choose the button state and then click Clear Graphic Changing the Drag Image and No Drop Cursor You can change the cursor or drag image that appears when a user drags an object as well as the no drop cursor that appears when a user drags the object into an area where it cannot be dropped Use ToolBook s default drag and drop cursors or customize your book by assigning unique resources gt To change the drag image and no drop cursor of an object Using the interface 1 Select the object and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar The Properties dialog box appears 2 Onthe Drag amp Drop tab select either Can be dragged or Accepts dropped objects and then click Change Graphic The Choose Graphic dialog box appears Select the type of resource bitmap cursor or icon that you want to assign Do one of the following To assign an existing resource select the resource you want in the graphical list 246 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working with Resources To import a resource click Import navigate to and select a graphic file and then click OK 5 Optional Close the Properties dialog box 6 Switch to Reader level press F3 and drag and drop the object to
354. onal Check Validate child objects Click Validate Now The Validate Actions dialog box expands to display a list of invalid actions the objects and events they handle and a description of the problem that invalidates the action 5 To edit an action double click it in the list The Actions Editor appears and the invalid action is highlighted Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 215 Using the Actions Editor 6 Correct the action and then click Close An action can be technically valid but not produce the behavior you expect Before you distribute your application test all action sequences at Reader level and or in a Web browser to ensure that the actions perform as you want them to Viewing Action Sequences Large complex applications may contain dozens of different action sequences all of them adding different behaviors to your application Fortunately you don t have to open dozens of Actions Editor windows to find a particular action sequence You can use the Export Book Actions command to create a text file containing all the action sequences in your book or you can view all the action sequences on a page using the View Page Actions command gt To save the action sequences in your book in a text file 1 From the Tools menu point to Actions and then choose Export Book Actions You can also access this command from the Tools menu in the Actions Editor In the Expor
355. ons 5 b 2 4x axc e Logical Expressions also called conditional expressions These are expressions that typically compare values and return a true or false value The values that are compared can be expressions arithmetic logical or text Conditions and conditional loops require logical expressions The following are examples of logical expressions enabled of button advanced Variablel Variable2 lt 10 oscilloscope is in studentResponse Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 207 Using the Actions Editor e Text Expressions These are expressions that work on and return text values For example you can join two text values using the amp ampersand operator or extract a single character or string of characters from a block of text using the character and characters operators The following are examples of text expressions characters 1 to 5 of userEntry charCount userEntry When you are creating an action you can type an expression anywhere a value is required Clicking the Build Expression button displays the Build Expression dialog box which helps you create a valid expression The elements from which you can build an expression are grouped as follows Operators and functions variables and parameters object properties and special values Build Expression You can type your expression directly into the expression field and or select items from the options
356. ons dialog box You can also import any tba file as a new shared action sequence using the Import command gt To export a shared action sequence in the Shared Actions dialog box 1 From the Objects menu choose Shared Actions The Shared Actions dialog box appears Select the shared action sequence you want to export and then click Export The Export Shared Actions dialog box appears Navigate to the file location where you want to save the tba file type a name for the file and then click OK To import in the Shared Actions dialog box From the Objects menu choose Shared Actions The Shared Actions dialog box appears Click Import Select the tba file you want to import and then click OK In the Shared Actions dialog box in the Name box select NewSharedAction and replace it with a descriptive name Optional Click Edit to make any changes to the new shared action sequence you imported Click Close 218 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Chapter18 0 18 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples Introduction There are thousands of different ways you can combine actions in action sequences to add behavior to your ToolBook application This chapter takes you through the steps involved in creating action sequences that handle some common scenarios About the Examples The examples presented in this chapter provide a hands on introduction to creating ac
357. ook toolbar The Properties dialog box appears 2 Click the Paragraph tab and then select the settings you want for alignment line spacing tabs and indents 3 Optional Close the Properties dialog box Using OpenScript e You can set the textAlignment spacing indents tabType and tabSpacing field properties to modify paragraph formats For example to set line spacing in a field spacing of field employees 2 Inserting Inline Graphics You can insert an inline graphic anywhere in a field Inline graphics are graphics that are set within text and can include bitmaps icons or cursors When you add an inline graphic the graphic is automatically added to the book s resources For more information about book resources in ToolBook see Chapter 19 Using Resources Tip You can use inline graphics as hotwords To create a hotword from an inline graphic create the inline graphic and select it From the Text menu choose Create Hotword After created you can right click it choose Hyperlink and set its hyperlink properties You can cut copy paste or delete inline graphics just like any character Text formatted in RTF that contains bitmaps can be pasted into fields The bitmaps become inline graphics Inline graphics wrap to the next line as you add text and the bottom of each graphic is aligned along the text s baseline To add space above or below an inline graphic use the Superscript or Subscript command on the Text men
358. oose the Paste command again a second object is pasted on top of the first To reveal the first object select the top object and drag it to a new position gt To duplicate an object 1 Select the object you want to duplicate 2 From the Edit menu choose Duplicate ToolBook creates a duplicate and places it slightly below and to the right of the original object 80 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Moving Objects You can remove an object from any page by deleting it gt To delete an object 1 Select the object you want to delete 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete or press the DELETE key ToolBook removes the selected object If you delete an object accidentally immediately choose Undo from the Edit menu to restore it otherwise the object will be lost Moving Objects You can move an object to another location on a page by dragging it to a new location or by nudging it pixel by pixel gt To move an object to another location on a page e Doone or a combination of the following Drag the object to its new location Nudge the object by clicking it and using the arrow keys to move the object one pixel at a time in the desired direction Press SHIFT as you re using the arrow keys to move the object faster Tip When dragging an object press the CTRL key if you want to restrict the obj ect to horizontal or vertical movement Spreading and Centering Objects
359. or In the Simulation Editor you can specify custom behavior for feedback by assigning an action method to a simulation event For more information about programming custom behavior see chapter 17 Using the Actions Editor Scoring a Simulation A score for the learner s response to each step in a simulation will be calculated when the simulation is running in assessment mode or scored practice mode The score for a step is evenly split among the evaluated objects and the trigger event for the step For example a step with three evaluation objects and one correct trigger event will produce a score that assigns 25 of the total score to each of the three evaluation objects and 25 of the total score to the choice of the correct trigger event Programming Behavior for Simulation Events You can add behavior defined in the Actions Editor to any individual step in a simulation Custom behavior can be assigned to the beginning or end of a simulation as well This customized behavior may include showing a pop up message displaying the score for the simulation navigating to a different page or anything that can be developed in the Actions Editor Built in simulation events include start simulation reset simulation and complete simulation You can define an action method that will execute before the simulation starts if you have any initialization tasks that must occur prior to the first step of the simulation For example three buttons may provide
360. or ToolBook saves only those actions you specifically select in a file with a tba extension When you import a tba file into the Actions Editor ToolBook copies all the actions into the file after the currently selected action in the action sequence gt To export actions in the Actions Editor 1 Open the action sequence from which you want to export actions 2 Select the actions you want to export To select multiple actions press CTRL while you click the actions 3 From the Actions Editor File menu choose Export Actions The Export Actions dialog box appears 4 Navigate to the file location where you want to save the tba file type a name for the file and then click OK gt To import actions in the Actions Editor 1 Open the action sequence into which you want to import actions or open the Actions Editor for a new action sequence 2 If importing into an existing action sequence select the action after which you want to insert the actions stored in the tba file Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 217 Using the Actions Editor 3 4 From the Actions Editor File menu choose Import Actions The Import Actions dialog box appears Navigate to and select the tba file you want to import and then click OK Importing and Exporting from the Shared Actions Dialog Box You can export an entire shared action sequence at once using the Export command in the Shared Acti
361. or a resource is zero ToolBook allows you to remove the resource from your book However this reference count is not updated for references to a resource within a script or in user properties Be certain not to remove any resources that you intend to continue referencing in a script or in user properties Removing an object s reference to a resource To remove this Do this resource Bitmap Select the button or Image object and then click the Properties button on the toolbar On the Graphics tab choose the button state and then click Clear Graphic Alternatively type in the Command window or a script normalGraphic of button Baseball null or clear normalGraphic of button Baseball 250 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Removing Resources from a Book Icon Type in the Command window or a script icon of viewer Statistics null Drag image or no drop Type in the Command window or a script draglmage of button cursor Play MIDI null noDropiImage of button Stop MIDI null Color palette Assign a different palette to the book by typing in the Command window or a script set palette of this book to palette ID 101 Menu bar resource Type in the Command window or a script menuBar of viewer Statistics null System cursor Type in the Command window or a script sysCursor 1 or sysCursor default For details s
362. or and their function Click this button To do this g Cut the selected action s to the Clipboard Copy the selected action s to the Clipboard E Paste the selected action s to the Clipboard 200 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating Action Sequences Using the Actions Editor Undo the last command Redo the last command Delete the selected action s Edit the properties of the selected action s Move the selected action s up one line Move the selected action s down one line Define variables and parameters for shared action sequences aes LSS PS ENEA S Working with the Actions Palette The Actions Editor displays a list of available actions in the actions palette You can drag an action from the palette and drop it in the action sequence to add a new action Actions Editor Button Continue File Edit View Insert Action Tools Help S BO xK amp t t x Parameters mousex mouseY shiftDown ctiDown Figure 3 The actions palette You can resize or close the actions palette If you close the actions palette you can reopen it from the View menu of the Actions Editor Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 201 Using the Actions Editor Choosing an Event Action sequences for objects handle specific events You can create an action s
363. ord send the removeHotword message select third word of textline 1 of text of field Intro send removeHotword 138 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Se ee Working with List Boxes and Combo Boxes Introduction You can display multiple choices for your users with a list box which is a type of field in ToolBook or with a combo box object This chapter describes how to create and format list boxes and combo boxes in your application About List Boxes and Combo Boxes List boxes and combo boxes contain and present lists of options to your users A list box is a type of field It organizes choices into a list of items from which the user can make a selection You determine the size of the list box if there are more items than can fit in the area you have defined you can add a scroll bar The list displays each __ item on a separate line A scroll bar can be added if the list is longer than the display area Letter Gothic Stone Figure 1 List box with a scroll bar You can use a list box when e The set of choices is too large for radio buttons or check boxes e Space is tight making radio buttons impractical e You want to give equal weight to all of the list choices e You want the choices to be visible to avoid confusion or mistakes e All the choices are fixed Most of the time you ll create a list box using a text field rather than a record field But
364. ory gt To Publish your application as Web pages 1 Open the book that you want to Publish 2 From the File menu choose Publish to Web DHTML 3 Select the options you desire and click Publish ToolBook Publishes your files using the settings you specified Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 295 Distributing Applications on the Internet After you have Published your book to the Web you can view it in a Web browser When you Publish your book to DHTML you choose a project directory By default ToolBook names this directory WebExport and places it in the book s directory Within this directory ToolBook creates another directory with the same name as your book file There you will find all the files required to run your application on the Web To load the DHTML content in your browser open the INDEX HTML file You can also access the folder containing the INDEX HTML from a hyperlink displayed at the end of the Publishing process as shown below Publish To Web Status Congratulations your file was successfully Published to Web Errors No errors were encountered Published File Locations Folder containing the main INDEX HTML file C desktop Fire Safety WebExport lesson 15 ZIP Package file location C desktop Fire Safety WebExport Lesson 1 zip Preview in a Web Browser Figure 2 Link to the WebExport folder Using ToolBook Courses with a Learning Manag
365. oto the page after which you want to add the new page 2 Do one of the following To add anew page that uses an existing background choose New Page from the Insert menu or press CTRLH The New Page dialog box appears Enter a name for the page and then select an empty page a page from the current book or a page from a template To add a new page that uses a new background choose New Background from the Insert menu 3 Click OK ToolBook inserts the new page after the current page the page displayed in the ToolBook main window and gives it the next sequential page number Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 53 Creating Books and Pages Tip You can modify your settings so that ToolBook adds new pages without opening the New Page dialog box From the View menu choose Options on the New tab clear the Show New Page dialog on New Page command check box Now ToolBook will automatically apply the settings from the page you are on to the new page it creates Using OpenScript You can write and execute OpenScript code using the script editor or Command window For more information about using the OpenScript programming language refer to the Programming in OpenScript electronic book e To adda new page that uses an existing background display a page that uses the background you want and then send the newPage message from the page send newPage to system e To adda new pag
366. ouble click the field into which you want to paste the text 3 From the Edit menu choose Paste ToolBook pastes the text into the field or record field You can paste RTF text into other programs from ToolBook via the Clipboard using the Copy and Paste commands on the Edit menu When you copy text ToolBook places RTF text on the Clipboard If the destination program supports RTF it uses this format when you paste the text The text retains the formatting that the destination program can recognize for example ToolBook exports color information for text but some programs can t use color Selecting and Editing Text You can select and edit the text in afield For example you can use the Clipboard to cut copy or paste text in a field The following sections describe the basic techniques you use when working with text Navigating in Text You can double click a field to create an beam called the insertion point which you use to indicate where you want text to be inserted when you type You can click with the mouse to move the insertion point within any text in a field or to another field on the same page The following table describes the keyboard shortcuts you can use to navigate in a text field Navigating in text To move the insertion point Press this key or key combination One character left or right RIGHT ARROW or LEFT ARROW One text line up or down UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW To the start of the t
367. oundaries and the text in the field 2 The space between the edge of the paper and printed text or graphics See also indent Mat A color border that appears if a page is smaller than the window in which it is displayed MCI See Media Control Interface Media Control Interface MCI A Windows standard set of commands used to control media devices See also media device Media Device Hardware that controls a source of multimedia for example a CD ROM drive that can play an audio compact disc See also audio CD multimedia Media File A file that contains media such as a digital video file or a bitmap Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 319 Glossary Media Player A Catalog object that is preprogrammed to play media The Universal Media Player is a multi purpose media player that supports most currently available media formats Media Source Any multimedia from which you can create clips including media files audio CD videotape and so on Menu A list of choices that a user can click to open windows execute commands or display further choices Menu Bar The area at the top of a window that lists available menus Menu Bar Editor The ToolBook editor used to create and edit menu bars Menu Bar Resource A menu that can be shared as a resource in one or more ToolBook applications See also resources Menu Item A single choice on a menu If a menu item is not available it appears di
368. owser to edit the OpenScript for an object by double clicking a handler The script containing that handler will open with the selected handler highlighted You should be familiar with OpenScript before editing with the Handler Browser 42 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working at Author Level Working with Rulers and the Grid You can use the rulers and the grid to help you precisely size and align objects The rulers appear along the top and left edges of the main window unless you hide them to make more room in the window As you move the pointer inside the window a line appears in each ruler indicating the position of the pointer If you select an object shadows in the rulers indicate the object s dimensions gt To hide or show the rulers e From the View menu choose Rulers Alternatively press CTRL R By default ToolBook displays the rulers using the units of measurement specified in Windows You can change the units of measurement within ToolBook in the Grid dialog box The grid is a matrix of dots spaced an equal distance apart in the main window You can specify that ToolBook align objects with the grid automatically when you move or resize them The grid does not have to be visible for you to snap objects to it You can show and hide the grid as needed at Author level however even if the grid is visible at Author level it never appears at Reader level You can set th
369. p yellow box You can also search on keywords to locate specific objects gt To search for an object in the Catalog 1 Point at one of the category captions within the Catalog window and right click 2 From the right click menu choose Find Object The Find Object dialog box appears 3 Type a keyword in the edit box Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 67 Working with the Catalog 4 Click OK ToolBook searches the Catalog for an item with the keyword you entered and displays the result Viewing Objects You might want to preview an object to view it at full size gt To view an object at full size 1 Inthe Catalog select the small thumbnail image of the object you want to view 2 Right click the object From the right click menu select Preview Object ToolBook shows you a full size view of the object in a pop up window 3 Click anywhere on the screen to close the pop up window Exploring Types of Catalog Objects The following sections give you a general overview of the objects available in the Catalog By browsing through these sections you can get an idea of the purpose of different types of objects For more information about using individual objects in the Catalog add the object to a page and read the contents of the ToolBook Coach Open the Coach from the Help menu Action Triggers Action trigger buttons can start and reset objects on the page With trigger a
370. page name or page ID number Alternatively specify a range of pages with an expression For example sort pages 1 to pageCount of this book by ascending text name of this page Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working with Record Fields When you sort pages by a record field treated as a name ToolBook treats the first word in the first paragraph as a first name the second word as a middle name and the third word asa last name Additional words are ignored ToolBook sorts by last name then by first name and finally by middle name or initial A one word paragraph is considered a last name two words are considered to be first and last name in that order Two words concatenated with the tilde character are evaluated as one word For example Hubert Van Beek is sorted by Van Beek but Hubert Van Beek is sorted by Beek The tilde appears only onscreen and is not printed Any amount of additional text can follow the first paragraph Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 121 Chapter9 9 Using Graphics Introduction This chapter describes how you can use graphics in ToolBook to enhance the visual appearance of your application With ToolBook you can paste or import graphics into your application and assign resources to the objects in your book This chapter describes how to add graphics in your application About Graphi
371. ple you could designate a button which allows the learner to move immediately to the next step and also set a timed delay to cause the simulation to move to the next step after 10 seconds if the user hasn t yet clicked the button Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 287 Building Software Simulations Setting Trigger Events Selecting the correct trigger event is usually the end of a step in an interactive simulation When a user clicks a button or activates any other defined trigger event during a simulation the interaction will be analyzed to determine if the correct trigger event was selected The following trigger events can be used in a simulation e clicka button a check box or a radio button e right click a button e double click a button e press a certain key e select an item from a list box or combo box e press a specific key when a defined object has the focus gt To add a trigger event to a step 1 Select a step in the Simulation Editor 2 From the Insert menu choose Trigger Event 3 Click the Properties button on the Simulation Editor toolbar to define the new trigger event A trigger event has a property that specifies whether it is correct or incorrect Sometimes there is more than one way to complete a step in a software task such as pressing a shortcut key or clicking a button If there is more than one valid way to make the application respond you can includ
372. ppear gt To define feedback text for a step in a simulation 1 Select a step in the Simulation Editor 2 Click the Properties button on the Simulation Editor toolbar 3 Click the Feedback tab and select the option you want Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 289 Building Software Simulations Choosing the option Automatically generate feedback text causes the simulation to display appropriate text if the learner makes the wrong response You can change the default text for an incorrect response by editing the words stored as the dncorrect gt prompt text available from the Generic Runtime System Prompts button on the Web tab of the Properties for Lesson dialog box Another way to change the automated feedback text is to edit the reference to the name of individual objects Without changing the name of an object you can change the reference to an object name by creating an alias In the properties dialog box for a simulation click the Objects tab select an object in the list then change the default text shown under Refer to this object in automatic instructions and feedback as to create a different reference Another way to deliver feedback is to develop an action method that executes after the learner completes the step or makes an attempt to complete the step Playing a media file or navigating to a different page are examples of behavior that can be programmed in the Actions Edit
373. printed page Frame Window The portion of a window that contains the border caption bar system menu scroll bars and Minimize and Maximize buttons The frame window surrounds the client area See also client area FTP See File Transfer Protocol Function An operation that uses a predefined formula and returns a value For example the function round always returns the supplied value which may be a literal value or expression rounded to the nearest integer Function Keys The keys on a computer keyboard labeled F1 F2 F3 and so on Function keys can be used independently or together with the CTRL ALT or SHIFT key as shortcuts for choosing menu commands and performing other tasks General System Properties Properties of ToolBook that affect every book opened during the current ToolBook instance For example ToolBook uses the value of the property sysDateFormat to format all dates Global Memory The area of memory available to all Windows applications Global Variable In an action sequence a variable whose value can be accessed and used in any action sequence See also variable system variable Compare local variable 316 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Uninstalling an Application Graphic A graphic file that is added to a book s resource system and displayed on the page or background See also Image Object Grid A set of nonprinting dots used at Author level to precisely
374. provides quick access to common menu commands and editing tools Some of the positions on the toolbar contain two buttons a default button and a hidden button To display hidden buttons press CTRL gt To hide and show the toolbar e From the View menu choose Toolbar 32 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working at Author Level Toolbar command buttons and their function Default Toolbar button Toolbar button when CTRL is pressed BG Open another ToolBook application a shia appication or instance Os id Save your book Save your book under a different name Ke Undo last action uy Duplicate selected object ces Show Book Explorer ey Show or hide Catalog X Open Simulation Editor iip Creates a new simulation if none exists Show or hide Command window 74 Show or hide tool palette Show or hide line palette Show or hide line ends palette 4 Show or hide pattern palette FH Show or hide color tray Show or hide polygon palette Ld View current background i Add new page to your book E Open Resource Manager dialog box Open Clip Manager dialog box Grayed out in DHTML mode a Open Viewers dialog box Grayed out in DHTML mode Ey Open Properties dialog box E y Open Extended Properties dialog box Open Actions Editor g Open the OpenScript Editor a OpenScript Editor for shared scripts A Open Font tab of Prop
375. pt with Dynamic Link Libraries esseeseeeseeesseeeseeseesesnersnnennnsnnesennes 30 Using Resources in Your Application sosciosarsoissinis nani SE 30 Learning the TOOIBOOK Interface 10eccceccccseeeennneesessesnnsesnnneeeeeesssessneseenanees 31 alinea ltra i ai EETA E AE A A A A E E I O E E A 31 Introducing the Visual Interface eecceeceeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeesenas 31 Working at Author Level eecesceeeeseeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseaaesesesaaeeessaaeseseeaeseseesenaeseeenaeess 31 Working with the Menu Bat ccccesccceeesseceeeeeeeceeeeeseceeeeneeeceeaeeecesaeeeeesaeeeseesneeeseeseeaeeeenaaes 32 Working with the Toobali sssrinds eiaeaen EANNAN EAREN E ENAA NEEE 32 Working with the Status Ba cecccccseeeeseeceeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeceneeeceaeeesaaeeseaeeseeeesaeessaeeseneeeeaees 34 Working with Palettes oc cicccetccesseseecegeccdiysneseeessesndegssarvecssetesegsandebecdduenadesviestedshesddadvarseedies 35 Working with the Catalog eisien adidadis inaina Nani 37 Working with the TOOIBOOK COach cccccceeeececeeeeeceeeeeeaececeeeseeeesaaeeeseeeeseneeesiaeeesaeeeeneeseaees 38 Working with Properties and Extended Properties Dialog BOXeS c scceeesteeeeeenteeeeeeaes 39 Working with the Actions Editor ccescccceesseceeeenseceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeesneceeesneeeeesneeaesesneeaeeeeniaes 40 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc
376. py of the object on the page or background Tip You can double click an object in the Catalog to add it to your page After you add objects to a page or background you can customize them for your application Obj ects have built in properties that define how they appear and behave For example you can set properties such as fill color animation and hyperlinks Information about setting properties is available in Chapter 7 Setting Object Properties Creating Objects Using the Tool Palette In addition to adding objects to your book by dragging them from the Catalog you can draw objects using tools from the tool palette While Catalog objects have a predefined appearance and certain predefined behaviors objects created using the tool palette have limited preprogrammed properties You can use the Actions Editor visual programming tool to easily link an action or series of actions to any object you create using the tool palette Alternatively you can use the OpenScript programming language to define an object s properties and behavior further When you draw an object its general shape and type are determined by the tool you choose from the tool palette and its final size and proportions are determined by how far and in which direction you drag the pointer When you select an object or use a tool the pointer shows the type of object selected The tool palette is available only at Author level and appears by default on the left side of th
377. pying an object to the My Objects category allows you to easily share and reuse custom objects among your ToolBook applications For details see Chapter 5 Working with the Catalog Toolbar Buttons in the Properties Dialog Box The Properties dialog box like the main window has a toolbar Buttons on the toolbar become available depending on the object s features and specifications on each tab A B C D E F G H l J I d I Idli A A a m E 4 sl Figure 2 The toolbar in the Properties dialog box i A Undo Reverses the last command B Redo Reapplies the last command C Edit Parent Changes the displayed properties to the parent of the currently selected object For example if you have selected one button in a grouped navigation object clicking Edit Parent allows you to set properties for the group D Edit Child Changes the displayed properties to the child of the currently selected object Set Units Allows you to choose by what units the object is measured pixels page units inches or centimeters F Extended Properties Opens the Extended Properties dialog box for the selected object G Actions Opens the Actions Editor where you can program a series of behaviors called action sequences for the selected object H Hyperlink Opens the Hyperlink dialog box where you can specify a hyperlink for the selected object Path Animation Opens the ToolBook Animation Editor where you can create an animation
378. quence for an object Refer to the sections above to learn about using variables building expressions and inserting actions into your shared action sequence This section addresses the differences between the two types of action sequences and what you need to know to use shared action sequences in your application Naming and Locating Shared Action Sequences Shared action sequences are stored together under unique names You work with shared action sequences in the Shared Actions dialog box You can access the Shared Actions dialog box from the main Object menu or the Actions menu in the Actions Editor gt Tocreate a new shared action sequence 1 Do one of the following From the Object menu choose Shared Actions Inthe Actions Editor from the Action menu choose Shared Actions The Shared Actions dialog box appears Shared Actions Available Shared Actions Edit Duplicate Remove Name CalculateRetum port os __ Hep 2 Click New The Actions Editor appears where you can create a new shared action sequence Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 211 Using the Actions Editor Using Shared Action Sequences You can use a shared action sequence to add the same behavior to multiple objects Shared action sequences are comparable to subroutines or functions in most programming languages and are very powerful and useful Instead of creating the same
379. r About Software Simulations A software simulation allows a learner to try out a program interface or view the steps to accomplish a task Because a simulation is close to the real experience of using a software application it is a very effective way to learn procedures and gain familiarity with a program You can build simulations in ToolBook that imitate other software programs by using the Sim AutoBuilder feature or the Simulation Editor ToolBook provides two ways to create a simulation You can record interaction in a software application by using the Sim AutoBuilder After you make a recording the file can be opened in ToolBook and converted automatically to a simulation that connects the images and behavior in the recording with ToolBook objects Another way to create a simulation in ToolBook is to build up a simulation interface from Catalog objects and graphic images of the screen manually using the Simulation Editor to define the steps in the simulation All of the properties for a simulation can be viewed and changed in the Simulation Editor A simulation prepared by the Sim AutoBuilder can be modified in the Simulation Editor A simulation consists of a series of steps that describe changes on the screen During a simulation a learner may interact with buttons and menus and other objects These preprogrammed objects are available from the ToolBook Catalog and can be added to any simulation Catalog objects can be modified to match th
380. r level and review the steps above Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 231 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples Example 4 Using Shared Action Sequences You can use a shared action sequence any time you want to reuse the same sequence of behaviors You can also use a shared action sequence to perform a series of actions that returns a value In this example a shared action sequence is used in a program that calculates the amount you would pay for sales tax in different cities At Author level open the final page of the Actions Editor Walkthrough book titled Tax Calculator You will see two interactive objects on the page A text field for entering a price and a list box containing three city names Seattle Atlanta and New York T ToolBook Walkthrough tbk File Edit View Go Insert Object Text Draw Tools Help Tax Calculator Enter a price Select a city to Seattle view the tax Atlanta due New York m E ai Be Pas EY N Av E o B dj 7o7 M 232 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Example 4 Using Shared Action Sequences Figure 4 shows the action sequence for Example 4 ToolBook executes the action sequence as follows First ToolBook evaluates which city the user selected from the list box Then it executes the shared action sequence sending the appropriate tax rate and the text enter
381. r panel of the Simulation Editor All properties shown in the property grid are also available by clicking the Properties button on the toolbar In the properties dialog box you will see a more detailed description of the available properties Developing Steps The steps that make up a simulation build a procedure for completing the task defined in the simulation A step contains some type of action or change that can be a distinct point in the learning process For example a step could include instructions that direct the learner to click a specific button on the page a trigger event that specifies the name of the button that should be clicked and feedback text that displays if the learner clicks the wrong button gt To add anew step to a simulation e Do one of the following Click the New Step button on the toolbar of the Simulation Editor From the Insert menu choose New Step Before you can define what will be accomplished in a new simulation step the objects that will be involved in the step should be placed on the page The Simulation Editor allows you to select the names of existing objects from drop down lists to set some properties 286 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working in the Simulation Editor A step in a simulation usually includes instructions that tell the user what to do Since a single text field can be used to display instructions for all of the steps i
382. r to use some ANSI characters The table below displays the ANSI character set The ANSI extended character set A ONAN bwn oO gt Ot Je sm e omee Ox COO00OO2ZD AH MMMM mm mem D gt C e WONAMS amp wWN ON S A B Cc D E F G H l J K L M N oO p Q R S T U y wW x Z I o AOS w 4 5o wie Ne A ccena OvVOss mrle y WTG ccce B O O O O Oa Gewese Nem Aon HD a a ah ah a n n n n in in on o RP t No conversion for this character Values 8 9 10 and 13 convert to backspace tab linefeed and carriage return respectively Values 127_129 141 144 and 157_158 vary depending on the font manufacturer Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 115 Working with Text Finding and Replacing Text You can use the Find command on the Edit menu to search for text and the Replace command if you also want to specify replacement text ToolBook searches the entire book starting on the current page and prompts you to start over when it reaches the end of the book If you want to limit the search you can select one of the options in the Find dialog box You can search for text in e All fields and list boxes shown on the current page e Record fields on all pages that share the same background You can also customize your search using the Match whole word only option For example if you specify the in the Find what box
383. ral objects are selected only the object with the handle you drag resizes the other objects maintain their original sizes To resize several objects at once you must group them For details about grouping objects see Grouping objects later in this chapter To change the appearance of a polygon curve arc angled line or pie wedge you can use the Reshape command to display the object s reshape handles which are handles that can be used to alter the shape of these objects gt Toreshape an object 1 Select the object angled line curve arc polygon or pie wedge whose shape you want to change and then from the Draw menu choose Reshape Alternatively double click the object The handles change to allow you to reshape the object f Sizing handles Reshape handles e Drag the handles to change the shape of the object For arcs and pie wedges you can drag the handles only along the curvature of the shape For other objects you can drag the handles in any direction 4 To remove the reshape handles and restore the sizing handles click the object or click elsewhere on the page to cancel the selection For more precise control over the shape of some objects you can add reshape handles that enable you to add another vertex to a side of the object gt To add reshape handles to an object 1 Select the object angled line curve or regular or irregular polygon and then choose Reshape from the Draw menu Alterna
384. ramming tool Ensure that any media or ancillary files are compatible with Internet standards Use Publish to Web to convert your application to DHTML If developing content for mobile learning be familiar with Authoring Best Practices for Mobile Learning detailed in ToolBook Help Via a local area network as a native ToolBook application Windows XP SP2 or higher Use all of ToolBook s powerful features for creating rich interactive applications including the OpenScript programming language and the Actions Editor visual programming tool If users will install the application on their own computers use the ToolBook AutoPackager to create a setup program Via CD ROM or other transferable media Windows XP SP2 or higher Use all of ToolBook s powerful features for creating rich interactive applications including the OpenScript programming language and the Actions Editor visual programming tool Use the ToolBook AutoPackager to create a setup program Building an Application You build an application in ToolBook by starting a book and adding your content text interactive objects graphics navigation and so on You can control the appearance and behavior of objects by setting properties The Actions Editor visual programming tool can also control the behavior of objects or you can use the OpenScript programming language in books that will not be Published to DHTML You create applications at
385. raphics from the Clipboard You can use the Clipboard to copy a graphic from another application and paste it into ToolBook as well as to copy and paste a graphic from another ToolBook book into the current one In addition you can paste graphics into text fields and record fields creating inline graphics For details about inline graphics see Chapter 8 Working with text gt To copy and paste a graphic 1 Run the application that contains the graphic you want to paste 2 Select the graphic and then copy it to the Clipboard 3 In ToolBook go to the page or background on which you want to paste the graphic 4 From the Edit menu choose Paste ToolBook adds the graphic as an Image object in the upper left corner of the current page or background If you want a border go to the Draw tab of the Image object s Properties dialog box and select a Border Line Style Note Be sure to edit a graphic file before you paste or import it because you cannot edit the image in ToolBook Importing Graphics When you import a graphic using the Graphic command on the Insert menu ToolBook adds the graphic file to the book s resource system and displays it on the page within an Image object gt To import a graphic 1 From the Insert menu choose Graphic ToolBook displays the Import Graphic dialog box Navigate to and select a file from the list Click Insert ToolBook imports the graphic object and displays it on the page background with
386. rd disk that will be searched to locate a media clip CDMediaPath List of subdirectories on CD ROM that will be searched to locate a media clip Clip mmSource Name of the media source file mmSearchHD Whether to search using HDMediaPath true or false mmSearchCD Whether to search using CDMediaPath true or false 188 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating and Managing Clips How ToolBook Searches for Media When you play a clip ToolBook first checks the clip s mmSearchHD property If it is true ToolBook constructs a full path for the clip s media source file by combining values one by one from HDMediaPath with the clip s mmSource property and then attempts to find the clip For example if HDMediaPath contains C Books C Books AVI C Books WAV and the clip s mmSource property contains Bells wav ToolBook searches the following paths in order C Books Bells wav C Books AVI Bells wav C Books WAV Bells wav ToolBook uses the same search process if mmSearchCD is true but extracts search paths from CDMediaPath instead of from HDMediaPath If both mmSearchHD and mmSearchCD are true the paths in HDMediaPath are searched first There are two very important special values that you can use for HDMediaPath and CDMediaPath lt BookPath gt and lt CDROM gt If the media search path contains the string lt BookPath gt ToolBook searches for the path of the curren
387. rganized so that the last data item added to the list is the first item used Standard Colors The 16 or 32 colors that are always available to ToolBook applications Startup Screen A screen that appears for a few seconds upon startup of an application and then disappears A startup screen is often used as the application s introductory screen containing information such as the application s title release number and the name of the person to whom the software is registered Startup System Properties ToolBook properties that specify how ToolBook is initialized when you first start it For example the system property startupBook specifies the name of the book that opens automatically when a user runs ToolBook Statement A single complete instruction in a script or action sequence Static Object An OLE object that was embedded or linked but whose link was severed A static object has no link to its server application See also object linking and embedding server application Status Bar The bar along the bottom of the ToolBook window that shows mouse position name of the object under the cursor information about the chosen menu command and the page selection indicator Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 325 Glossary String Any combination of contiguous characters Stroke The line element of an object For fields and buttons stroke color is applied to text and borders For draw objects
388. right 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Chapter 10 Adding Interactive Features to your Application Introduction You can add buttons and hotwords to your application when you want your users to interact with your book A ToolBook button like any Windows button is an object that the user can click to cause something to happen A hotword is a selection of text that the user can click like a button Buttons and hotwords can be used to navigate between pages as controls for setting options to start and stop an animation and for a variety of other uses This chapter describes how to use buttons and hotwords in your application About Buttons Buttons facilitate user interaction They are commonly used as controls to turn options on and off to navigate between pages or to choose one option from among a related set of options For example a button can e Take the user to another page or a Web site e Start an animation or a video e Allow users to check their responses to questions or score their work Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 127 Adding Interactive Features to your Application Defining How Buttons Look The Catalog contains a wide variety of buttons from prebuilt navigation objects to question and answer objects T Course X93 Level 2 File Edit View Go Text Help POLICIES amp PROCEDURES Basic Training Question
389. rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working at Author Level Working with the Catalog The Catalog contains the authoring objects you use to build your interactive online learning application There are hundreds of objects in the Catalog including question sets media players navigation panels and other interactive objects many with preprogrammed behavior that you can customize To include an object in your application you simply drag it from the Catalog to your page or background Then set its properties or extended properties to further define its appearance and behavior In addition you can link an action or sequence of actions to any Catalog object using the Actions Editor or write a script for an object using OpenScript a Commonly Used Objects S g Bm Auto Sizing Text Image Universal Media Field Player E SmartStyle Button Multiple Choice True F alse Question Question m Question Text Field Action Objects Arrows Clipart Buttons Certificates Draw Objects Media Players Navigation Objects Pages Placeholder Objects Questions Quiz Summary Scoring and Tracking Simulation Objects Styles Text Fields My Objects Figure 4 The ToolBook Catalog Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 37 Learning the ToolBook Interface gt To display the Catalog e Do one of the following From the View menu choose Catalog Click the Catalog butto
390. rneseasecssersannreessessenssisdavenstenseowsiacnnvsaeile 163 Introduction epo ue viueeeseaudeneeadivteelestuchustedpuedesuhenaxsdustetadeusaueseesudetestivesteraeets 163 TheGeriticate Feattle sonuni anaana i aiaa aan 163 Using the Ceniticate PAC erousiranssinuaannin nananana aoaeaaiaee 165 To use a Certificate page iN your DOOK ssisssisiiniiisaniainnini aniani ea eaaa 165 Hiding Showing and Animating Objects sssecccseeseeressessensessssnerensessenees 167 MT ROQUCTION aa EAA OAE E EES RE T ESA 167 Creating Visuial Effects sericis tersaneirsi anns ianei ainia aai aE aaa a aiaa aaa da aaia 167 Hiding and SHOWING ODjectSiriirisresmaoritsi inerse eiaei a aiea iaeia eaa iE 167 Using an Action Trigger to Hide and Show Objects ccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeneeseneeees 167 Using the Actions Editor to Hide and Show ObjectS sseessserressrrerrsrreerrrreerrerrsrrerrerees 168 Using OpenScript to Hide and Show Objects cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeesaeeeeneeees 169 Animating ToolBook Objects ccccceeececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeecaaesecaeeseeeeseaeeesaaeeseeeeeseaeeseeeeeeeeeeaes 169 Using the ToolBook Animation Editor eceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaaes 170 Creating a Path Animation cccccceeccceeseeeecececeeeeeseaeeeeaaeceeeeeseaeeesaaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeessaeeeeeeeseaees 171 Creating a Cel Animation cccccccceceecceceneeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeaaec
391. roperty Browser by their OpenScript property name you should be familiar with the OpenScript language before using this tool For more information about OpenScript refer to the Programming in OpenScript electronic book Some of the properties that appear in the Property Browser can also be set using either the Properties dialog box or the Extended Properties dialog box You may prefer to use these dialog boxes instead of the Property Browser to set object properties However the Property Browser is the best way to view all of the available properties for an object gt To change a property s value in the Property Browser 1 From the View menu point to Browsers and then choose Property ke Property Browser 2 Select an object on your page or choose the object whose properties you want to edit from the drop down list at the top of the Property Browser Select the property you want to edit from the Name column The object s current value for that property appears in the Value column and in the drop down list at the top of the tab If the property uses a specific set of predefined values click the drop down arrow and then choose a different property value 100 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Using the Property Browser If the property does not use a specific set of predefined values click the Browse button type a new value in the Edit Property dialog box and then
392. rouped into one step Making selections with the mouse is just one type of activity that will be recorded by the Sim AutoBuilder A distinction will be made between a left button click right button click and double click Selecting items from menus list boxes and combo boxes will also be recorded Pressing specific keys on the keyboard will be captured including the Tab key Shift key or any function key Some of the function keys such as F8 are commonly in use by Web browsers and pressing a function key when playing a simulation through a browser will cause the browser to respond in the default fashion gt To make a recording and simulation with the Sim AutoBuilder 1 Open the software application that you want to simulate Prepare the application by setting it up to be ready for the start of recording 2 From the Start menu point to Programs ToolBook 11 5 Utilities and select Simulation Recorder The ToolBook Sim AutoBuilder dialog box is displayed 3 Inthe Sim AutoBuilder dialog box enter a name and location for the file that will contain the recording Select the software application that you want to record Change any of the default settings for the recording options if desired and then click OK Start recording by pressing the Print Screen key or another selected key Noo gt In the software application you are recording take the first action that you want to show in the simulation and then press the Print
393. rovide Unlimited Energy Electric Cars Are Today Powered By Small Batteries Battery Powered Cars Can Travel Long Distances Figure 8 A question created using a multiple choice object A multiple choice object allows you to define a button field or other object as a correct answer The student attempts to answer the question by clicking the button field or object Using this object you can also designate multiple correct answers and specify randomization the correct answer appears in a different location each time Mary had EL AEU The lamb was sure to go Everywhere that Mary went its fleece was white as snow Figure 9 A question created using an order text object An order text object allows you to define an ordered list of words or phrases as the correct response to a question and test the student s ability to reconstruct the list in the proper order The student attempts to answer the question by dragging the phrases to the correct position Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 155 Creating a Quiz using Question Objects Scoring Questions In addition to indicating which answer is correct you can specify that a question object calculate a student s score You can report the score to the student at the end of the book or record the score in a log file A log file is a text file that includes information such as the student s score response to each question an
394. rrent state of the course before completion If a student accesses a ToolBook course through a learning management system and closes it without selecting one of the exit buttons from the Scoring and Tracking category of the Catalog no work accomplished during that session will be recorded Managing ToolBook Courses with TotalLMS TotalLMS from SumTotal Systems is a comprehensive learning management system which tracks every form of training Individual progress towards achieving all types of educational goals can be measured and viewed online or through reports Online courses as well as instructor led classes and on the job training can all be incorporated into a personalized curriculum For a detailed description of the features available visit www sumtotalsystems com Content and courses created in ToolBook can be accessed through TotalLMS using a Web browser If you plan to include questions and want the score for the answers recorded in the TotalLMS database include one of the Exit buttons from the Scoring and Tracking category of the ToolBook Catalog the Done button or Mark as Complete button The Cancel button can be included in your course but no scoring information will be sent to TotalLMS You can include a Suspend Lesson button in your course to allow a student to save their score without finishing a lesson in one session When designing your ToolBook course you will want to refrain from creating a course structure that consists
395. rsors icons color palettes and menus for example ToolBook also uses the resource system to manage graphical elements you add to your book allowing you to use a graphic several times in your book with only minimal impact on the file size of your application This chapter describes how to add modify and export resources About Resources A resource is a file that you can use multiple times within your ToolBook application When you add a resource to a book ToolBook places a copy of it in the Resource Manager which is a common library of resources in the book The resource is then available to all objects in the book that can use that type of resource however the resource does not appear in the book until you assign it to an object as a property You can use resources to e Apply a graphic to a button or to an Image object e Substitute a custom cursor for a ToolBook system cursor e Change the default drag image or no drop cursor that appears when an object is dragged or dropped e Add an icon that appears when your application is minimized e Adda menu bar that appears in multiple windows of your application e identify a shared script that is used by multiple objects in your application e Substitute a custom Windows icon when you save your application as an EXE file ToolBook stores only one copy of the resource in the book no matter how many objects refer to it As a result you can apply the resource to as many objects as you
396. rt menu In the Import dialog box select ToolBook files bk in the Import type list Click Format to display the Book Format dialog box Choose Pages to indicate that you are importing a page range and then enter the starting and ending pages to import in the From and To boxes respectively To import a single page enter its number as the starting and ending page If you want to import the background along with the pages select Include background Click OK to return to the Import dialog box Navigate to and select the book file you want to import and then click Open ToolBook inserts the pages from the selected book into the current book If you selected Include background ToolBook also imports the backgrounds of the pages you indicated Using OpenScript e To import pages from a ToolBook book use the import command specify a file name with the tbk extension and then indicate the page range to import Navigates to end of book then imports 15 pages from another book using the background of the current page go to last page import pages 2 to 16 of book c mybooks glossary Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 263 Importing and Exporting Data without background Customizing the Import Process If you want to import only certain fields or records or assign the imported text to existing pages or new pages on an existing background you can create a script that c
397. rty value fe Specify the new value for the property as an expression Specify the new value for the property as a literal value Enter the expression Figure 5 A Properties for Action dialog box For details about accessing action properties see Setting properties for actions later in this chapter 204 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating Action Sequences Using the Actions Editor Conditions You can insert a condition into your action sequence to respond to a particular circumstance such as the state of an object or the selection a user makes Inserting a condition creates a conditional structure a junction at which ToolBook follows one of two or more distinct paths as it executes the action sequence When you insert a conditional If structure ToolBook automatically inserts an End if statement to indicate the end of the structure Any subsequent conditions you insert in the same structure begin with Else if or for the final conditional expression Else Else is a catch all that covers any condition not specified in an If or Else if statement Within this conditional structure ToolBook carries out only the sequence of actions directly following the first true conditional expression it encounters After you insert a condition in an action sequence you define the condition in the Properties dialog box that appears when you click the expression hotword in the action seque
398. rved Duplication prohibited Using and Modifying Buttons Behavior Specify the button s behavior at run time Drag amp Drop Specify the appearance and behavior of the button when it is dragged or dropped at Reader level 3 Optional Close the Properties for Button dialog box Using OpenScript To specify properties for the button set the e caption property to specify the text that appears on the button caption of button Next Page Next Page e captionPosition property to specify where the caption appears If you have a graphic attached to the button this property sets the caption relative to the graphic if you don t have a graphic this property centers the caption captionPosition of button Next Page left e highlight property to see a visual indication when the button is clicked highlight of button Next Page true e excludeTab property to exclude the button from the tab order excludeTab of button Next Page true e enabled property to determine whether the button is dimmed or available false dims the button enabled of button Next Page false e _borderStyle property to specify the button s border style borderStyle of button Off checkBox You can specify a variety of button border styles using the Properties for Button dialog box or OpensScript Button border styles Example Border Style OpenScript Value Button None none Button Pushbutton pus
399. s Parameters Local Variables Global Variables Available local variables Shortweek al RESER ii Actions Editor Shared Actions TimelnHours J File Edit Insert Action Tools Jy eala lx glt tla Help c T ip y y3 Shared actions TimelnHours Parameters Days Minutes Returns retum alue F OX Set Variable a JE Set AvaWeek to Minutes Days 60 xi Execute Sharad Actions al JX Set ShortWeek to AvaWeek Minutes 60 JE Set returnValue to AvaWeek ShortWeek 50 Execute Script x Prompts Navigation Scoring and Tracking Media Control Figure 11 Creating a shared action sequence 212 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating and Using Shared Action Sequences gt To define parameters for a shared action sequence 1 Open or create a new shared action sequence 2 Click the Define Variables and Parameters button ES on the Actions Editor toolbar The Parameters and Variables dialog box appears On the Parameters tab click New In the Parameters dialog box enter a descriptive name and then click OK Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have defined all the parameters your shared action sequence needs to complete any operations it performs gt To define a variable for a shared action sequence 1 Open or create a new shared action sequence 2 Click the Define Variables and Parameters button wel on the Actions
400. s exporting your ToolBook application for use on the Internet To learn about exporting your application to an Internet ready file format see Chapter 22 Distributing applications on the Internet Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 253 Importing and Exporting Data Importing and Exporting Text You can import and export text into a field or record field A text field is a ToolBook object that contains text a text field can reside on the foreground or background of a page A record field resides on the background of a page and displays changing text consistently from page to page data entry forms for example For more information about text and record fields see Chapter 8 Working with Text When you import to a text field you move data from one source document into one text field When you import to a record field you move data from one source file into multiple record fields Exporting from text fields or record fields moves data into one text file You can import a text file into record fields as a fixed field file or a delimited field file In fixed field files the field size is predetermined and constant In delimited field files the size can vary and is delimited by special characters that you define You must insert the delimiter in the source file the file from which you are importing the text at each place where you want a new record field to begin Importing Text Files
401. s parent window and minimizes when the parent window is minimized A pop up window can be dragged outside its parent s boundaries Floating palettes are usually pop up windows All windows are either child windows or pop up windows See also child window parent window Precedence The order in which operators are evaluated Operators with a higher precedence are evaluated before operators with a lower precedence For example the multiplication operator has a higher precedence than the addition operator See also operator Print Preview Window The window that previews what a page will look like when it is printed Printer System Properties ToolBook properties that affect how reports or pages are printed such as the property printBorders Properties Attributes of an object that define its appearance and behavior such as the object s name color and whether the object can be dragged Properties Dialog Box A window in which you can view and edit an object s properties Publish to Web A process that prepares your ToolBook application for Internet distribution This process can automatically convert your application to DHTML format You can access Publish to Web from the File menu See also application DHTML Pushbutton A button style composed of a three dimensional rectangle and a button caption that appears to move when clicked Often used to trigger an action such as navigating from one page to another Query Message A message sen
402. s that are not used on the imported pages will not be added to the new book Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 261 Importing and Exporting Data Importing Books When you import a book ToolBook inserts all of its pages and backgrounds after the current page of the current book assigning each one a new ID number If the imported pages and backgrounds had names in the source book these stay the same ToolBook moves the pages that originally followed the current page to the end of the book and assigns them new page numbers but their ID numbers and names remain For example if you navigate to page 1 of a book that has two pages on a single background and then import a book that also has two pages on a single background the page numbers page ID numbers and background ID numbers will be updated as shown in Figure 6 P number 2 Page ID 1 Background ID 0 Page number 4 Page ID 1 Background ID 0 Page number Page ID 0 Background ID 0 Page number 3 Page ID 3 Background ID 1 Page number 2 Page ID 2 Background ID 1 Page number 2 Page ID Background ID 0 Page number 1 Page ID 0 Se Background ID 0 Page ID 0 Background ID 0 You can import a book into Instructor puts the pages and the background another book from the imported book afier the currrent page Figure 6 Importing a book gt To import a book 1 From anew book or from the page i
403. s two search paths one for the hard disk and one for the CD ROM drive so you can create separate search paths for media that you intend to distribute on CD ROM For example you would list media that will be installed on the user s hard disk in the hard disk media path while you would list media that will remain on the CD ROM in the CD ROM media path Each search path can store multiple directory names when ToolBook searches the paths it looks through each directory in turn until it finds the clip When you create a new clip Instructor checks the source file path against the existing media search paths and removes the portion of the clip s path that is already in the search paths By default the current book s path is included in the hard disk search path If you store the full path with the clip when you create it but decide later to make the clip path independent you can change the links to the clip s source file using the ToolBook AutoPackager For more information about using the AutoPackager see Chapter 23 Preparing Native ToolBook Applications for Release When you are ready to distribute your application you can specify that the media search paths match the directories in which users will install your application ToolBook stores media path information in two book properties and three clip properties Media path information locations Type Property Information Book HDMediaPath List of subdirectories on ha
404. script editor or Command window For more information about using the OpenScript programming language refer to the Programming in OpenScript electronic book gt To create a bution using OpenScript e Use the draw command with the button object type specifying the bounds of the button in page units For convenience you can assign a name to the button immediately after drawing it For example to draw a one inch square pushbutton draw button from 1440 1440 to 2880 2880 name of selection Next Page Setting Button Properties You can select a button and then set its properties in the Properties for Button dialog box Each tab contains properties that set some aspect of a button s behavior and appearance gt To set the properties of a button 1 Select the button and then click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar The Properties for Button dialog box appears 2 Click one or more tabs and select or enter the options you want to set as described in the table below ToolBook button properties Click this tab To do this Draw Set the caption text and position border style drawing and highlight options color options and current state options Graphics Specify a button graphic and set graphic options for each button state Bounds Set the button s position and size Font Set the font style size effects and formatting options 130 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights rese
405. sennsenssensnns 228 Example 3 Changing Object Properties cccecsceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaaeeeeaeeseneeeseaeeesaeeneeeeee 229 Building the Action Seg enCE sessen e aa a siaii 230 Testing the Action SegUeNC Essien a a a a 231 Example 4 Using Shared Action Sequences cccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeesaeeeeeeetaas 232 Building the Shared Action Sequence eeessessseesseesrsesrsssnsssnssennsennseunsennronnsouusonusonusssnsssneess 233 Building the Action Sequence for the List BOX ccceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeneeees 235 Testing the Action SCQUENCE issar arnas E aa a a 238 Troubleshooting Action Seg UencES is sisien ianiai niaidne dinani insidie 239 USINO PROS OCS iat tiie ate ea dah nena oa ard i anda E EEEE EA EEO REEE ERED 241 INTFOOUCTION ennen E E E E E EEE anid 241 Aboul RESOUTC ES arcano n a EEE Sone EEEE EEEE a ESTEE ERE E atin ann 241 Creating and Modifying RESOUICES ccccceeeceeeenceceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeaeeseeeeseaeeeeaeeeeneeseaes 242 Adding Resources to a Bo0Kiviavscectiiccrav sateen itie weed EE etn av ended craven inane 244 Assigning Resources as Object Properties icira aaia 245 Working with R SOUICES i cnsv sess ccccrieiscctvencs a EEE EEE EEEE EE EEE EE 245 Adding a Graphic to a BUTTO Msisi aana aaa 245 Changing the Drag Image and No Drop Cursor sssssssssseeseeeseeeeesseesseesensnnssinssenesennsnnene 246 Changing a Viewer s
406. sequence of actions multiple times you create a single shared action sequence and call it as many times as you need it Using shared action sequences also facilitates editing and troubleshooting If you discover a problem with a shared action sequence or need to alter its behavior you only need to make one change rather than many You can also use a shared action sequence like a function to perform an operation and return a value to the action sequence that calls it When you create a shared action sequence for this purpose you can define parameters that the shared action sequence uses to complete the operation For example in Figure 11 a shared action sequence is used to calculate the commuting hours a driver could save in a year by telecommuting working from home one day per week The shared action sequence TimelnHours which performs the calculation uses two parameters Days and Minutes To divide the calculation into manageable blocks it uses two local variables called AvgWeek and ShortWeek to store values while the action sequence runs After it completes the operation the shared action sequence returns the result the number of hours saved in a year to the action sequence that called it It uses a variable called returnValue to store the value that will be returned Parameters and Variables Parameters Local Variables Global Variables Available parameters Days Minutes Parameters and Variable
407. sessment section in your book Certificate category also contains various Frames that can be applied to the certificate page to change the graphical look of a certificate 164 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Using the Certificate Page Using the Certificate Page You can use the Certificate page from the Certificates category as is or customize it to meet your requirements To use a Certificate page in your book gt To use a Certificate page in your book 1 If you will not be using a Learning Management System consider adding a Student Name Prompt object from the Certificate category to the first page of your book This ensures that the learner s name is captured and displayed on the certificate page after the learner completes the course If you do not add this object to the beginning of your book this prompt appears when the learner navigates to the Certificate page 2 Navigate to the last page in your book and add the Certificate page to it from the Certificate category in the catalog by double clicking it 3 Access the basic properties of the Graphic object on the page and associate the required image to it Delete the graphic object if you do not want to display any graphic or logo If you do not have a quiz in your book delete the score object from the certificate page If you want the certificate page to be displayed from any other page in your book add the
408. shared script is stored as a resource in the book and can be applied to an object as needed Silent Dragging An option for drag and drop behavior that specifies that the source object can be dropped anywhere even if the destination object does not normally allow a drop Silent dragging is used to create drag and drop behavior for applications such as tool palettes or clip art books that might be used in conjunction with applications not configured to receive drop objects Solid Color A color that appears on a color display device when all pixels are the same color See also pixel Sorting The process of placing pages in order based on the contents of specified record fields Sound An audio CD MIDI MP3 or wave audio sound that can be played in an application See also MIDI MP3 wave audio Source Book The book from which pages are imported into another book Source Object In a drag and drop operation the object that is clicked to begin the operation and whose drag image is dragged See also drag image drag and drop Special Value A type of variable with a system defined value Special values available in the Actions Editor include pi true and false Spooler A temporary storage location for information that is being printed ToolBook gathers the information to be printed in a spooler and then sends the contents of the spooler to the designated printer In OpenScript you must use a spooler control structure to print Stack A list o
409. shes when a user clicks it See also button hotword Home Page Typically refers to either the first Web page in a series or to the Web page specified to open automatically with your browser See also Web page Hotword An object made up of one or more words in a text field or record field that has an ID number and can respond to mouse and keyboard events HTML See Hypertext Markup Language HTTP See Hypertext Transfer Protocol Hue Lightness and Saturation HLS Hue is the quality of a color corresponding to its position in the spectrum red orange yellow green cyan blue magenta Lightness is the amount of white or black in acolor Saturation is the intensity of a color At 0 zero percent saturation a color appears white at 100 percent saturation a color s hue is most intense See also red green and blue values RGB Hyperlink A property that links objects to another page or URL A hyperlink can be assigned to hotwords buttons or any other ToolBook object See also button hotword Hypertext A word or group of words that when clicked cause the browser to perform an action such as navigation to another page See also hyperlink hotword Hypertext Markup Language HTML A standard document format used for pages on the World Wide Web that uses tags to specify the properties of the document A Web browser can interpret the HTML tags and show the formatted document on the screen ToolBook can Publish an application as a series o
410. sing the AutoPackager The AutoPackager gathers all the files used in your application records information about your application and copies these files to one location Use the AutoPackager to create a setup program if you plan to distribute your application on CD ROM or on a local area network from which users will install the application locally You can also use the AutoPackager to update media paths if during the development process you moved your application files to a new location on your hard drive or to another computer The package created when you run the AutoPackager consists of all the files belonging to the application such as book files media files extension files and run time files as well as files that are required to install the application archive files setup program files and related data files When you package an application the AutoPackager e Gathers the media and application files needed to run your application and checks the path information for the media in your application e Prepares the files necessary to install your application using the options you specified and creates the Setup and Package directories e Optionally copies the package to a chosen destination to allow for testing the setup program and creating the CD ROM gt To package your book using the AutoPackager 1 From the File menu choose AutoPackager 2 Follow the instructions in the AutoPackager The AutoPackager will 304 Copyrig
411. sion you ll need to make before beginning an application is how you will deliver your course to your learners using the Internet or an intranet a local area network or a CD ROM Because each delivery method may require different preparation you will want to make this decision early in your project development The table on the following page provides a brief overview of application delivery options and requirements to consider for each method Chapter 22 Distributing Applications on the Internet and Chapter 23 Preparing Native ToolBook Applications for Release cover these issues in greater detail You may want to review these chapters before you begin your project so that you are prepared for some of the requirements you ll meet later on 24 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Building an Application Prepare Your Project for Release Based on a Method of Distribution Distribution Method Platforms Supported Preparation Guidelines Via the Internet or intranet as a series of Web pages that incorporate DHTML Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 0 or later Firefox 3 0 or later Apple iPhone and iPod Touch 2 0 or later Apple iPad 3 2 or later Safari 3 or later Google Android 1 6 or later Windows Mobile 6 5 or later Chrome 5 or later BlackBerry 6 or later Do not use the OpenScript programming language in your application instead use the Actions Editor visual prog
412. size this application window to the size that you want to show in the simulation and get the screen ready for recording It is best to close other applications before you start recording Open the Sim AutoBuilder to begin recording and press the Print Screen key or another key you have specified to capture the appearance of the screen for each step that will occur during the simulation In general you should press the Print Screen key after you send a command or instruction to the software application While you are recording press the Print Screen key after e navigating to another page e opening a dialog box e selecting a menu item e double clicking an icon e performing an action that causes the software application to respond in some way Each step in a simulation should include only one action that requires the recorded software application to perform a specified task A step can be either a single action such as clicking a button or multiple actions If multiple actions are recorded as part of a step these actions should be related to each other such as typing text in a field and pressing the Enter key to signal the completion of entering text As an example of a single step in a simulation the user could choose several options in a dialog box and end the step by clicking the OK button Simply changing the text in a field or the selected state of a check box does not require that you end the step while recording data changes can be g
413. source using the utility application When you save the resource you will have the option to save it as a resource in your book Do this and then close the utility application Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working with Resources The resource appears in the graphical list in the Resource Manager dialog box 4 Type a unique name in the Name box under Resource properties ToolBook assigns an ID number to the resource that you can also use to refer to it 5 Close the Resource Manager dialog box Using OpenScript You can write and execute OpenScript code using the script editor or Command window For more information about using the OpenScript programming language refer to the Programming in OpenScript electronic book e To import a resource use the import command import icon resource c toolbook icon plane ico as plane e To copy a resource from another ToolBook book use the copy resource command copy resource icon airplane of book travel tbk to this book e To automatically import a resource from another book set a resource property to a resource that is owned by a different book dragImage of button Play MIDI cursor hand cur of book tutor tbk Assigning Resources as Object Properties You can assign a resource that you have already added to your book to an individual object or you can create a resource for an object when you are ready to assign it R
414. sseeecenettecnraedeeeats 304 Gathering File Ses sci sect cote eck ned dannii eno deaa ei aaa Aaa Dues ciel Sensates Eaa 305 PACKAGING FICS rivsacec ects eset hose van loeesannc ce R or n oes reac et cg TANOD ea NE veal Sena eae geen O ENNEN 305 OP YING FIGS foer ha sy fac sa sec nee tecdeveuse EE A A bel teptesees 305 Including the Run time Version Of TOOIBOOK 0 c cc eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeseeeaeereeeeaeees 305 viii Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Table of Contents Using ToolBookion a NOtWwork svciscicc0ci ie tiene niin heidi EEES 306 Installing and Testing your Application ec cceccceceesecceeeseseceeeseeeeeensnseceeesteeeeeesneeaeeesneeaeeneneaees 306 Uninstalling an Application iiccinc cave cine ataean ie laie cay nie adieeee ite adie nanan 307 GIOSSANY E 308 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited ix Getting Started Introduction Welcome to ToolBook the complete courseware authoring system that allows you to create sophisticated online learning applications In this book you ll learn about the basic concepts and tools you need to build and manage complete effective courseware Before you go on to explore ToolBook read through this chapter Here you will learn how to install and start ToolBook find out about the resources available to help you learn ToolBook and preview this book s contents
415. ssion button In the Build Expression dialog box build the following expression The sales tax due on the amount you entered amp Tax a Type The sales tax due on the amount you entered b Type amp ampersand c Inthe Select the type of item to insert list select Variables and parameters d Inthe Select a variable or parameter list select Tax and then click Insert into Expression 6 Click OK to close the Build Expression dialog box and then click OK to close the Properties dialog box 7 Inthe Actions Editor from the File menu choose Update Actions amp Close Testing the Action Sequence The following steps test both action sequences you created in this example gt To test the action sequence 1 Press F3 to switch to Reader level 238 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Troubleshooting Action Sequences 2 Inthe Price field type 580 3 Inthe list box click each of the cities and note the message that ToolBook displays When you click Seattle a dialog box should appear that reads The sales tax due on the amount you entered 49 88 a When you click Atlanta a dialog box should appear that reads The sales tax due on the amount you entered 34 8 When you click New York a dialog box should appear that reads The sales tax due on the amount you entered 47 85 If your results do not match those listed above return to Author level an
416. statusBar Shows status bar at Reader level readerStatusBar of viewer ID 0 true Working with Palettes A palette is a collection of tools or buttons that you use to draw new objects or to set values that modify existing objects For example you choose a tool on the tool palette to draw a new object and you choose a line width on the line palette to determine how thick a line should be ToolBook includes six palettes described in the following table ToolBook Palettes Use this palette If you want to 74 Tool Create new objects on a page Line Set line width or border around an object Line ends Add arrow heads or tails to a line Sd Pattern Set a pattern or design to fill an object zis Color Set the color of an object or of text 2 Polygon ak number of sides from 3 to 99 of the next polygon to be Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 35 Learning the ToolBook Interface gt To hide or show a palette e From the View menu point to Palettes and then choose a palette Alternatively click the palette s button on the ToolBook toolbar gt To move a palette e Position the pointer at the top of the palette and then drag the palette to its new position Figure 3 Palettes You can show as many palettes as you like hide them to make room onscreen or move them around as needed 36 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All
417. store values that can be modified while an action sequence runs In the Actions Editor you can define two types of variables local and global You can use a local variable only as part of the action sequence in which you defined it so local variables in different action sequences are unrelated even if you give them the same name A local variable is reset to its initial value each time the action sequence runs Global variables may be used by any action sequence If an action sequence contains a local variable with the same name as a global variable the local variable is used when the action sequence runs gt To define a variable 1 Inthe Actions Editor click the Define Variables button wel on the toolbar The Variables dialog box appears 2 On either the Local Variables or Global Variables tab depending on the type you want to define click New In the Variables dialog box type the name of the variable and then click OK In the Initial Value box type a value Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 209 Using the Actions Editor 5 Click OK Variables Local Variables Global Variables Available local variables Variable name Time Initialize variable as an array Initial value Figure 10 The Variables dialog box Using Arrays You can define an array to store related data in one variable An array has a variable name followed by an index in brackets The index
418. supply values for the two parameters it requires Rate and Price gt To execute a shared action sequence 1 Select the first condition in the action sequence If selecteditemText of self Seattle 2 From the Insert menu point to Action point to General and then choose Execute Shared Actions The Properties for Action dialog box appears 3 Inthe Select a shared action sequence list select CalculateTax The two parameters you defined when you created the shared action sequence Price and Rate appear under Parameter Name 4 Under Parameter Value insert the cursor in the box next to Price and then click the Build expression button 5 Inthe Build Expression dialog box do the following a Inthe Select the type of item to insert list select Object properties b Inthe Select an object list select Field Price c Inthe Select a property list select text and then click Insert into Expression Click OK Under Parameter Value insert the cursor in the box next to Rate and then type 8 6 In the Specify a variable to store the return value list select Tax Click OK 0 oN D Figure 5 Properties for Execute Shared Actions Action Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 237 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples Copying Pasting and Editing an Action There is only one difference between the action you just inserted and the actions you will insert aft
419. supported by the Universal Media Player If this player is available These file formats will play Flash Player Shockwave Player Shockwave and Flash files swf e QuickTime files mov qt e Video files avi mp4 Windows Media Player e Audio files aif aifc aiff mid midi rmi wav mp3 mpa m3u e MPEG files mpg mpeg m1v mp2 e Windows Media files asf asx wm wma wmv wax RealPlayer e Animated GIF gif e Flash and Shockwave files swf e Graphic files gif jpeg jpg png e SMIL files smi smil e Audio files aa mp3 dat m3u pls e RealMedia files ra rm rmj ram rmm rom e RealText3D files r3t QuickTime e QuickTime files qt mov mp4 You can find the Universal Media Player in the Media Players category of the Catalog 178 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Using the Universal Media Player To add the Universal Media Player Open the Catalog from the View menu In the Media Players category select the Universal Media Player o N y Drag the Universal Media Player from the object pane and then drop it onto your page Choosing a Media File After you place the Universal Media Player on a page you can use the Extended Properties dialog box to choose a media file gt To choose a media file 1
420. switch ToolBook from object selection mode to text editing mode You can also switch to text editing mode by selecting a field and then choosing Edit Text from the Text menu or by selecting a field right clicking it and selecting the Edit Text option in the right click menu gt To type text Using the interface e Double click the field or right click the field and select the Edit Text option in the right click menu e Ifthe field contains placeholder text select the text that you want to replace and then type your text e To end text editing mode click outside the field press the ESC key or right click the field and select the Exit Edit Text option Using OpenScript e To enter text ina field you set the text property of that field text of field city Yakima Tip After the insertion point appears in one editable field you can place the point in another editable field by clicking only once Importing Text You can add text to your book from other programs by importing a file or by copying and pasting a selection of text When you add text from another program most character formatting is kept and paragraph formatting used in the first paragraph is applied to subsequent paragraphs in the selection ToolBook allows you to import text in Rich Text Format RTF or in ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange format Most text editing applications such as Microsoft Word allow you to save your text in eit
421. t cecccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaesecneeeseaeeesaaesseneessaees 130 Setting Button Propertie S zceete davockedeeeskes weavers teases aieane a E a Eea SE AEN AREER Eaa a aE 130 Formatting Caption Tet science hacer ataa a patie Seay vine a E aaea a AERAN 132 Creating HyperniNKS rostmana R EEE EEA dances E EEA E aa a aN 132 SCripting aA BOWO Mis ranse ienaa E RER EEEE REAA a AANE ly EEA EUERE NANNES 133 Programming a Button with the Actions EGitor sesssssisosssisniiienia 133 Adding a Graphic tora BUOM wececceteecteeteheetes ears deecctenets a aa ai aTa eaten ty Hae 133 Creating Transparent Areas in a Bitmap ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeceeeseeeeseaaeeseaeessaees 135 Displaying the Graphic and Caption ccccceecceceeeceeseeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeessaeeeeeeseeeees 136 AADOUE THOLWONOS ss seers cesde iena k iane Ea ae ec eter aed eid id ie eee 136 Creating and Modifying HOtwords cccccceceeeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeeaas 136 EE CUEING HOUWONOS oeeie jotk ieser EEEE EAEE E EEEE AREE EE ieee atte ede ee tia 138 Applying Color to HOtwords isisisi aiandi anaa aaa adaa aeaa anaa 138 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Table of Contents REMOVING HOTWOIS visi cecieeetsncie ected eenn EREE E die aeneed Geode deanna eeactee teats 138 Working with List Boxes and Combo BOXES 11ssssececceccseesessennneesee
422. t e Define a variable to store the value returned by the shared action sequence e Define conditions for behavior e Call and supply parameters to a shared action sequence e Display a message in a dialog box Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 235 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples Opening the Actions Editor and Selecting an Event The event that activates this shared action sequence is a user selecting a city from the Cities list box You need to create an action sequence for the list box that runs in response to the On select event gt To open the Actions Editor and select an event 1 On the Tax Calculator page of the Actions Editor Walkthrough book select the Cities list box 2 From the Object menu choose Actions The Actions Editor appears 3 Inthe Event list choose On select Defining Variables The shared action sequence you created returns a value You need to define a local variable to store that value while the action sequence runs gt To define a local variable 1 Click the Define Variables button on the Actions Editor toolbar 2 On the Local Variables tab click New 3 Inthe Variables dialog box type Tax and then click OK 4 Inthe Initial value box type O zero 5 Click OK Inserting Conditions to Determine List Box Selection Depending on which city a user selects in the list box you will send a different tax rate asa parameter to
423. t Tips for Optimizing a Book Designed for DHTML Several factors affect how quickly a Published DHTML application displays in a Web browser The speed of the Internet connection the size of the media files in an application and the complexity of the page design all contribute to the length of time necessary to download an application You can minimize the amount of time it takes to run your application in a Web browser by building a book that is designed to use objects and media files efficiently gt To reduce the amount of time required to display your application in a Web browser e Use one background in the book or use the fewest number of backgrounds possible e Limit the number of objects on the page e Use graphics with a small file size If bandwidth is an issue reduce the overall size of your graphics e Use the Universal Media Player from the Catalog to show streaming media files Due to the large file size of AVI files you should not use the AVI file format for playing videos over the Internet e For question feedback if you choose to play an audio file in response to a user s answer use a short AU file or play a streaming media file in the Universal Media Player You can make the Universal Media Player invisible if you choose While developing your book you should periodically Publish the book to DHTML and evaluate the result in a Web browser Try to test your Published application using the same type of Internet connection
424. t Book Actions dialog box specify a name and location for the text file Click OK Object name Page name Actions for Button Calculate of Page Commuter calculator Event On click Variables Define local variable Time Initial value 0 If text of Field Days lt 7 and text of Field Days gt 1 If text of Field Minutes gt 1 and text of Field Minutes lt 200 Execute Shared Actions TimeInHours Display alert In a year you could save amp amp Time amp amp hours Else Display alert Please enter a number of minutes between 1 and 200 End if Else Display alert Please enter a number of days between 1 and 7 End if Action sequence Figure 14 Actions displayed in a text file gt To view all the action sequences on a page 1 From the Tools menu point to Actions and then choose Show Page Actions The Show Page Actions dialog box appears 2 Do one of the following m Click Print to send the document to your default printer Click Copy to copy the contents of the window to the Clipboard You can then paste the actions into any text document 216 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Managing Action Sequences 3 Click Close Enabling and Disabling Actions You can disable any action in an action sequence You can disable actions to isolate others for testing or if you choose to remove some behavior from an action sequence
425. t Considerations located in your ToolBook documents folder Opening the Actions Editor The Actions Editor is a tool you can use to create an action sequence to handle an event for any object in your ToolBook application Once open the Actions Editor changes dynamically displaying supported events and any actions you have created for the currently selected object gt To open the Actions Editor e Do one of the following Select the object and then from the Object menu choose Actions Select the object and then click the Actions button on the ToolBook toolbar Right click the object and then click the Actions button on the right click menu Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 199 Using the Actions Editor Select the object and then press F5 Actions Editor Button Continue File Edit View Insert Action Tools Help Actions Editor X pE Alx eit Lig Toolbar nees On click Parameters mouseX mouseYshiftD own ctriD own Aci If test of field input 55 aioe Display alert The valued entered is not corect Display Alert Endif Display Confirmation 2 Display Query Actions Display Popup Text Palette lt Navigation Scoring and Tracking Media Control Statusbar Figure 2 The Actions Editor Creating Action Sequences Using the Actions Editor You create an action sequence in the Actions Editor by adding actions one
426. t behavior depending on which time marker generated the media timing event To distinguish one media timing event from another ToolBook sets a parameter named mediaPosition to the value the position in the file of the time marker that generated the event For example if you set a time marker at 1050ms and another at 2050ms the first time marker sends a media timing event with 1050 as the parameter and the second time marker sends the same event with 2050 as a parameter In the Actions Editor you can distinguish one media timing event from another by creating a conditional expression that compares whether the parameter sent with the event is equal to a specific value such as 1050 In this way you can respond to multiple media timing events in one action sequence gt Tocreate an action sequence to differentiate between media timing events 1 Select the Universal Media Player object and then click the Actions button on the toolbar The Actions Editor appears In the Event list select On media timing event From the Insert menu point to Condition and then choose If If the Properties for Condition dialog box does not appear click the Properties button on the Actions Editor toolbar 4 Click the Build Expression button a The Build Expression dialog box appears 5 Do the following Inthe Select the type of item to insert list select Variables and parameters in the Select a variable or parameter list select mediaPosition
427. t book the current TBK file If your media files are in the same directory as the current book or below it ToolBook locates them regardless of where the user installs them This is the simplest way to handle media paths on a hard drive For example consider the scenario where HDMediaPath contains lt BookPath gt and lt BookPath gt Media and the clip s mmSource property contains Bells wav If the book is installed in c Books ToolBook first searches c Books Bells wav and then it searches C Books Media Bells wav However if the book is installed in C MyFiles MyBooks ToolBook first searches C MyFiles MyBooks Bells wav and then it searches C MyFiles MyBooks Media Bells wav Similarly if the media search path contains the string lt CDROMS gt ToolBook searches all of the CD ROM drives on the user s computer If the user has more than one CD ROM drive ToolBook will search them all This is the simplest way to handle media paths on a CD ROM drive Both the lt BookPath gt and lt CDROM gt special values can be combined with additional path information as in the following examples lt CDROM gt Media lt BookPath gt Media Note the difference in how subdirectories can be added to these special values The lt cCDROM gt term implicitly includes the backslash directory so adding a backslash makes the path information invalid The lt BookPath gt term does not implicitly include the backslash so you must add it For example t
428. t menu choose Resources The Resource Manager dialog box appears In the Available resources list select the type of resource you want to export In the graphical list of resources select the resource you want to export Click Export The Export Resource dialog box appears 5 Enter a name for the resource navigate to and select a file to which to export it and then click OK ToolBook exports the resource Using OpenScript e Use the export command to export a resource export resource cursor point as c point cur Removing Resources from a Book If you re concerned about file size you can remove all unused resources from your book to reduce the book s file size When you remove a resource you are removing only the book s copy of the resource the resource s original file is unaffected You cannot remove a resource from a book if it has been assigned to an object You must first remove each object s reference to the resource using OpenScript or the object s Properties dialog box For example if you create a graphic button with a bitmap resource you must remove the bitmap from the button before you can remove the resource from the book The table that follows explains how to remove an object s reference to a resource by setting the object s property to the ToolBook default Note The Resource Manager dialog box maintains a reference count which reflects the number of times a resource is used in a book When the reference count f
429. t the Prompt for reset when saving check box 3 Optional Close the Properties for Book dialog box Preparing your Application based on a Distribution Method You ll prepare your application for release according to how you intend to distribute it If you plan to have your users install your application on their computers you ll gather the necessary files and create a setup program using the ToolBook AutoPackager The remainder of this section describes how to prepare your files for the distribution method you ve chosen A summary of distribution methods and preparation steps is provided in the table on the following page Prepare your files for release based on a method of distribution If you plan to deliver your Do the following to prepare for release application this way Via a local area network as a native If users will install the application on their own computers ToolBook application use the ToolBook AutoPackager to create a setup program Ensure that users are running the Windows operating system 302 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Preparing your Application based on a Distribution Method Via CD ROM Use the ToolBook AutoPackager to create a setup program Ensure that users are running the Windows operating system Via the Internet or intranet Use the Publish to Web process to prepare your application as a series of Web pages
430. t to an object to determine its state or the value of a particular property For example during a drag and drop operation ToolBook sends an allowDrop query message to each object under the cursor to determine whether the object will accept a drop See also message Question Object A Catalog object with preprogrammed functionality that allows you to construct different types of questions Question obj ects can manage the user s response and score and can also deliver feedback Radio Button A button style composed of a circle and a button caption The circle toggles a dot on and off when a user clicks the active area of the button Often used for a group of alternative items from which only one can be selected Reader Level One of the two working levels in ToolBook At Reader level a user can move between pages and books click hotwords and buttons make selections from combo boxes and type text in editable fields Applications are used and tested at Reader level Compare Author level Record A group of related data fields in a database file For example the name address and phone number fields for one listing in an address book are a record Record Field A text field positioned on the background of a page that can contain different text on each page See also background text field Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 323 Glossary Red Green and Blue Values RGB A means of specifying
431. tails about creating hotwords see Chapter 10 Adding Interactive Features to your Application For the most part you work with record fields in the same way that you work with text fields However take care when cutting pasting or deleting record fields If you cut a record field from the background and paste it on the page it becomes a regular text field In addition removing the record field from the background of one page removes it and the data it contains from all pages that share that background ToolBook displays a warning if you attempt to remove a record field Creating Fields There are three ways to create a text or record field You can drag a field from the Catalog to your page Alternatively you can create a field using the ToolBook tool palette Finally you can use OpenScript to draw a field Adding a Field from the Catalog The Catalog provides a wide variety of fields that you can use to present text on the screen In addition to basic text fields you can choose special fields that display shadowed text formatted lists or a marquee gt To add afield from the Catalog 1 Click the Catalog button ley on the ToolBook toolbar to open the Catalog Select the Text Field category in the Catalog Choose the field you want from the object pane and then drop it onto your page or background Tip You can also double click an object in the Catalog to add it to the center of your page 104 Copyright 2012 SumTota
432. tal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Adding a Graphic to a Button Scripting a Button You can write a script specifying how a button should behave using the script editor For example the following script displays a question in a pop up dialog box and responds to a user s choice Note Keep in mind that you should not write scripts for objects if you plan to Publish your book to DHTML to handle buttonClick request Do you want to continue with Yes or No if it yes go to next page end if end buttonClick Like any other object buttons can be grouped You can write a script that sets the behavior of individual buttons and the behavior of the group For example you might create several buttons and write a script for each that defines the behavior of a specific tool You could then group the buttons into a tool palette and write a script to define different aspects of the group s behavior such as the default location of the palette For details about using OpenScript to define button behavior refer to the Programming in OpenScript electronic book Programming a Button with the Actions Editor You can use the Actions Editor to program the behavior of a button easily without using OpenScript In the Actions Editor you can program a button to play media prompt users for input and accomplish a variety of other tasks by linking an action or series of actions to a button click You can also set conditions for be
433. te OpenScript code using the script editor or Command window For more information about using the OpenScript programming language refer to the Programming in OpenScript electronic book e Create a new clip using the new clip command Set the beginning point using mmBeginPoint the ending point using mmEndPoint and the media search path ToolBook will use to locate the media source file using mmSearchHD and or mmSearchCD new clip from c media horn avi name of It tuba Assigns name to clip mmBeginPoint of clip tuba 00 00 1 15 mmEndPoint of clip tuba 00 00 2 07 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 185 Adding Audio and Video Files mmSearchHD of clip tuba true Managing Clips In ToolBook only a reference to a clip is stored in your application the actual digital data remains stored in the original media source file When you add a clip to your application ToolBook keeps track of the location of that clip and includes it when you package your book for distribution If you add a clip to your application and then delete or move the original file the clip will not play Therefore you will want to take care when organizing any media clips you add to your ToolBook application Tip Remove a clip from your book if you are not using it Removing unused clips will reduce the size of your application file Be certain however that a clip you remove is not referenced in a
434. the Catalog When you add an object to the Catalog you can assign it a name and search keywords If you want to enter multiple search keywords use commas to separate them Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 71 Working with the Catalog gt o 7 e eo IN NO oP oO DMZ y To add an object to the Catalog In the main window select the object you want to add to the Catalog Open the Catalog if it is not already open Right click on a category in the Catalog window From the right click menu choose Add Selected Object The Add Selected Object dialog box opens Type a name for the object a description if desired and any search keywords Select or create a category and then click OK To remove an object from the Catalog Choose Customize Catalog from the view menu Click the name of a category to select it in the Customize Catalog dialog box Click the Edit button In the list of objects select the name of the object you want to remove Click the Remove button When prompted choose Yes to remove the icon Click OK to close each dialog box ToolBook removes the Catalog object from the Catalog 72 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Chapter6 6 Working with Objects Introduction Buttons graphics and questions are all examples of ToolBook objects This chapter introduces you to the concepts skills and too
435. the Move cursor e Extend a path by adding segments to the end or middle of a path or shorten a path by deleting segments using the Vertex cursor e Create reshape or delete a curve in a path by modifying segments of it using the Vertex cursor For complete step by step instructions about creating modifying and playing path or cel based animations refer to Help To open Help from the Animation Editor click the Help button Selecting an Animation Before you can modify an animation or its animation settings you must select the animation you want to edit There are two ways to select an animation either in the main window before you open the Animation Editor or from within the Animation Editor gt To select an object in the Animation Editor 1 With no objects selected in the main window choose Path Animation from the Object menu 2 Click the object you want to select in the main window of the Animation Editor Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 175 Hiding Showing and Animating Objects 3 Inthe Select Object dialog box do the following m Inthe Object to animate list select the name of the object or group to animate Inthe Animation list select the number of the animation to edit Click OK You can click the Select Object button FN to open the Select Object dialog box where you can select an object to edit Setting Animation Options After you create an anim
436. the imported text into a record field with a name that matches that of the original record field For example if you import a page containing text from a record field called Student Name ToolBook attempts to find a record field with the same name on the current background and place the text there If no record fields match by name ToolBook proceeds to match by ID number 2 Matching record field ID number ToolBook puts the imported text into a record field with an ID number that matches that of the original record field If there is no match by either name or ID number ToolBook proceeds to match by layer order 3 Matching layers ToolBook puts the imported text in a record field that is on the same layer as the original record field For example the text from the record field at layer 3 on the original background is placed into the record field at layer 3 on the current background If the destination background contains more record fields than the source background ToolBook maps the record field s text as described above leaving the extra record fields on the destination background empty If the source background contains more record fields than the destination ToolBook maps the text as described above and discards the text of the extra record fields gt To import a page or range of pages into your book 1 From anew book or from the page in an existing book after which you want to insert the imported pages choose Pages from the Inse
437. the properties you want oa Fw Optional Close the Properties dialog box Some buttons such as the buttons in a navigation set also have extended properties that you can specify To quickly determine whether a button has extended properties you can select the button The Extended Properties button on the toolbar becomes available if the button has extended properties Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 129 Adding Interactive Features to your Application Creating a Button Using the Tool Palette There are six tools on the tool palette that you can use to draw ToolBook button objects e Pushbutton tool Use a pushbutton to prompt a user action such as navigation from one page to another e Label Button tool Use a label button A to provide quick access to the button s functionality without the use of a mouse e Radio Button 3D tool Use a radio button 3D ina group to allow the user choose one option from a set of mutually exclusive options When one option in the group is selected the others are not selected e Check Box 3D tool Use a check box 3D Mi to allow a user to turn options on and off gt To create a button using the tool palette 1 From the tool palette choose the button tool of your choice 2 Click on your page and drag the cursor until the button is the desired size Creating a Button Using OpenScript You can write and execute OpenScript code using the
438. ties for Question dialog box differs slightly for each type of question object but most question objects allow you to specify e each possible answer to be recognized e which answer is correct e how many times the student can try to answer the question e the options for assigning a score to the question e the options for providing feedback to the student e the question text displayed in a quiz summary gt To set the extended properties of a question object 1 Select the question object 152 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Question Objects in Action 2 Click the Extended Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar The Properties for Question dialog box appears This dialog box displays information specific to the selected question object The remainder of this procedure outlines the most common options 3 Click the General tab and do the following m Type a unique name in the Question name box Specify any other options you want 4 Click the Answers tab and do the following Under Possible answers enter the answers specify the correct answer or answers and then specify any other options you want 5 Click the Scoring tab and do the following Select Score this question specify the weight of an answer and then specify the scoring options you want 6 Click the Immediate Feedback tab and do the following Select the Enable feedback at time of respons
439. tion sequences using the Actions Editor As you work with the Actions Editor you will learn to combine actions in many ways to create powerful results Each of the examples that follow focuses on learning a particular skill using variables for example All four of the examples demonstrate one or more of the following e Defining and using variables and parameters e Adding actions that display text change object properties and send users to certain pages e Handling multiple events e Testing conditions e Building expressions e Using shared action sequences For more information about using the Actions Editor to create action sequences see Chapter 17 Using the Actions Editor Using the Examples You can easily recreate the examples in this chapter because most of the work of building the pages has been done for you in the Actions Editor Walkthrough book All you have to do is open the book and create the action sequences that add behavior to the objects This chapter assumes you are familiar with basic ToolBook concepts Before you begin you should feel comfortable switching between Author and Reader level adding pages and backgrounds adding objects to pages using the Catalog or the tool palette and using the Properties dialog box to refine an object s appearance and behavior Since the examples that follow are self contained you can complete them in any order you like Each example takes between five and twenty minutes to compl
440. tion you created in several ways using the Internet or an intranet a local area network or a CD ROM ToolBook prepares your files according to the distribution method you choose Exploring the Kinds of Applications You Can Create with ToolBook ToolBook has specially designed features that allow you to create online courses for training and education environments You can create a variety of courses with ToolBook including simulations interactive demonstrations and guided tours to name just a few But you re not limited to courseware development With ToolBook s flexible and versatile authoring environment you also can create online presentations kiosk applications catalogs and games The blueprint for your ToolBook application resides in your own imagination Interactive Online Learning Applications An interactive online learning application provides computer based instruction that responds to a student s actions You can create a ToolBook application that not only presents information but also quizzes students and stores their responses displays hints acknowledges correct answers and tracks progress from lesson to lesson Planning your project Good project planning can help you to take advantage of the sophisticated courseware authoring features and powerful distribution capabilities that ToolBook offers This section describes specific file organization and distribution issues to consider before you begin using ToolBook Copyr
441. tions you want to give users you can make text function as an important part of a book s programmed actions Hotwords provide another level of individual control in the interface For example you can use hotwords to define difficult terminology saving space and allowing you to create an application appropriate for more than one level of expertise Experts dont have to search through a lot of definitions while novices can access the information they need Creating and Modifying Hotwords You create and modify hotwords at Author level Like other ToolBook objects hotwords have properties that you can set to define their physical appearance After you create a hotword you define a hyperlink for it Note In order for ToolBook to run a hyperlink a text field must be set to recognize mouse events On the Behavior tab of the Properties for Text Field dialog box the option labeled Lock the text and activate mouse events must be selected gt To create a hotword and define a hyperlink 1 Select the text or inline graphic that you want to make into a hotword 2 Choose Create Hotword from the Text menu or press CTRL H 136 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Creating and Modifying Hotwords 3 With the hotword still selected from the Object menu choose Hyperlink or press CTRL SHIFT H 4 Inthe Hyperlink box specify the type of link and the link destination and then click OK 5 Press F
442. tively double click the object 2 Press SHIFT and then click an existing handle A new handle appears that you can drag to add another vertex to the object ert a 84 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Modifying the Appearance of Objects gt To delete a reshape handle e Press CTRL SHIFT while clicking a reshape handle If the object is a curve the handles are removed in pairs You cannot remove the last two handles in an object You cannot remove the last three handles of a polygon Constraining an Object s Shape With ToolBook you can proportionally constrain objects or constrain lines to certain angles To constrain an object s shape press CTRL while dragging The table below shows how objects are constrained when you press CTRL Constraining objects Press CTRL with this tool To constrain Oo Rectangle to square or rounded rectangle to rounded square Ellipse to circle Line angles to multiples of 45 lt lt i 0 45 90 and so on Q Rotation to multiples of 45 0 45 90 and so on D Shape to quarter of a circle Note You can also press CTRL before you move an object to restrict its movement to horizontal and vertical directions which is useful when you want to move objects that are precisely aligned with one another Modifying the Appearance of Objects You can modify the appearance of an object b
443. tle bar of a book in place of the file name 310 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Uninstalling an Application Caret Location The location of the insertion point within a text field or record field measured by the number of lines down from the top and number of characters in from the left The caret location is often used to define the ends of lines in a text field A line is designated by a carriage return linefeed not by wordwrap Carriage Return Linefeed CRLF An OpenScript constant that represents ASCII values 13 and 10 the characters carriage return and linefeed CRLF moves text to the next line in a text field or record field Cascading Menu A subsidiary menu that appears to the side of a submenu and presents additional choices Catalog A ToolBook file that contains authoring objects such as draw objects action buttons question objects graphics media players navigation objects and user customized objects Cel Animation A type of animation in which individual views of an object called cels are shown in rapid sequence to make the object appear to move or change In ToolBook you can create cel animations by drawing individual objects to act as cels and then grouping them Certificate A page containing details such as the name of the learner and the date of completion that can be displayed when a learner completes a course The certificate page can be customized by the co
444. to discrete steps and assigning numeric values to each step Angled Line A single line with three or more points such as a zigzag The Catalog contains angled lines that you can drag and drop onto a page Animation A file that you can incorporate as a clip in ToolBook You can also animate objects in a book however you cannot save an animation created in ToolBook as an animation file or create a clip from it ANSI See American National Standards Institute Application In ToolBook one or more books designed for a particular purpose such as online learning or information management Argument A constant variable or expression passed to a function or handler In the following example 33 is an argument x sin 33 See also constant function handler Array A Variable configured to work like a list or table of individual elements For example the following specifies the value of one element in an array x 3 x 1 amp text of field names See also variable ASCII See American Standard Code for Information Interchange Audio CD Sound stored as tracks on a compact disc and played from the compact disc Audio CD is stored in digital format as a series of binary values converted to analog sound within the CD ROM drive and then played back Audio Video Interleaved AVI A format for storing digital video in a file that alternates blocks of visual and sound information AVI files are particularly suited for storing on CD ROM bec
445. to have four data fields with 3 5 8 and 12 characters respectively You can type as many field lengths as needed to define the data fields 8 Click OK to return to the Export dialog box and click Save ToolBook exports the contents of the record fields to the file name you specified The data in each record field becomes a data field in the text file As ToolBook exports the last record field on each page it starts a new data record in the text file Note ToolBook adds spaces to data fields if the field length you specify is greater than the number of characters in the original record field Use positive numbers to export data aligned on the left with fill space inserted on the right Use negative numbers to export data aligned on the right with fill spaces inserted on the left If a field is larger than the specified size text is truncated on the right side Using OpenScript e To export text from record fields to a fixed field text file use the export command with the fixed keyword specifying the length of the fields Exports text from a book with 3 record fields put 40 80 10 into myFields 2nd field is right aligned export mybook dat as fixed using myFields Exporting to Delimited Field Files Figure 5 shows data from record fields exported to a delimited field file The first data record in the file contains data from the record fields on page 1 the next data record contains data from the record fields on page 2
446. ts OpenScript but leaves the executable script code intact This process prevents anyone from editing or viewing your scripts e Simulation Recorder This utility will watch as you use another application and record your interactions with it Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 15 Getting Started You can then import the recording into ToolBook and ToolBook will construct a ToolBook Simulation from that recorded data Version Updater This utility will upgrade your older ToolBook files to the current version You can update a single ToolBook file or an entire directory full of ToolBook files ToolBook Documentation A variety of documents are available to help beginners as well as more advanced users 16 Accessibility Guide Accessibility refers to making online information easy to obtain for all people including those with varying eyesight hearing capacity and motor skills By creating accessible Web pages with ToolBook your content will reach the widest audience possible Advanced Features Any ToolBook application delivered in the native TBK file format can use the built in OpenScript programming language This document describes advanced features that can be used to enhance and customize native ToolBook applications DHTML Export Considerations Describes differences in the appearance or behavior of certain objects in native ToolBook when compared to these same objects in a
447. ts reserved Duplication prohibited Specifying Feedback Choosing Immediate or Delayed Feedback Feedback for a question object can be immediate or delayed Immediate feedback appears in response to a specific question object for example a student clicks a button in a multiple choice question and hears a beep or sees a popup window that says Try again Delayed feedback is triggered when the question is scored or when a message is sent to the question object to make it play the feedback Delayed feedback is useful for providing feedback on multiple choice multiple correct questions where you want a student to select several correct answers and then click a button to receive feedback on the selected set of answers If you are creating a scored quiz do not use immediate feedback to tell the user whether an answer attempt is correct or incorrect ToolBook does not count an attempt that displays immediate feedback as an actual attempt A question with immediate feedback will be scored as though the student selected the correct answer on the first attempt even if it took the student three tries to select the correct answer Use immediate feedback when you e Do not plan to score a question e Want to display feedback such as Correct or Try again for each possible answer as the student is answering the question e Use delayed feedback when you e Plan to score a question as part of a quiz e Want to display feedback after the student
448. ttee Alias 1 An alternative name for a menu item that is not visible to the user If you create an alias for a menu item ToolBook sends the alias in place of the menu item name 2 When linking a dynamic link library function an alternative name given to the function Use an alias to avoid conflicting with ToolBook keywords or when you want to link the same function more than once in the same instance of ToolBook See also dynamic link libraries American National Standards Institute ANSI Typically ANSI refers to a set of 256 characters used in computing The first 128 of these characters are the same as the ASCII character set The remaining characters 128 255 include non English letters and other symbols called extended characters See also American Standard Code for Information Interchange American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCll Typically ASCII refers to the 8 bit 256 character standard for representing characters both printing and nonprinting on a computer For example the ASCII representation in decimal for a space is 32 See also American National Standards Institute 308 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Uninstalling an Application Analog Information that flows in a continuous stream and that can vary in infinitesimal increments Most computers cannot manipulate analog data so it must be converted to digital format by breaking the continuous flow in
449. tword s formatting and set it to the style of the book set the hotword s style to bookDefault hotwordStyle of hotword Popup bookDefault e The hotwordColor property specifies the color value of the hotwords The default for a book s hotwordColor property is red For example hotwordColor of this book cyan e Use the invert property to make the hotword appear highlighted invert of hotword Popup true e Use the highlight property to cause a hotword to flash momentarily when clicked highlight of hotword Popup true Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 137 Adding Interactive Features to your Application Editing Hotwords You can select and edit a hotword just as you edit other text in ToolBook When you edit hotword text use these guidelines e Ifthe insertion point is within a hotword any additional characters you type become part of the hotword e Text you paste into a hotword becomes part of the hotword e If you select a hotword and include text that is not part of the hotword in the selection ToolBook treats the selection as text not as a hotword e You can delete a hotword by using the backspace key or the delete key As long as one character of the hotword text remains the hotword s object properties such as hyperlinks remain ToolBook discards the hotword as an object when the last character of the hotword is deleted To make hotword editing easier you c
450. tyl amp e Creating Hyperlinks Hyperlinks allow you to connect information in a variety of ways For example you can define a hyperlink that navigates to or pops up a related page to display more information about a topic You can also define special effects for hyperlinks For example when the link goes to another page you can specify a transition effect When the link pops up another page you can select a style for the pop up window In addition you can create links that navigate to a URL on the Internet or an intranet gt To create a hyperlink for a button 1 Select the button on the page 2 From the Object menu select the Hyperlink option The Hyperlink dialog box appears In the Type of link list select the kind of link you want to use Optional If you want to display the page in a window you ve created using a viewer select the name of the viewer in the In window list Under Link to select or enter the page or URL option you want Optional Do one of the following m Specify a transition effect for the hyperlink Transition effects are available only when you choose Go to another page as the type of link you want to use Specify a style for the hyperlink s pop up window These settings are available only when you choose Pop up another page as the type of link you want to use 7 Click OK For more information about hyperlinks and linking options see Chapter 6 Working with Objects 132 Copyright 2012 SumTo
451. u gt To insert an inline graphic Using the interface 1 Double click the field to display the insertion point and then move the insertion point to where you want to insert the graphic 2 From the Text menu choose Insert Graphic choose or import the graphic file you want and then click OK ToolBook inserts the graphic into the field 114 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Inserting Special Characters Using OpenScript e Use the insert graphic command to insert the graphic into a field insert graphic bitmap Fog into char 1 of textline 3 of text of field Horn insert graphic icon speaker into last char of text of hotword sound insert icon ID 100 after text of field ID 1 insert graphic bitmap Fog before text of focus insert graphic cursor wait into char 2 of selectedText Inserting Special Characters You can also insert ANSI American National Standards Institute characters to create curled single and double quotation marks or em dashes copyright or trademark symbols and other helpful characters To type ANSI characters hold down the ALT key and then using the numeric keypad type 0 and the ANSI number that corresponds to the character you want For example to type a copyright symbol hold down the ALT key and type 0169 Note Some font styles do not support the ANSI character set You may need to change fonts in orde
452. u optimize a book for CD ROM you can specify whether the book uses a temporary or permanent cache file A cache file which is stored on the user s hard disk contains information that ToolBook needs to access frequently Using a cache file can make a CD ROM application run significantly faster especially for users who have a single or double speed CD ROM drive however cache files do not improve the speed of newer faster CD ROM drives Cache files are used only when books are run from the CD ROM not when they are installed from the CD ROM and run from the hard drive Tip If you make changes to your book after creating a cache file you must recreate the cache file gt To build a cache file for a book 1 Save the book under a new name as described in Compressing your book earlier in this chapter 2 From the File menu choose Save As 3 Enter or navigate to the book s original file name 4 Select Optimize for CD ROM 5 Click Cache File Options to open the Cache File Options dialog box 6 Under Build cache file choose Temporary or Permanent If you choose Never no cache file is created To improve startup speed in a large book significantly use the Permanent option 7 Under Cache file type choose Minimal Preferred or Extended 8 Optional To preview the amount of disk space required for the cache file click Show Sizes Previewing can take a significant amount of time 9 Click OK to close all dialog boxes U
453. ur application the clip isn t saved in the book instead ToolBook saves the location of the clip s media source file and each time the clip is activated opens and runs that file The location where the media source file is stored is called its path If you plan to use Publish to Web or the ToolBook AutoPackager to prepare your file for distribution you dont need to set media paths as you work with clips Publish to Web and the AutoPackager will resolve all media path issues for you However if you plan to package your application using InstallShield or another setup program you will need to understand how to work with media clip paths Regardless of how you plan to package and distribute your application you can take one simple step during the development process to ensure that your completed ToolBook application can easily locate and play your media files As you build your application create an organized directory structure in which media files are stored in a subdirectory of the application file For example if your book is stored in C Books store your media files in C Books Media For more information on creating an organized directory structure see Planning your project in Chapter 2 Basic Concepts Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 187 Adding Audio and Video Files Making Clip Paths Independent In order to distribute a multimedia application without knowing in advance where
454. urse author When used in a course that has an assessment or a quiz the certificate page displays the score obtained by the learner as well Check Box A button style that consists of a square box and a button caption A check mark toggles on and off when the check box is clicked at Reader level when checked the option is turned on Check Mark The symbol that appears next to a menu item or in a check box indicating that the option is selected Choosing the menu item again or clicking a checked check box turns the option off and hides the check mark See also check box Child Object In ToolBook an object that is owned by another object For example a button on a page is a child object of the page Child Window A window that is entirely contained within and cannot be dragged beyond the boundaries of its parent window A child window can be minimized or tiled within its parent and closes when its parent window closes See also pop up window Chromakey A feature that allows you to create transparent areas in bitmaps by specifying a color to make invisible Client Application An application that can accept linked and embedded objects from a server application ToolBook is a client application See also server application Compare object linking and embedding Client Area The area inside the frame window including the client window See also client window frame window Client Window The portion of the client area that displays pages and back
455. users will install it ToolBook provides media search paths which are book properties that allow you to store the file name of a media source file separately from its path The file name is stored with the clip and you can add the clip s path to a media search path When you play the clip ToolBook adds the media search path to the clip reference so that it can find the media source file For example e Media search path C Books e File on the hard disk C Books Video Show avi e File name stored in clip reference Video Show avi e Media search path plus clip reference C Books Video Show avi If you create a clip without setting a media search path the clip reference includes the entire path for the media source file including the drive letter subdirectories and the file name The media clip will only play on a computer with the same directory structure as the authoring computer File organization becomes especially important when you are setting the media search paths for your book Although we recommend a structure in which your media files are contained ina subdirectory of your book files for example Books Media ToolBook is able to adapt to almost any orderly consistent organization If you intend to distribute your application on a CD ROM replicate the directory and file structure of the CD ROM on your hard disk and specify the replicated structure on your hard drive as the CD ROM search path during development ToolBook ha
456. ustomizes how ToolBook imports the text data The OpenScript import command always creates new pages on a new background To assign text to an existing page or background use the openFile and readFile commands To control how much text is placed in each field use the readFile command For example Imports a file that contains fixed length records of 80 characters to handle buttonClick DataFile c import txt File name clear sysError openFile DataFile readFile DataFile for 80 while It is not null and sysError is null Sends a message to another handler to process the record send processRecord It readFile DataFile for 80 end closeFile DataFile end Imports a text file into the text of a field and replaces CRLF characters with spaces to handle buttonClick set the filename in a variable to make the code mor fficient and to make it easier to change later dataFile C import txt openFile dataFile clear text of field WP text while sysError is not end of file readFile dataFile to LF if last char of It is CR clear last char of It Clears trailing CR character end put space amp It after text of field WP text end closeFile dataFile end 264 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Importing ToolBook XML Importing ToolBook XML ToolBook XML format tbkx is a way to represent a ToolBook book as XML This is useful when
457. variables 2 From the Insert menu point to Action point to Object and then choose Set Property The Properties for Action dialog box appears 3 Do the following a Inthe Select the object for which to set the property list select self b Inthe Select the property to set list select checked c Check Specify the new value for the property as a literal value d Inthe Select logical value list select true and then click OK Select the Else condition Following the steps above create an action that sets the checked property of self to false Click OK From the File menu choose Update Actions amp Close NO go PF Tip If you want to use the list items to send users to pages you can follow the steps in Example 1 to create an action sequence that sends users to specific pages in response to the On click event Testing the Action Sequence You will want to test this action sequence to ensure that the state of the button changes after the About variables page is visited gt To test the action sequence 1 Press F3 to switch to Reader level 2 Using the navigation buttons go to the About variables page of the book and then return to the Contents page If the check graphic appears next to About variables in the Contents list your action sequence is working and you are ready to return to Reader level and continue with the next example If the graphic doesnt change your action sequence is not working Return to Autho
458. vice for playing media files including audio digital video and streaming media is the Universal Media Player It supports most standard media types is programmable using the Actions Editor and retains all functionality when Published to DHTML Simply drag the Universal Media Player object from the Catalog to your page specify the media file to be played and set properties that determine how the media appears and behaves Alternatively you can use one of several other media player objects available in the Catalog These objects offer additional buttons and design options but more limited functionality Choosing a media player Media Player Supports Advantages Limitations Universal Media Most currently available Works the same when Will not display some still Player digital video audio and Published to DHTML as in image formats streaming media formats ToolBook runtime Programmable using the Actions Editor visual programming tool Has a single consistent authoring interface which makes it easy to learn and use Media players Specific audio digital Allow you more control over To play certain types of video and still image files the appearance of the object media files users must as listed in the Catalog on the page in ToolBook load the proper software description runtime drivers on their computers Allow limited programming with the Actions Editor visual programming tool Copyright 2012 SumTota
459. w file to be published Click Save to continue publishing or Cancel to cancel the publishing Do one of the following f you clicked Cancel to cancel the publishing click Cancel in the SumTotal Publish to ToolBook dialog box and return to PowerPoint Once publishing is over click OK in the Publish dialog box Publish o LL Publish complete Note The SumTotal Publish to ToolBook add in names pages based on the title placeholder field in the PowerPoint slide that contains text This text if any becomes the page title when exported to ToolBook Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Importing ToolBook XML About ToolBook XML ToolBook XML consists of a series of files and supporting resources This folder structure can be compressed into a tbkx file for improved portability The SumTotal Publish to ToolBook add in converts a PowerPoint into a compressed ToolBook XML book with the tbkx extension To uncompress a ToolBook XML book rename it to a zip file and open it using Windows Explorer or any zip program A sample folder structure of an uncompressed ToolBook XML file is shown in the screenshot below Name Size Type Date Modified SyBackgrounda File Folder 2 10 2010 12 29 PM Pagen File Folder 2 10 2010 12 29 PM Resources File Folder 2 10 2010 12 29 PM Book 3KB XML Document 6 26 2009 12 16 PM Figure 8 A sample folder structure of an uncompressed
460. wing script in a button s script or another object other than the list box to determine the item that the user has selected in the single select list box to handle buttonClick choice selectedTextlines of field list if choice lt gt null vHighlightedText textline choice of text of field list request vhighlightedText end end If the field is a multi select list box selectedTextlines contains a list of numbers for the lines that are highlighted You can step through the list to pick out individual line numbers and then use the line numbers one by one to extract the highlighted text For example to handle buttonClick choices selectedTextlines of field list if choices lt gt 0 step ctr from 1 to itemCount choices nextLineNo item ctr of choices textFromList textline nextLineNo of text of field list request next choice is amp amp textFromList end end end 148 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Determining User Selection Determining Combo Box Selection Using OpenScript After the user clicks the pushbutton of a combo box and makes a selection from the drop down list the message selectChange is sent to the combo box along with a parameter indicating the user s choice Use a handler like the following to detect what the user has selected to handle selectChange itemString request User has selected amp amp itemString end
461. x Note You cannot apply a pattern to fields buttons or video players Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 87 Working with Objects Moving Objects Between Layers When running an application at Reader level a user sees a unified page in the main window However each page can consist of many layers A layer is where ToolBook places an object in the relative order of all objects on either the page or background You do not see a layer you see only the objects on a layer A pattem can appear on the background Each background object is on separate layer Each foreground object ison a separate layer The user sees one unified page Figure 5 The layers of a page When you create a new object ToolBook adds a layer to the front of the current page or background and then places the new object on that layer The layer order affects the following aspects of a page e When objects overlap the objects on higher layers appear to be placed on top of objects on lower layers e When tabbing between buttons and fields the focus moves in order from the object on the lowest layer to the object on the highest layer For more information about the focus and tabbing see Planning layer order for tabbing at Reader level later in this chapter e When ToolBook searches for text it starts searching from the field or button with the focus and then searches fields on higher layers
462. x appears Click Blank select one of the blank book types and then click Create Book The Confirm Deployment Method dialog box appears click Yes to continue ToolBook opens the book Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 51 Creating Books and Pages Creating Backup Copies It is always a best practice to back up your work during development This way if you make significant changes to a book that you would like to discard you have the opportunity to go to a previous version There are two main ways to create backup copies of your work e Set the options in ToolBook to make copies of your work automatically e Use the Save As option to create backups manually Using ToolBook s Backup Feature You can set options in ToolBook to save a backup of your book whenever you save your work Using this feature you can have ToolBook create up to nine backup files The number of backup files you select determines how many versions of the book will be available to you ToolBook default value for this is 1 but it is recommended that you increase this value The naming of the backup files created by ToolBook works in the following way The most recent backup of your file will end with an extension of BAK the second most recent backup will end with an extension of 001 the third most recent backup will end with an extension of 002 etc gt To use ToolBook s backup feature function 1 From t
463. xtended Properties button on the toolbar The Properties dialog box appears 2 On the Time Markers tab do the following a Select Enable time markers b Select Periodic c Type a value for the intervals between the time markers 3 Click OK Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 179 Adding Audio and Video Files Most media types measure their positions in milliseconds Some media types however measure their position in frames The controls on the Time Marker tab of the Properties for Universal Media Player dialog box are labeled according to the position format for the selected media type gt To set time markers at specific points in the media file 1 Select the Universal Media Player object and then click the Extended Properties button on the toolbar The Properties for Universal Media Player dialog box appears 2 On the Time Markers tab do the following a Select Enable time markers b Select Specific times c Do one of the following Click Play and as the file plays set a time marker at the current position in the media file by clicking Add time marker Select the field under Marker Time press CTRL ENTER or right click and select New Time Marker and then replace Enter Marker with a time in milliseconds or a frame number that corresponds with a position in the media file a Optional Enter descriptive text in the Comment field b Repeat steps a to
464. y Confirmation Actions Sequence 2D Display Query Actions 1 Display Popup Text Palette lt Statusbar Figure 7 The Actions Editor window gt To open the Actions Editor for an object 40 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Working at Author Level e Do one of the following With the object selected from the Object menu choose Actions With the object selected click the Actions button on the ToolBook toolbar Right click the object and then click the Actions button on the right click menu With the object selected press F5 With the object selected display the Properties dialog box and then click the Actions button on the toolbar of the Properties dialog box For more information about the Actions Editor see Chapter 17 Using the Actions Editor and Chapter 18 Creating Action Sequences Practical Examples Using the Book Explorer The Book Explorer allows you to view all of the objects in your book in a convenient outline format You can edit information about an individual object such as a page name The Book Explorer is also useful for reordering pages in your book simply drag and drop the page icons into a new order Book Explorer x Pages J Interaction Multiple Choice Interaction True False Certificate Backgrounds Standard Certificate Figure 8 The Book Explorer You can use the Boo
465. y changing its line style fill color and fill pattern You can also specify that an object or background take its color settings from a user s operating system settings This allows you to create applications with a color scheme that will appear as a natural part of a user s Windows interface You can also make an object transparent or opaque This section describes how to change the appearance of objects by setting properties For additional information about setting properties see Chapter 7 Setting object properties Applying Line Styles You specify the style of a line such as solid dashed or dotted the width of a line and the type of line ends in the Properties dialog box You can also change the line style of an object s bounding box A bounding box is the rectangular area around a graphic object such as a bitmap or paint object that indicates its dimensions gt To specify line style or width 1 Do one of the following To modify a line select the line you want to modify Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 85 Working with Objects To modify an object s bounding box select a graphic object 2 Click the Properties button on the ToolBook toolbar 3 Click the Draw tab and then choose the line style you want in the Line style list 4 Optional Close the Properties dialog box gt To specify line ends 1 Select the line you want to modify 2 Click the
466. y e X Reply I Replyto All cropped screen image Favorite Folders y Mail Folders and the button is P au Mail placed on top of a screen image to provide B Mailbox Danny interactive behavior Figure 2 Placing a button on top of a graphic 280 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited Developing a Simulation Manually In a simulation developed from scratch a number of component objects are added to the ToolBook page to build the simulation interface You can add objects such as text fields to a simulation page at any time during the development of the simulation Often it is easier to have the necessary objects for a step in a simulation placed on the page before setting up the properties for the step in the Simulation Editor Usually a simulation includes one or more text fields Instructions for completing the current step in the simulation are displayed in a text field You can use the same text field or a different text field to show feedback text that may display immediately after a learner makes an incorrect attempt to complete a step in the simulation Another option for displaying feedback text is to use a pop up field The options for displaying instructions and feedback text are available on the Controls tab in the Properties for Simulation dialog box in the Simulation Editor Properties for Simulation Display with step level feedback in the f
467. y the animation repeatedly or specify conditions for playing the animation gt To create an action sequence that plays an animation 1 Select an object for example a button or graphic 2 From the Object menu choose Actions The Actions Editor appears 3 Inthe Event list select an event that activates the action sequence for example On click or On load page 4 From the Insert menu in the Actions Editor point to Action point to Media and then choose Play Media The Properties for Action dialog box appears In the Select the media type list select Animate an object In the Select an object to animate list select the object for which an animation has been created or drag the Choose object button over the object to select it Click OK From the File menu in the Actions Editor choose Update Actions amp Close Switch to Reader level press F3 to test your animation Using OpenScript to Play an Animation Path animations can be played and stopped with OpenScript messages You begin an animation by sending the message to the object whose animation you want to play ToolBook sends the message to move the object along the animation path and to stop the animation when it finishes e To play an object s entire path animation send the playAnimation message send playAnimation 1 this page true to ellipse Moon e To move the object one step along its animation path send the playStep message send playStep 1 to sel
468. you can adjust the appearance and size of the software application window to reduce the distractions of unnecessary toolbars palettes and other items Toolbars that are not used during a simulation can be closed The status bar can be turned off in some applications to save space on the page if desired You can adjust the size of the application window to draw attention to the more important areas of the screen When you are creating a simulation manually there are several ways to capture images of the screen e Use a screen capture application such as SnagIt e Use a graphics program that includes a screen capture feature such as Photolmpact e Use the capture feature provided in Windows to copy an image to the Clipboard press Print Screen to copy an image of the active window and then paste the image into a graphics program to save it Captured screen images are often saved in a compressed file format to reduce the total file size of a simulation If you plan to deliver a simulation through a Web browser the screen images should be saved in file format that is compatible with a browser such as GIF PNG or J PEG files To display graphics drag the the Image object from the Commonly Used Objects category of the Catalog to a simulation page Cropping an image can be a useful way to modify a captured image A simulation may show only a portion of the captured screen graphic to reduce the overall dimensions of the screen graphic An im
469. you can disable an action instead of deleting it this is equivalent to commenting out a line of code gt To disable or enable actions in an action sequence 1 Select one or more actions in the action sequence To select multiple actions press CTRL while you click the actions 2 Inthe Actions Editor from the Action menu choose Enabled A check mark appears beside the command when the action is enabled Disabled actions appear in gray in the Actions Editor Importing and Exporting Action Sequences You may want to use the same action sequence in more than one ToolBook book You can use the same sequence of actions in more than one book by using the Import and Export commands When you export a sequence of actions ToolBook saves the exported actions in a file with a tba extension in the location you specify Note If the action sequence you are importing contains explicit object references or uses variables be sure that the book or action sequence into which you are importing the file contains the same object names and variable names In the Actions Editor you can select and export specific actions You can also import actions and insert them after a selected action in the action sequence In the Shared Actions dialog box you can export an entire shared action sequence or create a new shared action sequence by importing actions Importing and Exporting Actions in the Actions Editor When you export actions from the Actions Edit
470. you can enter text into it on any page that shares that background by switching to the foreground press F4 double clicking the record field and then typing your text You can type different text into the record field on each page For example if you have a record field on a background and that background is shared by five pages you can type different text into each of the record fields ToolBook will then display different text on all five pages Tip To prevent users from typing text into a record field in which you re displaying text or inline graphics in the Properties for Record Field dialog box select the Lock the text and activate mouse events if the field is enabled check box ee em T Course X93 Level 2 File Edit View Go Text Help POLICIES amp PROCEDURES Basic Training Question 1 Class G information must be processed within a seven day window r T Course X93 Level 2 O Tne File Edit View Go Text O False A recordfield disolays different text on every page POLICIES amp PROCEPURES Basic Training Question 2 The department goal is to achieve a 95 or greater acceptance for all submitted forms True O False Click Next to continue Click Next to continue Figure 4 A record field displays text in the same location on pages that share the background 118 Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohi
471. z the certificate page displays the score obtained by the learner as well Once a learner completes a course he or she has the option of printing the certificate Certificate of Completion Using ToolBook Score 100 TOM SMITH Tuesday June 10 2008 Signature Copyright 2012 SumTotal Systems Inc All rights reserved Duplication prohibited 163 Adding a Certificate to a Book The Certificate page contains the following objects Certificate of completion The title of the certificate which is by default Certificate of Completion Student Name Displays the name of the learner If this lesson is launched from an AICC or SCORM LMS the learner s name is automatically obtained from the LMS to be used on the certificate If you are not using an LMS you can use the Student Name Prompt object typically placing it near the beginning of your lesson in order to prompt learners to provide their name This name will then later be used on the certificate Lastly you can choose to obtain the learner s name using the Actions Editor In order to get the Certificate to utilize this value apply that value to the Actions Editor global variable Certificate StudentName If the learner s name cannot be determined at the time the certificate is displayed the certificate will prompt the learner to enter his or her name Book Title Displays the title of the book This field is auto populated from the Book Title property on the

ToolBook 11.5 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents